Diploma in Automotive Engineering

REPUBLIC OF KENYA
TECHNICAL, INDUSTRIAL, VOCATIONAL

AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP TRAINING
DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS AND REGULATIONS
KENYA INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION

P O BOX 30231 00100
TEL 020 – 3749900-9
NAIROBI
DECEMBER 2008
KENYA INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION
TECHNICAL, INDUSTRIAL,
VOCATIONAL AND
ENTREPRENEURSHIP TRAINING
DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING
SYLLABUS AND REGULATIONS
DECEMBER 2008
ii
Kenya Institute of Education
P O Box 30231 – 00100
Nairobi
Email: info@kie.com
Off Murang’a Road
First published 2009
© Kenya Institute of Education
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in retrieval
system or transcribed in any form, or by any means; electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the
copyright of the Director, Kenya Institute of Education
ISBN ---- -- --- -
iii
Contents
Foreword .......................................................................................................v
1.0 General Introduction...........................................................................vi
1.1 National Goals for Education.....................................................vi
1.2 National Aims of Technical Training Programmes.................viii
1.3 Objectives of The Technician Training Programmes...............viii
2.0 Introduction to the Course................................................................viii
2.2 General Objectives of the Course...............................................ix
2.3 General Regulations...................................................................ix
2.4 Attendance and Course Work Requirements............................xii
2.5 Examinations and Award of Certificates..................................xiii
2.6 Course Coding and Time Allocation........................................xiv
Module I .......................................................................................................1
3.1.0 Communication Skills..........................................................................3
4.1.0 Life Skills...........................................................................................17
5.1.0 Information Communication Technology (ICT).............................42
6.1.0 Entrepreneurship................................................................................62
7.1.0 Mathematics I.....................................................................................72
8.1.0 Mechanical Science............................................................................81
9.1.0 Electrical And Electronics Principles.................................................90
10.1.0 Basic Engineering Drawing.............................................................104
11.1.0 Materials Technology and Metallurgy............................................112
12.1.01.0 Workshop Technology......................................................................126
12.1.0 Vehicle Technology..........................................................................157
Module II ...................................................................................................145
13.2.0 Business Plan...................................................................................146
14.2.0 Mathematics II.................................................................................157
15.2.0 Strength of Materials.......................................................................164
16.2.0 Mechanics of Machines...................................................................175
17.2.0 Industrial Organisation and Management.......................................187
18.2.0 Engineering Drawing and Design...................................................200
19.2.0 Engine Technology..........................................................................210
20.2.0 Vehicles Bodywork..........................................................................220
Module III ...................................................................................................227

21.3.0 Computer Aided Design (AutoCAD)..............................................228
22.3.0 Thermodynamics.............................................................................238
23.3.0 Fluid Mechanics..............................................................................251
24.3.0 Control Systems and Instrumentation.............................................257
iv
25.3.0 Mathematics III................................................................................279
26.3.0 Auto Electric And Electronic...........................................................286
27.3.0 Trade Project....................................................................................311
Appendices ...................................................................................................316
Appendix I, Suggested Teaching and Learning Experiences.........................316
Appendix II, Suggested Evaluation Methods for this Course..........................317
Appendix III, Suggested List of Tools and Equipment....................................318
v
Foreword
The Technical Industrial Vocational and Entrepreneurship Training

(TIVET) programmes have been revised to cater for new technology, issues
and trends that have emerged since early ‘90s when the syllabi were
developed under the Technical Education Project (TEP) programme. The
review process has necessitated removal of outdated/irrelevant content. In
addition, the content has been revised and new areas included to help the
graduates of the programme acquire knowledge, practical skills, attitudes
and competence relating to occupations in various sectors of economic and
social life.
The syllabus is designed and organised to guide the trainer in the depth of
teaching, with a clear outline of the general objectives, specific objectives,
teaching/learning activities and suggested methods of evaluating the
trainee’s achievement.
The curriculum is modular and competency based allowing for trainees’
exit to the world of work and easy re-entry to the course.
I am grateful to the staff of Kenya Institute of Education, subject and

course panel members at the Kenya Institute of Education, the KIE
academic board, the staff of the MoHEST and all those who participated in
the development and the production of this syllabus.
Director Technical Education

Ministry of Higher Education Science and Technology
vi
1.0 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
1.1 National Goals for Education

The overall education policy goal of the Government of Kenya is to
achieve the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) and Education for
all (EFA) goals by 2015 in tandem with the national and international
commitments. The vision of the Ministry of Education, is “to have a
globally competitive education, training and research for Kenya’s
sustainable development” while the mission is “to provide,
promote, coordinate the provision of quality education, training and
research for the empowerment of individuals to become responsible and
competent citizens who value education as a lifelong process” as
envisaged by Kenya Vision 2030. The national goals of education are
given below:
i) Foster nationalism, patriotism and promote national unity

Kenya’s people belong to different ethnic groups, races and
religions, but these differences need not divide them. They must
be able to live and interact as Kenyans. It is a paramount duty of
education to help the youth acquire this sense of nationhood, by
removing conflicts and by promoting positive attitudes of mutual
respect, which enable them to live together in harmony, and foster
patriotism in order to make a positive contribution to the life of
the Nation.
ii) Promote the social economic, technological and industrial needs

for national development
Education should prepare the youth of the country to play an
effective and productive role in the life of the nation.
 Social Needs
Education in Kenya must prepare children for the changes in
attitudes and relationships, which are necessary for the smooth
process of a rapidly developing modern economy. There is bound
to be a silent social revolution following in the wake of rapid
modernization. Education should assist our youth to adapt to this
change.
 Economic Needs
Education in Kenya should produce citizens with skills,
knowledge, expertise and personal qualities that are required to
support a growing economy. Kenya is building up a modern and
independent economy, which is in need of adequate domestic
manpower.
vii
 Technological and Industrial Needs
Education in Kenya should provide the learners with the
necessary skills and attitudes for Industrial development. Kenya
recognizes the rapid industrial and technological changes taking
place, especially in the developed world. We can only be part of
this development if our education system deliberately focused on
knowledge, skills and attitudes that will prepare the youth for
these changing global trends.
iii) Promote individual development and self-fulfilment

Education should provide opportunities for the fullest
development of individual talents and personality. It should help
children to develop their potential, interests and abilities. A vital
aspect of individual development is character building.
iv) Promote sound moral and religious values

Education should provide for the development of knowledge,
skills and attitudes that will enhance acquisition of sound moral
values and help children to grow up into self-disciplined, self-
reliant and integrated citizens.
v) Promote social equality and responsibility

Education should promote social equality and foster a sense of
social responsibility within an education system, which provides
equal education opportunities for all. It should give all children
varied and challenging opportunities for collective activities and
corporate social service, irrespective of gender, ability or
geographical environment.
vi) Promote respect for and development of Kenya’s rich and

varied cultures
Education should instil in the youth of Kenya an understanding of
past and present cultures and their valid place in contemporary
society. The children should be able to blend the best of
traditional values with the changed requirements that, must follow
rapid development in order to build a stable and modern society.
vii) Promote international consciousness and foster positive

attitudes towards other nations
Kenya is part of the international community. It is part of the
complicated and interdependent network of peoples and nations.
Education should, therefore, lead the youth of the country to
accept membership in this international community with all the
obligations and responsibilities, rights and benefits that this
membership entails.
viii
viii) Promote positive attitudes towards good health and
environmental protection
Education should inculcate in the youth the value for good health
in order to avoid indulging in activities that will lead to physical
or mental ill health. It should foster positive attitudes towards
environmental development and conservation. It should lead the
youth to appreciate the need for a healthy environment.
1.2 National Aims of Technical Training Programmes

The aims of the technical training at both post primary and post
secondary levels should be to:
a) provide training opportunities for the increasing number of
school leavers to enable them to be self-supporting
b) develop practical skills and attitudes which will lead to
income generating activities in the urban and rural areas
through self-employment
c) provide practical education and training skills which are
responsive and relevant to
d) Kenya’s agricultural, industrial, commercial and economic
needs
e) provide the technical knowledge and vocational skills
necessary to enhance the pace of this nation’s development
f) encourage self-employment while at the same time producing
skilled artisans, technicians and technologists for both formal
and informal sectors at the ratio of one technologist to five
technicians to 30 craftsmen/artisans (1:5:30).
1.3 Objectives of the Technician Training Programmes

The general objectives of the technician training programmes are
to:
a) develop skills which will be responsive and relevant to the
country’s human resources required at the middle level;
b) prepare the trainees so that they can enter the world of work
with confidence for either salaried employment or self-
employment;
c) impart adequate skills which will enable the trainee to perform
middle supervisory functions.
2.0 Introduction to the Course

The Diploma in Automotive Engineering course is designed for Kenya
Certificate of Secondary Education graduates (or equivalent
qualifications), to provide trainees with skills, knowledge and attitudes
that will enable them perform and manage tasks in the Vehicle industry.
ix
The course is in modular form and it is designed to enable trainees acquire
adequate competencies for formal and informal employment and at the
same time prepare them for further training.
The course is in three modules. Each module prepares the trainee to

perform specific tasks and jobs whose total value combined will impart
the desired competencies, which will produce the required graduate By
the end of the course.
The course puts emphasis on practical work and competence acquisition,

thus, the trainee is required to spend adequate time on practical lessons.
The trainers are encouraged to continuously carry out research to establish

the emerging trends and issues in each area and integrate them in the
teaching. The trainers are further encouraged to take into considerations
the interests of persons with disability as prescribed in the Persons with
Disability Act of 2003.
The graduate of the course will be able to service, diagnose and repair
faults in Vehicles, manage an automotive workshop and market vehicle
parts while upholding the professional ethics and standards.
2.2 General Objectives of the Course

By the end of the course, the trainee should be able to:
a) test and analyze vehicle performance
b) interpret technical information on vehicle body work and performance
c) manage a vehicle production line
d) apply information communication technology in the vehicle industry
e) design and implement environment, health and safety programmes
f) apply information communication technology (ICT) in vehicle
production line and research
g) create a firm foundation for further training.
2.3 General Regulations
2.3.1 Approval of the Training Institutions

Institutions offering this course should be
recognized and approved by the Ministry responsible for
Training.
2.3.2 Duration of the Course

The course is designed to have 2970 hours. The trainee spends
2310 hours in the institution and 660 hours in industrial
attachment. The course is structured in THREE Modules as
outlined below:
x
Institution Industrial Total
Time Attachment Time
(Hours) Time (Hours)
(Hours)
Module I 990 - 990
Module II 660 330 990
Module III 660 330 990
Total 2310 660 2970
2.3.3 Entry Requirements

Trainees entering this course should have any of the following
minimum requirements:
a) Passed Kenya Certificate of Secondary

Education (KCSE) with a Mean grade of C (plain) with C
plain in cluster subjects i.e. Mathematics, English and
Physics/Physical science.
Or
b) Passed Craft Certificate in Automotive Engineering
Or
c) Passed National Vocational Certificate of Education and
Training (NVCET) Motor Vehicle Technology Level II
Option II graduate
Or
d) Equivalent qualifications as shall be determined by Kenya
National Examinations Council (KNEC)
2.3.4 Examinable Units
All the units in each module of the course are examinable
The examinations shall include Theory and Practical phase

tests for the core competency areas in each Module which
shall include:
Module I
3.1.0 Communication Skills - Theory
4.1.0 Life Skills - Theory
5.1.0 Information - Theory and Practice
Communication
Technology (ICT)
6.1.0 Entrepreneurship - Theory
Education
7.1.0 Mathematics I - Theory
xi
8.1.0 Mechanical Science - Theory
9.1.0 Electrical and - Theory and Practice
Electronics Principles
10.1.0 Basic Engineering - Practice
Drawing
11.1.0 Materials Technology Theory and Practice
and Metallurgy
12.1.01.0 Workshop Technology
12.1.0 Vehicle technology - Theory and Practice
Module II
13.2.0 Business Plan - Practice
14.2.0 Mathematics II - Theory
15.2.0 Strength of Materials - Theory and Practice
16.2.0 Mechanics of - Theory and Practice

Machines
17.2.0 Industrial - Theory
Organisation and
Management
18.2.0 Engineering Drawing - Practice
and Design
19.2.0 Engine Technology - Theory and Practice
20.2.0 Vehicle Body Work - Theory and Practice
Module III
21.3.0 Computer Aided - Practice
Design (AutoCAD)
22.3.0 Thermodynamics - Theory and Practice

23.3. Fluid Mechanics - Theory and Practice
24.3.0 Control Systems and - Theory and Practice
Instrumentation
25.3.0 Mathematics III - Theory

26.3.0 Auto Electric and - Theory and Practice
Electronic
27.3.0 Trade Project - Theory and Practice
Candidates do not have to take all the papers of a module at the same
sitting
xii
2.4 Attendance and Course Work Requirements
The candidates are expected to register for training at an institution
approved for the course for the theoretical and practical studies.
2.4.1 Coursework Marks

Continuous assessment marks for the course work must be kept
by the institution and details must be submitted to the Kenya
National Examinations Council (KNEC) in respect of each
candidate entered for the examinations at least two weeks before
the external examination is taken.
2.4.2 Coursework Assessment

Continuous assessment will be given a weighting of 30% and the
external examinations by KNEC will be given a weighting of 70%
in the determination of the final grade.
2.4.3 Compulsory Industrial Attachment/Internship for

Trainees
Before the end of the course, every trainee shall undergo
industrial an attachment/internship of 660 hours which shall be
taken in two phases. Industrial attachment shall be an integral
part of training and its assessment shall form part of the final
grade and certification.
The training institutions in collaboration with the organization
where the trainee is attached shall supervise the trainee during the
Industrial Attachment. The examining body shall provide the
modalities of industrial attachment assessment.
2.4.4 Project Work

A project in this context means a research carried out by an
individual trainee. It may be practical, mathematical, evaluative,
and descriptive or research based project. The project must have
well defined Objectives so that the trainee has something definite
to aim at, without inhibiting his/her initiative. The aim of the
project is to give trainees an opportunity to carry out an
independent work. The management and the assessment methods
of project work shall be determined by KNEC and the training
institutions.
xiii
2.5 Examinations and Award of Certificates
2.5.1 Assessment
The assessment of all the modules shall be competency based.
2.5.2 Internal Examinations

The training institutions will conduct course work and/or project
work assessments based on the competences acquired during the
training. The institutions will offer internal examinations By the
end of each module and keep these records for use By the end of
the course to determine the final grade. The course work or
project work and/or assessments shall also be used during the re-
entry to the course or for the award of credit transfer.
2.5.3 External Examinations

The Kenya National Examinations Council (KNEC) will offer
external examinations to trainees in all modules covered during
the training.
2.5.4 Eligibility for Candidates Entering Into External

Examinations
Candidates for external examinations must at the time of entry to
the examinations, have successfully completed the required
competencies in each course modules.
2.5.5 Coursework/continuous Assessment

Coursework/continuous Assessment will be prepared and marked
by the institutions.
The institutions will issue statement of results while the
examining body will award a certificate after completion of the
relevant modules.
2.5.6 Examination Results

In order to qualify for the award of Diploma in Automotive
Engineering the candidate must pass all the modules of the
course. Results of the examination as a whole will be issued in
five classes and for the individual papers will be in eight grades.
Each candidate will receive all records of performance, giving the
result in terms of class and grade.
The relationship between classes and grades is:
xiv
- Pass with distinction Grade 1 and 2
- Pass with credit Grade 3 and 4
- Pass Grade 5 and 6
- Referred Grade 7
- Fail Grade 8
Candidates, who fail any paper (module unit) in a particular

module, will be REFERRED in the failed paper and will be
allowed to re-sit three (3) times and pass within a period of five
(5) years after the date of the first sitting. Thereafter the
candidate will be discontinued from further re-sitting the paper(s).
2.5.7 Award of Certificate

The KNEC will issue the candidates with result slips for Modules
passed and a final certificate in Diploma Automotive Engineering.
2.5.8 General Examination Regulation

In the event of any inconsistency arising between the regulations
as set out in this syllabus and the General Regulations published
by the examining body, the General Regulations of the KNEC
shall prevail.
2.6 Course Coding and Time Allocation

Diploma in Automotive Engineering
Code Module Units Time
Hrs
Module I
3.1.0 Communication Skills 66
4.1.0 Life Skills 66
5.1.0 Information And Communication 99
Technology (ICT)
6.1.0 Entrepreneurship Education 66
7.1.0 Mathematics I 132
8.1.0 Mechanical Science 66
9.1.0 Electrical and Electronics Principles 66
10.1.0 Basic Engineering Drawing 99
11.1.0 Materials Technology and Metallurgy I 66
12.1.01.0 Workshop Technology 99
12.1.0 Vehicle Technology 165
Total Time for Module I 990
Module II
13.2.0 Business Plan 44
xv
14.2.0 Mathematics II 66
15.2.0 Strength of Materials 66
16.2.0 Mechanics of Machines 66
17.2.0 Industrial Organisation and Management 66
18.2.0 Engineering Drawing and Design 66
19.2.0 Engine technology 142
20.2.0 Vehicle Body Work 144
Time for Module II 660
Time for Industrial Attachment 330
Total Time for Module II 990
Module III
21.3.0 Computer Aided Design 88
22.3.0 Thermodynamics 88
23.3.0 Fluid Mechanics 44
24.3.0 Control Systems and Instrumentation 88
25.3.0 Mathematics III 66
26.3.0 Auto Electrics and Electronics 236
27.3.0 Trade Project 50
Time for Module III 660
Time for industrial attachment 330
Total Time for Module III 990
TOTAL TIME FOR THE COURSE 2970
xvi
DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOTIVE
ENGINEERING
MODULE I
xvii
MODULE I
Introduction
This module is designed to enable the trainee acquire necessary

knowledge, skills, attitudes and Competence that may be applied in the
vehicle repair and maintenance works. The module gives emphasis in the
study of vehicle technology. The module also designed to have knowledge
and skills in life skills and the related general education subjects.
General Objectives
By the end of the module the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the general engineering concepts
b) appreciate the need for human factors in the work place
c) understand vehicle technology
d) perform vehicle maintenance
e) apply acquired knowledge in ICT in research, net working and the
understanding of vehicle technology
f) observe safety regulations and standards when performing various
tasks
Key Competence
By the end of the module, the trainee should be able to demonstrate ability
to;
a) apply information communication technology
b) communicate effectively
c) cope with challenges posed by their physiological, psychological,
social and economic circumstances
d) venture into profit making activities.
e) Perform workshop processes
f) Perform routine vehicle service
The units covered in this module are:

3.1.0 Communication Skills
4.1.0 Life Skills
5.1.0 Information And Communication Technology (ICT)
6.1.0 Entrepreneurship Education
7.1.0 Mathematics I
8.1.0 Mechanical Science
9.1.0 Electrical and Electronics Principles
10.1.0 Basic Engineering Drawing
11.1.0 Materials Technology and Metallurgy I
12.1.01.0 Workshop Technology
12.1.0 Vehicle Technology
3.1.0 COMMUNICATION SKILLS
3.1.01 Introduction
The module unit is intended to equip the trainee with knowledge,
skills and attitudes to enable him/her to perform duties, process
information from a variety of sources and apply communication
skills at the work place.
By the end of the unit is a list of teaching/learning activities,

teaching/learning resources and evaluation methods that may be
applied in the implementation of the syllabus unit. The list is not
exhaustive and the instructor is encouraged to explore other
suitable methods.
3.1.02 General Objectives

By the end of this module unit, the trainee should be able to:
a) Appreciate the importance of communication in the work
place
b) Develop necessary skills for effective communication
c) Appreciate the use of different modes and forms of
communication
d) Appreciate the role of information and communication
technology in communication
e) Develop the necessary writing skills for various documents
f) Appreciate official etiquette, protocol and diplomacy at the
work place
g) Appreciate emerging issues in communication
3.103 Module Summary and Time Allocation

Communication Skills
Code Sub-Module Content Time
Unit Hrs
3.1.1 Introduction to  Terms and concept used
Communication  Essentials to effective
communication
2
 Role of ICT in
communication
3.1.2 Communication  Stages of communication
Process process
 Barriers to effective
communication
 Ways of overcoming
barriers
 Basic concepts of
transmission and receipt of a
message
 Feedback mechanism 2
 Ethical issues in
communication
3.1.3 Classification of  Types of communicatio0n
Communication  Use of various types of
communication 4
3.1.4 Forms of  Forms of communication
Communication  Advantages and 4
disadvantages of
3.1.5 Channels of  Communication channels
Communication  Advantages and 5
disadvantages
3.1.6 Official  Meaning of etiquette,
Etiquette, protocol and diplomacy
Protocol and 5
Diplomacy
3.1.7 Writing Skills  Punctuation marks
 Courtesy in writing
 Paragraph development
 Essay writing 10
 Functional writing
3.1.8 Summary  Importance of summary
writing
 Essential steps in summary 4
writing
3.1.9 Report Writing  Definition of a report
Skills  Role of reports
 Formats of reports
 Preparation for report
writing
 Report writing , editing and
dissemination
 Referencing styles 8
 Preparation of power point
slides
3.1.10 Conducting  Definition of terms 8
Meetings and  Role of meetings and
Minute Writing minutes
 Types of meetings
 Planning and conducting
meetings
 Minute writing
 Challenges in conducting
meetings
3.1.11 Interviews  Meaning of the term
interview
 Purpose of interviews
6
 Types of interviews
 Preparation for an interview
 Interviewing skills
3.1.12 Public Relations  Definition of term
and Customer  Types of customers
Care  Role of public relations and
customer care
 Interpersonal and public
4
relation skills
 Quality management
 Customer care skills
 Challenges faces in public
relation and customer care
3.1.13 Emerging Issues  Emerging trends and issues
in in communication
Communication  Challenges posed by
4
emerging issues and trends
 Ways of coping with
emerging issues and trends
Total 66
3.1.1 INTRODUCTION TO
COMMUNICATION 3.1.1P0 Specific Objectives
By the end of the sub-
Theory module unit, the
trainee should be able
3.1.1T0 Specific objectives to:
By the end of the sub- a) use terms and
module unit, the trainee concepts in
should be able to: communication
a) define terms and effectively
concepts used in b) apply essentials of
communication communication in
b) explain the purpose a given situation
of communication
c) explain the essential Content
steps to effective 3.1.1P1 Effective use of terms
communication and concepts in
d) explain the role of communication
Information and 3.1.1P2 Application of
Communication essentials of
Technology communication
e) (I.C.T.) in
communication 3.1.2 COMMUNICATION
PROCESS
3.1.1C Competence
The trainee should Theory
have the ability to:
i) use the terms and 3.1.2T0 Specific Objectives
concepts in By the end of the sub-
communication module unit, the trainee
effectively in should be able to:
ii) different a) describe the stages of
situations. the communication
process
Content b) identify barriers to
3.1.1T1 Terms and concepts effective
used in communication communication
3.1.1T2 Purpose of c) explain ways of
communication overcoming barriers to
3.1.1T3 Essentials to effective effective
communication communication
3.1.1T4 Role of I.C.T. in a) identify basic concepts
communication of transmission and
receipt of a message
b) describe feedback
Practice mechanism
c) explain ethical issues in iv) Decoding of
communication feedback by the
sender
3.1.2C Competence 3.1.2T5 Feedback mechanism
The trainee should 3.1.2T6 Ethical issues in
have the ability to: communication
i) Apply
communication Practice
process in a given
situation 3.1.2P0 Specific Objectives
ii) Overcome barriers to By the end of the sub-
effective module unit, the trainee
communication should be able to:
a) apply the
Content communication
3.1.2T1 Stages of process in a given
communication situation
process b) encode and decode
3.1.2T2 Barriers to effective messages
communication c) demonstrate ethical
i) Age difference issues in
ii) Social economic communication
factors
iii) Language Content
iv) Competition for 3.1.2P1 Application of the
attention process of
v) Noise communication
vi) Environment 3.1.2P2 Encoding and decoding
vii) Attitude of messages
sender/receiver and 3.1.2P3 Demonstration of
others ethical issues in
3.1.2T3 Ways of overcoming communication
barriers to effective
communication 3.1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF
3.1.2T4 Basic concepts of COMMUNICATION
transmission and
receipt of a message Theory
i) Encoding of message
by the sender 3.1.3T0 Specific Objectives
ii) Transmission of By the end of the sub-
message through a module unit, the trainee
channel should be able to:
iii) Decoding a message a) explain the various
by receiver types of
communication
b) explain the use of
various types of 3.1.4T0 Specific Objectives
communication By the end of the sub-
module unit, the
3.1.3C Competence trainee should be able
The trainee should to:
have the ability to a) explain the various
apply the various types forms of
of communications communication
b) discuss the
Content advantages and
3.1.3T1 Types of disadvantages of
communication each form of
i) Formal c) communication
ii) Informal
iii) Internal 3.1.4C Competence
iv) External The trainee should
v) Inter personal have the ability to use
vi) Intra-personal various forms of
3.1.3T2 Use of various types of communication
communication effectively
Practice Content
3.1.4T1 Forms of
3.1.3P0 Specific Objective communication
By the end of the sub- i) Oral
module unit, the ii) Written
trainee should be able iii) Visual
to apply the various iv) Audio-visual
types of 3.1.4T2 Advantages and
communication in disadvantages of each form
given situations of communication
Content Practice
3.1.3P1 Application of various
types of 3.1.4P0 Specific Objective
communication By the end of the sub-
module unit, the trainee
communication in a should be able to use the
given situation various forms of
communication.
3.1.4 FORMS OF
COMMUNICATION Content
Theory 3.1.4P Using various forms of
communication
3.1.5P0 Specific Objective
3.1.5 CHANNELS OF By the end of the sub-
COMMUNICATION module, the trainee
should be able to role
Theory play the use of different
channels of
3.1.5T0 Specific Objectives communication
module unit, the Content
trainee should be able 3.1.5P1 Role play of use of
to: different
a) outline the various channels of
channels of communication
communication in an
organization 3.1.6T0 OFFICIAL
b) discuss the ETIQUETTE,
advantages and PROTOCOL AND
disadvantages of DIPLOMACY
each channel of
c) communication Theory
3.1.5C Competence 3.1.6T0 Specific Objectives

The trainee should By the end of the sub-
have the ability to module unit, the
apply various channels trainee should be able
of communication in a to:
given situation a) explain the meaning
of etiquette, protocol
Content and diplomacy
3.1.5T1 Channels of b) explain the
communication importance of
i) Vertical official etiquette
ii) Upwards c) explain the accepted
iii) Downwards protocol and
iv) Lateral/horizontal diplomacy
v) Diagonal
3.1.5T2 Advantages and 3.1.6C Competence
disadvantages The trainee should have
of each channel of the
communication ability to:
i) Interact with others
without offending
ii) Observe protocol
requirements
Practice iii) Exercise diplomacy
in daily interactions
iv) Adhere to official d) explain how to write
etiquette different types of
requirements essays
e) determine how to
Content write different
3.1.6T1 Meaning of etiquette, functional writing
protocol and diplomacy
3.1.6T2 Official etiquette 3.1.7C Competence
3.1.6T3 Accepted protocol and The trainee will have
vi) diplomacy the ability to:
i) Punctuate correctly
Practice ii) Prepare business
documents
3.1.6P0 Specific objectives
By the end of the sub- Content
module unit, the 3.1.7T1 Punctuation marks
trainee should be able 3.1.7T2 Courtesy in writing
to i) Use of polite
practice the accepted language
official etiquette ii) Choice of words
iii) Right expressions
Content 3.1.7T3 Paragraph
3.1.6P1 Demonstration of development
accepted i) Topic sentence
official etiquette ii) Support details
3.1.7T4 Essay writing
3.1.7 WRITING SKILLS i) Descriptive
ii) Explanatory
Theory iii) Narrative
iv) Argumentative
3.1.7T0 Specific Objectives 3.1.7T5 Functional writing
By the end of the sub- i) Business letters
module unit, the ii) Memorandum
trainee should be able iii) Notices
to: iv) Agenda
a) determine how to v) Minutes
use punctuation vi) Advertisements
marks in a written vii) E-mail
document viii) Facsimile messages
b) explain the ix) Press release
importance of
courtesy in writing Practice
c) develop well
constructed 3.1.7P0 Specific Objectives
paragraphs
module unit, the trainee Content
should be able to: 3.1.8T1 Importance of
a) use correct punctuation summary writing
b) apply courtesy in 3.1.8T2 Essential steps in
writing summary writing
c) write different types of
essays Practice
d) write different types of
functional writing 3.1.8P0 Specific Objective
Content module unit, the
3.1.7P1 Punctuating correctly trainee should be able
3.1.7P2 Demonstrating to take notes and
courtesy in writing summarize passages,
3.1.7P3 Writing different types reports and
of essays conversations
3.1.7P4 Writing different 3.1.8P1 Summarizing passages,
functional writing reports and
conversations
3.1.8 SUMMARY
3.1.9 REPORT WRITING
Theory SKILLS
3.1.8T0 Specific Objectives Theory

module unit, the 3.1.9T0 Specific Objectives
trainee should be able By the end of the sub-
to: module unit, the trainee
a) explain the importance should be able to:
of summarizing a)define the term report
passages/information b) explain the role of
b) determine the steps in reports in an
note taking when organization
summarizing passages, c) name different types of
c) reports and reports
conversations d) explain the formats of
reports
e) explain the steps to take
in preparation for report
writing in engineering
3.1.8C Competence f) explain how to write,
The trainee should have edit and disseminate
the ability to summarize reports
passages, reports and
conversations
g) explain the referencing ii) Reading skills
styles used in iii) Data collection
engineering reports iv) Data analysis
h) prepare power point 3.1.9T6 Report writing, editing
presentations and dissemination
3.1.9T7 Referencing styles
3.1.9C Competence 3.1.9T8 Preparation of power
The trainee should have point slides
the ability to:
i) Prepare effective Practice
reports
ii) Adapt reports to various 3.1.9P0 Specific Objectives
audiences By the end of the sub-
iii) Apply I.C.T. in report module unit, the trainee
writing, editing and should be able to:
dissemination a) prepare different
iv) Present reports using types of reports
power point b) edit and disseminate
presentations reports
v) Select appropriate c) present a report
referencing styles in through power point
engineering slides
Content
Content 3.1.9P1 Preparation of different
3.1.9T1 Definition of a report types of reports
3.1.9T2 Role of reports in an 3.1.9P2 Editing and
organization dissemination
3.1.9T3 Types of reports of reports
i) Oral 3.1.9P3 Presenting a report
ii) Written
iii) Management reports
iv) Operations
procedures
v) Production schedules
vi) Maintenance,
breakdown and
accident reports
vii) Entrepreneurship and 3.1.10 CONDUCTING
trade reports MEETINGS AND
viii) Internal memos MINUTE WRITING
3.1.9T4 Formats of reports Theory

3.1.9T5 Preparation for report
writing 3.1.10T0 Specific Objectives
i) Audience analysis
By the end of the sub- 3.1.10P0 Specific Objective
module unit, the trainee By the end of the sub-
should be able to: module unit, the
a) define the terms trainee should be able
meetings and minutes to write minutes
b) explain the role of correctly
meetings and minutes
in an organization Content
c) identify types of 3.1.10P1 Writing minutes
meetings
d) discuss how to plan and 3.1.11 INTERVIEWS
conduct meetings
e) highlight the challenges Theory
faced in the conduct of
meetings and minute 3.1.11T0 Specific Objectives
f) writing By the end of the sub-
g) discuss the advantages module unit, the trainee
and disadvantages of should be able to:
meetings a) explain the meaning of
the term ‘interview’
3.1.10 C Competence b) explain the purpose of
The trainee should interviews in an
have the ability to plan organization
and conduct meetings c) discuss the various
Write minutes types of interviews
effectively d) explain how to prepare
for an interview
Content e) e) explain the skills
3.1.10T1 Definition of the terms for
meetings and minutes f) interviewing
3.1.10T2 Role of meetings and
minutes in an
organization
3.1.10T3 Types of meetings
3.1.10T4 Planning and
conducting 3.1.11C Competence
Meetings The trainee should
3.1.10T5 Challenges in conduct have the ability to:
of meetings and minute i) Conduct interviews
writing ii) Prepare for an
3.1.10T6 Advantages and interview as an
disadvantages of interviewee
meetings iii) Prepare for an
interview as an
Practice interviewer
Content By the end of the sub-
3.1.11T1 Meaning of the term module unit, the trainee
‘interview’ should be able to:
3.1.11T2 Purpose of an a) define the terms public,
interviews in an customer and public
organization relations
3.1.11T3 Types of interviews b) name different types of
3.1.11T4 Preparation for an customers
interview c) explain the role of
i) Dressing and public relations and
grooming customer care in an
ii) Role of interviewer organization
iii) Role of interviewee d) explain interpersonal
iv) Interview and public relations
environment skills
3.1.11T5 Interviewing skills e) define quality
i) Briefing skills management
ii) Conducting the f) explain the skills in
interview customer care
iii) Debriefing skills g) explain the challenges
faced in public relations
Practice and customer care
3.1.11P0 Specific Objective 3.1.12C Competence

By the end of the sub- The trainee should
module unit, the trainee have the ability to:
should be able to role i) Demonstrate proper
play as an public relations
interviewer and as an ii) Interact with
interviewee different types of
people
Content iii) Care for customers
appropriately
3.1.11P1 Role playing the
interviewer Content
and interviewee 3.1.12T1 Definition of the terms
public, customer and
public relations
3.1.12 PUBLIC RELATIONS 3.1.12T2 Types of customers
AND CUSTOMER 3.1.12T3 Role of public relations
CARE and customer care in an
organization
Theory 3.1.12T4 Interpersonal and
public relations skills
3.1.12T0 Specific Objectives 3.1.12T5 Quality management
3.1.12T6 Customer care skills
3.1.12T7 Challenges faced in Content
public 3.1.13T1 Emerging trends and
relations and customer issues in
care communication
3.1.13T2 Challenges posed by
Practice emerging trends and
issues
3.1.12P0 Specific Objective 3.1.13T3 Ways of coping with
By the end of the sub- the emerging trends
module unit, the trainee and issues
should be able to apply
public relation skills in Suggested Teaching/Learning
dealing with the various Activities
people i) Group
work/presentations
Content ii) Debating
3.1.12P1 Application of public iii) Observations
relation skills iv) Listening to
lecturers/resource
3.1.13 EMERGING ISSUES persons
IN COMMUNICATION v) Drama/role playing
vi) Excursions
Theory
Suggested Teaching/Learning
3.1.13T0 Specific Objectives Resources
By the end of the sub- - Boards
module unit, the trainee - Charts
should be able to: - Language laboratory
a) state emerging trends - Machines and equipment
and issues in - Power point
communication - Projectors
b) outline challenges - Audio tapes
posed by emerging - Telephone/fax
issues - E-mail
c) explain ways of coping - Internet
with emerging trends - Lecturers and resource
and issues in persons
d) communication - Library
- Newspapers/magazines/
3.1.13C Competence journals
The trainee should have
the ability to cope with Suggested Evaluation Methods
emerging trends and - Oral tests
issues in - Timed written tests
communication - Assignments
4.1.0 LIFE SKILLS
4.1.01 Introduction
The youth face many challenges due to their
physiological, psychological, social and economic
circumstances. This makes them a particularly vulnerable
group.
This module unit is intended to equip them with

knowledge, skills, attitudes and values that empower
them to face realities of life. It is hoped that this will
enable them to take responsibility for their individual
actions.
At the end of the unit is a list of teaching/learning

activities, teaching/learning resources and evaluation
methods that may be applied in the implementation of the
syllabus unit. The list is not exhaustive and the instructor
is encouraged to explore other suitable methods.

By the end of the sub module unit, the trainee should be
able to:
a) Develop an awareness and understanding of every
day demands and challenges
b) Understand and deal with their health problems, fears
and anxieties about growing up, sexuality and
relationships
c) Enhance self-esteem and assertiveness in their
relationships with peers and adults
d) Develop an appreciation of females and males as
equal partners in society
e) Make optimum use of available resources in order to
improve the quality of life
f) Develop attitudes, values and skills that promote
positive responsible and healthy life styles
g) Develop an understanding support and a sense of care
and responsibility for disadvantaged groups in the
community
4.1.03 Module Unit Summary and Time Allocation
Life Skills
Code Sub Module Unit Content Time
Hrs
4.1.1 Introduction to  Define the term life skills 2
Life skills  Categories
 Benefits
 Living values and our lives
 Relationship between life skills
and living values
4.1.2 Knowing and  Self description 4
Living With  Self assessment
Oneself: Self  Challenges that hinder the
Awareness attainment of life goals
 Strategies of overcoming
challenges
 Values associated with self
awareness skill
4.1.3 Self Esteem  Definition of self esteem 2
 Signs of high and low self
esteem in an individual
 Signs of low self esteem
 Effects of low self esteem
 Factors that enhance high and
low esteem
 Importance of high self esteem
 Values associated with high
self esteem
 How to boost self esteem
4.1.4 Stress  Definition of emotion 2
Management  Definition of stress
 Causes of stress
 Effects of stress
 Coping with stress
 Forms of positive stress
 Values associated to positive
stress management
4.1.5 Coping With  Definition of emotion 2
Emotion  Good and bad feelings
 Causes of good and bad
feelings
 Meaning of emotional
intelligence
 Feelings which can lead to
risky behaviour
 Ways of coping with negative
emotions
 Values associated with
emotional intelligence
4.1.6 Empathy  Definition of empathy 4
 Importance
 Difference between empathy
and sympathy
 Situations requiring empathy
empathy
4.1.7 Assertiveness  Definition of assertiveness 4
 Characteristics of an assertive
person
 Steps to being assertive
 Difference between
assertiveness and aggression
 Difference between peer
pressure and influence
assertiveness
4.1.8 Negotiation  Definition of negotiation 4
 Importance
 Situations that require
negotiating
 Negotiating techniques
negotiations
4.1.9 Non-Violent  Definition of conflict 2
Conflict  Causes of conflict
Resolution  Consequences
 Types of conflict
 Ways of dealing with conflict
 Skills for conflict management
 Institutions that resolve
conflict in community
 Values related to conflict
resolution
4.1.10 Effective  Situations that require decision 4
Decision Making making
 Challenges facing youth in
decision making
 Factors influencing decisions
making
 Steps to effective decision
making
 Consequences
 Decision making institutions
within community
 Steps to effective decision
making
effective decision making
4.1.11 Critical Thinking  Meaning of critical thinking 4
 Risky situations
 Evaluating ideas or issues
objectively
 Consequences of making
decisions before critical
thinking
 Values associated with critical
thinking
4.1.12 Creative Thinking  Definition 4
 Situations that require creative
thinking
 Importance
 Consequences
 Associated values
4.1.13 Problem Solving  Problem areas 3
 Causes of problems
 Tools
 Problem solving process
 Values necessary for solving
problems
4.1.14 Leisure  Definition of leisure 3
 Effects of misuse of leisure
 Activities for positive leisure
 Life skills for positive use of
leisure
 Values
4.1.15 Time  Definition 2
Management  Work schedule
 Time management chart
 Importance
 Time robbers
 Values and associated life
skills
4.1.16 Gender Education  Definition 2
 Agents perpetuating gender
 Gender stereotyping
 Effects of gender
 Strategies to eliminate gender
discrimination
 Associated values
4.1.17 Drug and  Definition of terms 4
Substance Abuse  Commonly abused drugs
 Causes
 Symptoms
 Effects
 Relationship between drug
abuse and HIV and AIDS
 Prevention
 Management
 Life skills and values
necessary
4.1.18 HIV and Aids  Definition of terms 3
 Transmission
 Signs and symptoms
 Catalysts
 Prevention
 Interventions
 Misconceptions
 Care and support
4.1.19 Child Labour  Definition of terms 4
 Difference between child
labour and work
 Forms of child labour
 Factors leading to child labour
 Awareness on child labour
 Interventions
 Appropriate life skills
4.1.20 Child Rights  Definition of terms 3
 Types of human needs
 UN Conventions
 Categories of child rights
 Importance of child rights
 Responsibilities
 Principles in right of child
 Life skills and values
4.1.21 Relationships  Types of relationships 4
 Developing healthy
relationships
 Factors that influence healthy
relationships
 Maintaining healthy
relationships
 Influence of relationships on
behaviour
relationship
 Life skills
Total Time 66
4.1.1 INTRODUCTION TO iii) Health
LIFE SKILLS 4.1.1T4 Living values and our
lives
Theory 4.1.1T5 Relationship between
life skills and living
4.1.1T0 Specific Objectives values
module unit, the trainee 4.1.2 KNOWING AND
should be able to: LIVING ONE SELF:
a) define life skills SELF AWARENESS
b) identify the categories of
life skills Theory
c) explain the benefits of
life skills education to the 4.1.2T0 Specific Objectives
society By the end of the sub-
d) identify living values and module unit, the trainee
how they relate to our should be able to:
lives a) describe him/herself
e) relate values and life b) identify his/her strengths
skills and weaknesses
c) explain what he/she likes
4.1.1C Competence and does not like about
The trainee should have the him/herself
ability to: d) explain
i) Face the day to day limitations/challenges
challenges that hinder one from
ii) Relate well with oneself attaining one’s goals in
iii) Relate well with others life
iv) Make effective e) identify ways of
decisions in life overcoming the
v) Solve problems challenges
Content 4.1.2C Competence

4.1.1T1 Meaning of life skills The trainee should have the
4.1.1T2 Categories of life skills ability to:
i) Skills of knowing and i) Identify one’s strengths
living with oneself and weaknesses
ii) Skills of knowing and ii) Identify one’s talents
living with others iii) Set realistic goals
iii) Skills of making
effective decisions Content
4.1.1T3 Benefits of life skills 4.1.2T1 Who Am I?
education to the society in 4.1.2T2 Physical attributes
the following sectors 4.1.2T3 Personal values,
i) Education beliefs, goals and
ii) Social ambitions
4.1.2T4 Strengths and f) identify values associated
weaknesses with high self esteem
4.1.2T5 Challenges that g) suggest ways of boosting
hinder the attainment self esteem
of life goals
4.1.2T6 Strategies of 4.1.3C Competence
overcoming challenges The trainee should have the
4.1.2T7 Values associated ability to:
with the self awareness i) Have a feeling of self
skill worth
ii) Relate well with others
Practice iii) Be confident
iv) Have positive self
4.1.2P0 Specific Objectives v) pride
By the end of the sub- vi) Feel good about oneself
should be able to: Content
a) describe oneself 4.1.3T1 Signs of high self
b) demonstrate one’s esteem
strengths and weaknesses i) Self confidence
ii) Self discipline
Content iii) Relating well with
4.1.2P1 Description of others
oneself iv) Self care
4.1.2P2 Demonstration of 4.1.3T2 Signs of low esteem
one’s strengths and i) isolation
weaknesses ii) self doubt
iii) self neglect
4.1.3 SELF ESTEEM iv) vulnerability
v) aggressiveness
Theory vi) low performance of
tasks
4.1.3T0 Specific Objectives 4.1.3T3 Factors that enhance high
By the end of the sub- self esteem
module unit, the trainee i) good health habits
should be able to: ii) goal setting
a) identify signs of high and iii) good grooming
low self esteem in an 4.1.3T4 Importance of high self
individual esteem
b) explain factors that 4.1.3T5 Effects of low self
c) enhance high and low esteem
self esteem i) unhappiness
d) state the importance of ii) vulnerability to HIV
having high self esteem infection
e) describe the effects of iii) drug abuse
low self esteem
iv) physical and e) suggest ways of
emotional coping with stress
abuse f) identify forms of
4.1.3T6 Values associated with high positive stress
self esteem humility g) give values associated
self respect happiness to positive stress
4.1.3T7 How to boost self-esteem management
Praise/acknowledging
effort 4.1.4C Competence
The trainee should have the
Practice ability to:
i) Identify stressors
4.1.3P0 Specific Objectives ii) Avoid stressors
By the end of the sub- iii) Manage stress
a) express one’s feelings 4.1.4T1 Meaning of stress
of self hate and self 4.1.4T2 Causes of stress
acceptance i) growth and
b) demonstrate self pride development
and confidence (biological, physical
and mental)
Content ii) peer pressure
4.1.3P1 Expressing one’s iii) communication within
feelings of self hate and families
self acceptance iv) need to belong
4.1.3P2 Demonstrating self v) lack of positive time
pride and confidence management
vi) Displacement
4.1.4 COPING WITH vii) Conflicts
STRESS 4.1.4T3 Effects of stress
i) displacement
Theory ii) aggression
iii) social maladjustment
4.1.4T Specific Objectives iv) drug and substance
By the end of the sub- abuse
module unit, the trainee v) immorality
should be able to: vi) diseases such as HIV
a) define the term and Aids
‘emotion’ vii) Post traumatic stress
b) define stress disorders
c) describe situations 4.1.4T4 Coping with stress
that lead to stress i) organize work in order
d) discuss effects of of priority/work within
stress possible working
schedules
ii) take a By the end of the sub
break/relax/exercise module
iii) share feelings with unit, the trainee should be
others able to:
iv) Forms of positive a) define the term
stress ‘emotion’
4.1.4T5 Values associated to b) identify good and bad
positive stress feelings
management c) explain causes of each
i) peace feeling
ii) tolerance d) explain the meaning of
iii) co-operation emotional intelligence
iv) unity e) discuss feelings which
4.1.4T6 Avoid stressors can lead to risky
4.1.4T7 Cope / manage stress behaviour
4.1.4T8 Apply values to manage f) suggest ways of
stress coping with emotions
g) state values associated
Practice with emotional
intelligence
4.1.4P0 Specific Objectives
By the end of the sub- 4.1.5C Competence
module unit, the trainee The trainee should have the
should be able to: ability to:
a) Identify stressors i) be calm
b) Demonstrate ways of ii) be patient
stress management iii) take time before acting
Content Content
4.1.4P1 identifying stressors 4.1.5T1 Meaning of the term
4.1.4P2 demonstrating ways of ‘emotion’
stress management 4.1.5T2 Good and bad feelings
4.1.5T3 Causes of good/bad
feelings
4.1.5T4 Feelings which can lead to
risky behaviour
i) Bitterness
ii) Sadness
iii)Excitement
4.1.5 COPING WITH iv) Hurt
EMOTIONS 4.1.5T5 Meaning of emotional
intelligence
Theory 4.1.5T6 How to control negative
emotions
4.1.5T0 Specific Objectives i) Talk to somebody
ii) Take a e) identify values
break/sleep/rest/walk associated with
iii) Do exercises empathy
4.1.5T7 Values associated with
emotional intelligence 4.1.6C Competence
i) Peace The trainee should have the
ii) Humility ability:
iii) Tolerance i) Empathize with people in
iv) Respect need
ii) Demonstrate positive
Practice values in situations that
require empathy
module unit, the trainee 4.1.6T1 Definition of empathy
should be able to: 4.1.6T2 Importance of
a) express different empathising Examples of
kinds of emotions times of empathizing
b) demonstrate i) Death
emotional ii) HIV/aids infected or
intelligence affected
iii) Joblessness
Content iv) Sickness
4.1.5P0 different kinds of 4.1.6T3 Difference between
emotions empathy and sympathy
4.1.5P0 emotional intelligence 4.1.6T4 Values associated with
empathy
4.1.6 EMPATHY i) Responsibility
ii) Respect
Theory iii) Love
iv) Kindness
4.1.6T Specific Objectives v) Co-operation
By the end of the sub- vi) Tolerance
module
unit, the trainee should be
able to:
a) define empathy Practice
b) explain the importance
of empathizing 4.1.6P0 Specific Objective
c) explain the difference By the end of the sub-
between empathy and module unit, the trainee
sympathy should be able to:
d) identify situations that i) demonstrate pathetic
require empathy situations
ii) differentiate empathy
form empathy
iii) demonstrate ways to 4.1.7T2 Identify characteristics of
show empathy an assertive person
4.1.7T3 Steps to being assertive
Content 4.1.7T4 Importance of being
4.1.6P1 Pathetic situations assertive achieving ones
4.1.6P2 Empathy form empathy goals
4.1.6P3 Ways to show empathy Avoiding getting into
trouble
4.1.7 ASSERTIVENESS 4.1.7T5 Differentiate between
aggressiveness and
Theory passiveness
4.1.7T6 Differentiate peer pressure
4.1.7T0 Specific Objectives from peer influence
By the end of the sub- 4.1.7T7 Values associated with
module unit, the trainee assertiveness
should be able to: i) honesty
a) define assertiveness ii) love
b) identify characteristics iii) cooperation
of assertive behaviour iv) simplicity
c) describe steps to being
assertive Practice
d) explain the importance
of being assertive 4.1.7P0 Specific Objective
e) differentiate being By the end of the sub-
assertiveness from module unit, the trainee
being aggressive and should be able to illustrate
passive assertiveness, passiveness
f) explain the difference and aggression
between peer pressure
and peer influence Content
g) apply values Illustrating assertiveness,
associated with passiveness and aggression
assertiveness
4.1.8 NEGOTIATION
4.1.7C Competence
The trainee should have the Theory
ability to:
i) Be firm without being 4.1.8T0 Specific Objectives
influenced by others By the end of the sub-
ii) Be positively principled module
iii) Say no to negative unit, the trainee should be
influence or yes to able to:
positive behaviour a) define the term
negotiation
Content b) explain the importance of
4.1.7T1 Meaning of assertiveness negotiation
c) identify situations that 4.1.8P1 Demonstrate situations
require negotiation that would require
d) discuss possible negotiation
negotiating techniques 4.1.8P1 Apply various negotiation
e) identify values that are techniques
associated with
negotiation 4.1.9 NON-VIOLENT
CONFLICT
4.1.8 C Competence ESOLUTION
ability to: Theory
i) Get out of difficult
situations 4.1.9T0 Specific Objectives
ii) Come up with By the end of this sub -
alternatives module unit the trainee
should be able to:
Content a) define conflicts
4.1.8T1 Meaning of negotiation b) explain causes of
4.1.8T2 Importance of negotiation conflicts
4.1.8T3 Situations that require c) explain consequences of
negotiations conflicts
4.1.8T4 Negotiating techniques d) state the different types
4.1.8T5 Values related to of conflicts
negotiation e) explain constructive
i) tolerance ways of dealing with
ii) responsibility conflicts
iii) co-operation f) state skills for peaceful
iv) honesty conflicts
v) respect g) identify institutions that
resolve conflicts in the
community
h) apply values in resolving
conflicts
Practice
4.1.9C Competence
4.1.8P0 Specific Objectives The trainee should have the
By the end of the sub- ability to: ability to:
module unit, the trainee i) Make effective decisions
should be able to: ii) Resolve conflicts
a) demonstrate situations peacefully
that would require
negotiation Content
b) apply various negotiation 4.1.9T1Meaning of conflicts
techniques 4.1.9T2 Causes of conflicts
4.1.9T3 Consequences of conflicts
Content
4.1.9T4 Types of conflicts 4.1.9P0 Demonstrate conflict
(siblings, situations
parents, relatives, 4.1.9P0 Carry out mock peace
Communities or clans ) deals
4.1.9T5 Ways of dealing with 4.1.9P0 Illustrate ways of
conflicts preventing conflicts
4.1.9T6 Conflict resolution skills
i) empathy 4.1.10 EFFECTIVE DECISION
ii) seeking assistance MAKING
iii) respect others
iv) assertiveness Theory
v) negotiation
4.1.9T7 Institutions that resolve 4.1.10T0 Specific Objectives
conflicts in the community By the end of the sub-
iii) courts module unit, the trainee
iv) religious institutions should be able to:
v) committees a) identify situations that
vi) council of elders require decision making
4.1.9T8 Values related to conflict b) state everyday challenges
resolution facing the youth that
i) co-operation would require effective
ii) humility decision making
iii) tolerance c) give factors that
iv) responsibility influence decision
making
4.1.9T9 Peace as a core value in d) discuss the steps to
conflict resolution effective decision making
e) discuss consequences of
not making effective
decisions
f) suggest values associated
with effective decision
Practice making
4.1.9P0 Specific Objectives 4.1.10C Competence

By the end of the sub- The trainee should have
module unit, the trainee the ability to:
should be able to: i) Make effective
a) demonstrate conflict decisions
situations Weight options
b) carry out mock peace before making
deals decisions
c) illustrate ways of
preventing conflicts Content
4.1.10T1 Situations that require
Content decision making
4.1.10T1 Challenges facing the make effective
youth such as: decisions in life
i) unplanned pregnancies
ii) peer pressure/peer Content
influence 4.1.10P1 challenges facing the
iii) drug abuse youth
iv) HIV and other Sexually 4.1.10P2 effective decision making
Transmitted Infections
v) orphaned 4.1.11 CRITICAL THINKING
vi) relationships
vii) career choices Theory
4.1.10T1 Factors that influence
decision making 4.1.11T0 Specific Objectives
i) experiences By the end of the sub-
ii) uniqueness module unit, the trainee
4.1.10T1 Consequences of not should be able to:
making effective a) explain the meaning of
decisions critical thinking
4.1.10T1 Decision making b) describe risky situations
institutions within the c) discuss possible ways
community of evaluating ideas or
i) family issues objectively
ii) schools /colleges d) give the consequences
iii) courts of making decisions
iv) peer arbitrators before thinking
v) religious bodies critically
4.1.10T1 Steps to effective decision e) suggest values
making associated with critical
4.1.10T1 Values associated with thinking
effective decision making
i) honesty 4.1.11C Competence
ii) integrity The trainee should have
iii) peace the ability to:
iv) kindness i) Think fast and analyze
situations before acting
Practice ii) Anticipate
consequences
module unit, the trainee 4.1.11T1 Meaning of critical
should be able to: thinking
a) demonstrate 4.1.11T1Risky situations
challenges facing the what constitutes the risk
youth pleasurable activities
b) discuss ways in without risks
which youth can 4.1.11T1Evaluating ideas/issues
Objectively weighing b) discuss situations that
options making rational require creative thinking
choices c) discuss the importance of
4.1.11T1Consequences of making being creative
decisions before thinking d) give the consequences of
critically not being creative
4.1.11TPossibility of falling victim e) state values required in
to: creative thinking
i) HIV infection
ii) drug and substance abuse 4.1.12C Competence
iii) unplanned pregnancy The trainee should have
iv) early marriage the ability to: make
v) physical and alternative choices
psychological abuse
4.1.11T1Values associated with Content
critical thinking 4.1.12T1 Meaning of creative
thinking
Practice 4.1.12T1 Situations/issues that
require creative thinking
4.1.11P0 Specific Objectives 4.1.12T1 Importance of being
By the end of the sub- creative
module unit, the trainee 4.1.12T1 Consequences of not being
should be able to: creative
a) analyse of risky 4.1.12T1 Associated values
situations Association values
b) demonstrate effective
decision making
Practice
Content
4.1.11P1 Analysis of risky 4.1.12P0 Specific Objectives
situations By the end of the sub
4.1.11P2 Effective decision making module unit, the trainee
should be able to:
4.1.12 CREATIVE a) think creatively
THINKING b) explore possible
options
Theory
Content
4.1.12T0 Specific Objectives 4.1.12P1 Thinking creatively
By the end of the sub- 4.1.12P2 Exploring possible
module unit, the trainee options
should be able to:
4.1.13 PROBLEM SOLVING
a) give the meaning of the
term creative thinking Theory
4.1.13T0 Specific Objectives By the end of the sub-
By the end of the sub- module unit, the trainee
unit, the trainee should be should be able to:
able to: a) Identify and analyzing
a) identify problem areas problems
that require solutions b) Participate in a problem
b) identify causes of solving process
problems
c) identify tools used in Content
problem solving 4.1.13P1 Identifying and
d) explain the problem analyzing problems
solving process 4.1.13P2 The problem solving
e) state values necessary process
solving problems
4.1.14 LEISURE TIME
4.1.13C Competence
The trainee should have Theory
the ability to effectively
solve problems 4.1.14T0 Specific Objectives
Content module unit, the trainee
4.1.13T1 Problem areas should be able to:
i) In school a) define leisure and related
ii) At home concepts
iii)With peers b) explain the effects of
iv) In relationships wrong use/misuse of
4.1.13T1 Cause of the problem leisure time
4.1.13T1 Problem solving process c) list activities for positive
4.1.13T1 Tools available for leisure
solving problems d) identify life skills for
4.1.13T1 Problem solving process positive use of leisure
i) Identify alternative e) identify values
choices associated with leisure
ii) Weighing options
iii) Action 4.1.14C Competence
4.1.13T1 Values required in the The trainee should have
problem solving process the ability to use leisure
i) Responsibility time positively and
ii) Honesty constructively
iii) Kindness
iv) Love Content
4.1.14T1 Meaning of leisure
Practice and related concepts
i) Leisure
4.1.13P0 Specific Objectives ii) leisure time
iii) active leisure
iv) passive leisure 4.1.14P2 Identifying leisure time
4.1.14T2Effects of wrong 4.1.14P3 Leisure time activities
i) use/misuse of leisure
time 4.1.15 TIME MANAGEMENT
ii) drug and substance abuse
iii) HIV and AIDS infection Theory
iv) STDs
v) criminal activities 4.1.15T0 Specific Objectives
4.1.14T3 Activities for positive By the end of the sub-
leisure module unit, the trainee
i) ball games should be able to:
ii) athletics a) define the concepts of
iii) swimming time management
iv) reading b) give an analysis of own
v) singing working schedule
4.1.14T4 Life skills for positive c) draw a time management
use chart
of leisure time d) explain the importance of
i) empathy managing time
ii) problem solving e) analyze aspects of time
iii) creative thinking robbers
iv) critical thinking f) state associated values and
v) assertiveness life skills
vi) negotiation
4.1.14T5 Values associated with
i) leisure 4.1.15C Competence
ii) freedom The trainee should have
iii) tolerance ability to:
iv) humility i) Manage time
v) honesty effectively
ii) Be organized and
Practice focused
iii) Achieve set goals
4.1.14P0 Specific Objectives iv) Meet others /
By the end of the sub- clientele’s
module unit, the trainee satisfaction
should be able to:
a) demonstrate every day’s Content
activities 4.1.15T1 Meaning of the concepts
b) identify leisure time ‘time management
c) choose leisure time 4.1.15T2 Work schedule
activities 4.1.15T3 Time management chart
to include for example
Content i) leisure time
4.1.14P1 Demonstrating every day’s ii) working time
activities iii) exercise and games
iv) helping the needy management
v) meal times
vi) cleaning time 4.1.16 DRUG AND UBSTANCE
vii) rest ABUSE
4.1.15T4 Importance of
managing time Theory
i) focus on priorities
ii) sense of direction 4.1.16T0 Specific Objectives
iii) attain goals By the end of the sub-
iv) reduce/avoid stress module unit, the trainee
v) satisfy others/clients should be able to:
4.1.15T5 Time robbers a) define drug and
i) procrastination substance abuse and
ii) talking too long drug misuse
iii) lack of priorities b) identify drugs and
iv) day dreaming substances of abuse
v) excessive playing c) state commonly
vi) Indecisiveness abused drugs
vii) disorganization d) explain the causes of
viii) uncontrolled drug and substance
media influence abuse
4.1.15T6 Values associated e) identify signs and
Effective decision symptoms of drug and
making substance abuse
i) honesty simplicity f) explain the effects of
ii) responsibility drugs and substance
4.1.15T7 Associated Life Skills abuse
i) assertiveness g) explain the
ii) self awareness relationship between
iii) self esteem drug and substance
iv) communication abuse and HIV and
v) decision making aids
h) explain ways of
Practice preventing drug and
substance abuse
4.1.15P0 Specific Objectives i) explain ways of
By the end of the sub- managing drug and
module unit, the trainee substance abuse cases
should be able to: j) identify life skills and
a)identify time robbers values necessary in
b) strategise of time the prevention and
management management of drug
and substance abuse
Content
4.1.15P1 Identifying time robbers 4.1.16C Competence
4.1.15P2 Strategies of time
The trainee should have necessary in the
the ability to: prevention of drug and
i) Live a drug free life substance abuse
ii) Advocate for a drug 4.1.16T12 Life skills
free society i) assertiveness
iii) Assist in ii) Self awareness
rehabilitating drug iii) self esteem
and substance iv) communication
abusers v) decision making
iv) Be a role model 4.1.16T13 Values
i) Integrity
Content ii) Love
4.1.16T1 Meaning of drug and iii) Freedom
substance abuse iv) Responsibility
4.1.16T2 Drugs and substances of
abuse Practice
4.1.16T3 Distinction between
drugs and substance 4.1.16P0 Specific Objectives
abuse and drug misuse By the end of the sub-
4.1.16T4 Causes of drug and module unit, the trainee
substance abuse should be able to:
4.1.16T5 Commonly abused drugs a) identify commonly
and substances abuses drugs and their
i) Alcohol street names.
ii) Tobacco b) apply preventive and
iii) Bhang management strategies
iv) Miraa
v) Glue Content
4.1.16T6 Signs and symptoms of 4.1.16P1 Identification of
drug and substance abuse commonly abuses drugs
4.1.16T7 Effects of drug and and their street names.
substance abuse 4.1.16P2 application of
4.1.16T8 Relationship between Preventive
drug abuse and HIV and management
and AIDS strategies
4.1.16T9 Preventive measures to
drug and substance 4.1.17 HIV AND AIDS
abuse
4.1.16T10 Management of drug Theory
and substance abuse
i) Treatment 4.1.17T0 Specific Objectives
ii) Rehabilitation By the end of the sub-
iii) Re-integration module unit, the trainee
4.1.16T11 Life skills and values should be able to:
c) give the meaning of
HIV and AIDS
d) state ways through 4.1.17T5 Myths and
which HIV is misconception about
transmitted HIV and AIDS
e) describe signs and 4.1.17T6 Ways of preventing
symptoms of AIDS spread of HIV and
f) explain ways of AIDS
preventing HIV i) life skills education
infection ii) values
g) identify life skills and iii) counselling
values that help in the 4.1.17T7 Care and support of the
prevention of HIV and infected and affected
AIDS
h) explain the Practice
misconceptions about
AIDS 4.1.17P0 Specific Objectives
i) explain ways of taking By the end of the sub-
care and supporting the module unit, the trainee
affected and infected should be able to:
j) discuss factors that a) identify HIV
facilitate the spread of transmission mode
HIV and AIDS b) differentiate facts
from myths
4.1.17C Competence c) give care and support
The trainee should have to HIV and AIDs
the ability to: infected and affected
a) Live a HIV free life persons
b) Care for an infected d) build resilience
person
c) Protect him / herself Content
from infection 4.1.17P1 Identification of HIV
d) Advocate for HIV transmission mode
and Aids free society 4.1.17P2 Differentiation facts
e) Be a morally upright from myths
person 4.1.17P3 Care and support for
HIV and AIDS infected
Content and affected
4.1.17T1 Meaning of HIV and 4.1.17P4 Building resilience
AIDS
4.1.17T2 Ways in which HIV is 4.1.18 CHILD LABOUR
transmitted
4.1.17T3 Signs and symptoms of Theory
AIDS
4.1.17T4 Factors that facilitate 4.1.18T0 Specific Objectives
the spread of HIV and By the end of the sub-
AIDS module unit, the trainee
should be able to:
a) define terms relating to v) Transport operators
child labour 4.1.18T4 Analyzing factors
b) explain the difference leading to child labour
between child labour and i) Poverty
child work ii) Negligence of
c) identify forms of child parents
labour iii) Ignorance of child
d) analyze factors that lead rights
children to labour iv) Orphaned
e) examine the level of 4.1.18T5 Examining
awareness on child community’s level of
labour in the community awareness on child
f) suggest interventions labour
possible to eliminate i) Are they many or
child labour few?
g) apply appropriate life ii) How many are
skills in saying “NO” to aware?
child labour iii) What are their views
in child labour
4.1.18C Competence iv) What are their views
The trainee should have about children being
the ability to: engaged in work
i) Differentiate child 4.1.18T6 Suggesting possible
work from child interventions to
labour eliminate
ii) Put appropriate child labour
interventions to worst i) Enforcing laws on
forms of child labour child rights
iii) Work responsibly ii) rents, children,
teachers, employers
Content and communities
4.1.18T1 Definition of iii) Educating children
terms through curriculum
i) Child iv) Empowering
ii) Child labour community leaders
iii) Child work and local
4.1.18T2 Difference between administration
child labour and child v) Organizing lobby
work groups at community
4.1.18T3 Identification of forms levels
of child labour vi) Setting help/
i) Herding reporting desks at
ii) Selling/peddling community levels
drugs 4.1.18T7 Associated life skills
iii) Farm hand include:
iv) Hawking i) Negotiation
ii) Assertive e) explain the
iii) Communication responsibilities
iv) Decision making relating to child
v) Empathy rights
vi) Practice f) principles in the right
of a child
4.1.18P0 Specific Objectives g) appreciate the
By the end of the sub- importance of child
module unit, the trainee protection and rights
should be able to:
vii) Identify forms of 4.1.19 C Competence
child labour The trainee should have
a) Identify factors the ability to:
promoting worst
forms of child labour i) advocate for human
b) Apply worst forms of rights and protection
child labour ii) intervene in case of
intervention child abuse or child
strategies neglect defend own
self in case of abuse
Content
4.1.19T1 Meaning of terms
Content i) Human rights
4.1.18P1 Forms of child labour ii) Abuse
4.1.18P2 Factors promoting iii) Neglect
worst forms of child iv) Labour
labour v) Needs
4.1.18P3 Intervention strategies vi) Ratification
4.1.19T2 Types of needs
4.1.19 HUMAN RIGHTS i) Physical
ii) Psychological
Theory 4.1.19T3 UN conventions on the
rights of the child
4.1.19T0 Specific Objectives 4.1.19T4 Categories of child
By the end of the sub- rights
module unit, the trainee 4.1.19T5 Importance of child
should be able to: rights and child
a) define terms protection
b) identify types of 4.1.19T6 Principles of child
needs rights
c) describe UN i) Best interests of the
conventions on rights child
of the child ii) Rights apply to every
d) describe the child without
categories of human discrimination on
rights
basis of gender race, f) suggest values
age, ability, religion associated with
4.1.19T7 Life skills and values relationships
associated with child g) identify life skills
rights associated with
relationships
Practice
4.1.20C Competence
4.1.19P0 Specific Objectives The trainee should have
By the end of the sub- the ability to:
module unit, the trainee i) Maintain healthy
should be able to relationship respect
identify human each other in
rights/child rights relationships.
Content Content
4.1.19P1 Identifying human 4.1.20T1 Types of relationships
rights/child rights i) Peer/peer
ii) Boy/girl; man/woman
iii) Siblings relationships
4.1.20 RELATIONSHIPS iv) Parent/child
v) Employee/ employer
Theory vi) Client/service provider
vii) Husband/wife
4.1.20T0 Specific Objectives 4.1.20T1 Healthy relationships
By the end of the sub- 4.1.20T1 Factors that influence
module unit, the trainee healthy relationships
should be able to: i) Personality
a) identify different ii) Generation gap
types of iii) Experiences in life
relationships 4.1.20T1 Relationship and
b) explain ways of behaviour
developing healthy 4.1.20T1 Maintain healthy
relationships relationships like
c) state factors that waiting until marriage
influence the i) Upholding associated
maintenance of values and life skills
healthy relationships ii) Self sacrifice
d) explain how to 4.1.20T1 Life skills associated
maintain a healthy with relationships
relationship i) Assertiveness
e) explain how ii) Awareness
relationships iii) Communication
influence behaviour iv) Negotiation
v) Peer resistance
vi) Friendship formation
vii) Coping with stress - Text books
viii) Coping with - Charts
emotions - External resource persons
ix) Decision making
4.1.20T1 Influence of relationship Suggested Evaluation Methods
on behaviour - Oral tests
i) Negative influence - Timed written tests
ii) Positive influence - Assignments
4.1.20T1 Values associated with - Practical tests
relationships
i) Love
ii) Kindness
iii) Understanding
iv) Responsibility
v) Freedom
vi) Tolerance
Practice

should be able to:
a) types of relationships
b) strategies to maintain
healthy relationships
Content
4.1.20P1 Types of relationships
4.1.20P2 Strategies to maintain
healthy relationships
Suggested teaching/Learning
Activities
i) Discussion
ii) Illustration
iii) Demonstration
ii) Note taking
iii) Role play
Resources
5.1.0 INFORMATION COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY
(ICT)
5.1.01 Introduction
This module unit is intended to equip the trainee with knowledge;
skills and attitudes to enable him/her appreciate and apply
Information Communication Technology in the research, design,
production and marketing of industrial components. Upon
completion of the module unit, trainees will be able to use various
computer packages in work places and in their daily life.
By the end of the unit is a list of teaching/learning activities,

teaching/learning resources and evaluation methods that may be
applied in the implementation of the syllabus unit. The list is not
exhaustive and the instructor is encouraged to explore other
suitable methods.

By the end of the module unit, the trainee should be able to:
a) understand information communication technology operating
systems
b) understand techniques of data processing
c) appreciate the role of information communication
technology (ICT) in organizations and life in general
d) understand the principles of operation of a computer and
operating systems
e) adapt to emerging trends in Information Communication
Technology (ICT)
Information Communication Technology
Code Sub Module Content Time Hrs

Units T P Total
5.1.1 Introduction to  Concept of ICT 3 4 8
ICT  Functions of ICT
 History of computers
 Classification of
 computers
 Components of a
 computer
5.1.2 Computer  Input devices 2 4 6
Hardware  Output devices
 Central Processing
Unit (CPU)
 Peripherals
 Storage Media
5.1.3 Computer  Software concept 2 4 6
Software  Types of software
 Functions of
computer software
5.1.4 Operating  Operating systems 2 4 6
System  Function of
operating systems
 Operating system
commands
 Managing disks
5.1.5 Data  Definition of data 2 6 8
Security and security and privacy
Control  Security threats and
control measures
 Computer crimes
 Detection and
protection against
computer crimes
 Laws governing
protection of ICT
5.1.6 Word  Concepts of word 4 10 14
Processing processing
 Functions of word
processing
 Document creation
and manipulation
 Tables creation and
manipulation
 Mail merging
 Apply word
processing utilities
5.1.7 Spread Sheets  Meaning of spread 4 8 12
sheet
 Uses of spread sheets
 Preparing worksheet
layout
 Building worksheet
 Manipulating data on
worksheet
 Data application to
cells
 Formulae and
function
 Charts
5.1.8 Database  Meaning of database 4 8 12
 Database design
 Data manipulation
 Data sorting and
indexing
 Data storage
 Data retrieval
 Data security
5.1.9 Networking  Meaning of networks 4 4 8
and Internet  Functions of
networks
 Networks
configuration
 Meaning and uses of
internet
 Electronic Mail (e-
mail)
5.1.10 Desktop  Functions of 4 6 10
Publishing  Tools used
 Manipulations
 Enhancements of
typeset work
 Printing of
documents
5.1.11 Presentation  Types of 2 4 6
Packages presentation
packages
 Creating slides
 Formatting slides
 Running slides
 Editing objects
 Printing slides and
handouts
5.1.12 Emerging  Emerging trends and 2 2 4
Trends and issues in Information
Issues in ICT Communication
Technology
 Challenges posed by
the emerging trends
and issues in
Information and
Communication
Technology
 Coping with
challenges posed by
emerging trends and
issues in Information
and Communication
Technology
Total time 35 64 99
5.1.1 INTRODUCTION TO 5.1.1T5 Components of computers
INFORMATION i) computer hardware
COMMUNICATION ii) computer software
TECHNOLOGY (ICT)
Practice
Theory
5.1.1T1 Specific Objectives By the end of the sub
By the end of the sub module unit, the trainee
module unit, the trainee should be able to:
should be able to: a) discuss types of
a) describe the concept computers
of ICT b) identify components of
b) describe the a computer
functions of ICT
c) discuss the history of Content
computers 5.1.1P1 Group discussion on
d) classify computers types of computers
e) identify components 5.1.1P2 Identification of computer
of a computer components and parts
5.1.1C Competence 5.1.2 COMPUTER

The trainee should have the HARDWARE
ability to:
i) Identify the various types of Theory
computers
ii) Identify parts 5.1.2T0 Specific Objectives
of a computer By the end of the sub
iii) Connect computer module unit, the trainee
peripherals should be able to:
iv) Maintain the computer a) identify hardware
system components of a
computer
Content b) describe input devices
5.1.1T1 Concept of ICT c) describe output devices
5.1.1T2 Functions of ICT d) describe central
5.1.1T3 History of computers processing unit (CPU)
5.1.1T4 Classification of e) identify storage media
computers f) describe peripherals
i) super computers
ii) main frames 5.1.2C Competence
iii) mini computers The trainee should have
iv) micro computers the ability to:
v) desktops i) Identify computer
vi) laptops hardware
vii) palm top ii) Classify memory
iii) Select computer
hardware 5.1.2P0 Specific Objectives
iv) Test hardware By the end of the sub
v) Install hardware module unit, the trainee
vi) Maintain hardware should be able to:
a) identify input and
Content output devices of a
5.1.2T1 Computer hardware computer
components b) identify storage media
5.1.2T2 Input devices of a computer
i) keyboard c) start and restart the
ii) mouse computer
iii) scanner d) demonstrate
iv) bar code reader Competence in
v) magnetic card input keyboard skills
vi) voice input devices e) demonstrate
5.1.2T3 Output devices Competence in mouse
i) monitor (visual skills
display unit)
ii) printer Content
iii) sound output device 5.1.2P1 Identification of input
5.1.2T4 Central Processing and output devices
Unit (CPU) 5.1.2P2 Identification of
i) electronic storage media of a
components of CPU computer
ii) computer bases 5.1.2P3 Starting and restarting
5.1.2T5 Storage media the computer
i) primary (main) i) cold booting
memory ii) warm booting
ii) R.A.M. 5.1.2P4 Keyboard skills
iii) R.O.M. i) functional keys
iv) secondary storage ii) alphanumeric keys
device iii) special keys
v) tapes iv) cursor movement
vi) cassettes keys
vii) diskette v) numeric keypad
viii) flash disks 5.1.2P5 Mouse skills
ix) optic media i) clicking
x) compact disks (CDs) ii) double clicking
xi) video Compact disks iii) dragging
(VCD) iv) right clicking
xii) digital Video Disks v) scrolling
(DVD)
5.1.2T6 Computer peripherals 5.1.3 COMPUTER
SOFTWARE
Practice
Theory should be able to install
basic computer software.
5.1.3T0 Specific Objectives
By the end of the sub Content
module unit, the trainee 5.1.3P1 Installation of basic
should be able to: computer software
a) explain the concept of
software 5.1.4 OPERATING
b) classify computer SYSTEMS
software
c) describe functions of Theory
computer software
5.1.3C Competence By the end of the sub
The trainee should have module unit, the trainee
the ability to: should be able to:
i) Identify type of a) explain how operating
computer software systems work
ii) Select computer b) explain how operating
software systems commands
iii) Utilize computer work
system c) explain how to
iv) Maintain software manage disks
v) Install software
vi) Launch software 5.1.4C Competence
vii) Upgrade software The trainee should have
the ability to:
Content a) Identity an Operating
5.1.3T1 Software concept System (OS)
5.1.3T2 Classification of b) Describe an operating
computer software system
i) system software c) Compare an operating
ii) application software systems
iii) programming language d) Select an operating
5.1.3T3 Functions of computer system
software e) Utilize OS systems
f) Install OS
g) Maintain an operating
Practice Content
5.1.4T1 Working of an operating
5.1.3P0 Specific Objectives system
By the end of the sub i) Starting
module unit, the trainee ii) Shutting
iii) Customizing
5.1.4T2 Operating systems 5.1.4P2 Operating system
commands commands
i) Directories/folders i) Directories/folders
management management
ii) Creating ii) Creating a folders
iii) Moving and copying iii) Moving and copying
iv) Renaming folders
v) Selecting iv) Renaming and selecting
vi) Opening folder a folder
vii) File management v) Opening a folder
viii) Creating vi) File management
ix) Moving and copying vii) Creating a file
x) Renaming and deleting viii) Moving and
xi) Opening and closing copying
xii) Searching ix) Renaming and deleting
5.1.4T3 Managing disks x) Opening and closing a
i) Assigning a volume file
label xi) Searching and sorting
ii) Checking disk storage files
state 5.1.4P3 Managing disks
iii) Formatting i) Assigning a volume
iv) Copying label
v) Scanning ii) Checking disk storage
status
Practice iii) Formatting a disk
iv) Copying a diskette
5.1.4P0 Specific Objectives (disk copy)
By the end of the sub v) Scanning of disks
should be able to:
a) demonstrate
Competence in the use
of an operating system
b) apply various operating
system commands
c) manage disks 5.1.5 DATA SECURITY AND
CONTROL
Content
5.1.4P1 Using an operating Theory
system
i) starting an operating 5.1.5T0 Specific Objectives
system By the end of the sub
ii) shutting down an module unit, the trainee
operating system should be able to:
iii) customizing an a) define data security and
operating system privacy
b) identify security threats
on ICT and possible 5.1.6 WORD PROCESSING
control measures
c) identify types of Theory
computer crimes
d) explain how to detect 5.1.6T0 Specific Objectives
and protect identified By the end of the sub
computer crimes module unit, the trainee
e) discuss laws governing should be able to:
protection of a) explain concepts in
Information and word processing
Communication b) describe the procedure
Technology of creating and
manipulating
Content documents
5.1.5 T 1Definition of data c) explain how to create
security and privacy and manipulate tables
5.1.5 T 2Security threats and d) explain mail merging
control measures techniques
5.1.5 T 3Computer crimes e) describe word
5.1.5 T 4Detection and protection processing utilities
against computer crimes
5.1.5 T 5Laws governing 5.1.6C Competence
protection of ICT The trainee should have
the ability to:
Practice i) Create a word
document
5.1.5T0 Specific Objectives ii) Edit a word document
By the end of this sub- iii) Format a document
module the trainee should iv) Print a document
be able to: v) Create:
a) identify security threats - Letter
on ICT and possible - Memo
control measures - Poster
b) identify types of - Advert
computer crimes - Menu
c) detect and protect vi) Merge documents
identified computer vii) Save / Open a
crimes document
Content Content
5.1.5P 1 Security threats and 5.1.6T1 Concepts in word
control measures processing
5.1.5P 2 Computer crimes i) File
5.1.5P 3 Detection and protection ii) Save
against computer crimes iii) Word wrap
iv) Delete x) Spell check
5.1.6T2Document creation and
manipulation Practice
i) Create a document
ii) Save a document 5.1.6P0 Specific Objectives
iii) Format a document By the end of the sub
iv) Retrieve a document module unit, the trainee
v) Delete a document should be able to:
vi) Edit a document i) start a word
vii) Print a document processing package
5.1.6T3 Tables creation and ii) create a document
manipulation iii) format and style
i) Tables documents
ii) Insert rows and iv) create multi columned
columns documents
iii) Create cells v) create and edit tables
iv) Sizing vi) apply word
v) Entering texts and processing graphics
formatting vii) print documents
vi) Borders and shading
vii) Lines Content
viii) Drawing 5.1.6P1 Starting a word
ix) Editing processing
x) Entering package
xi) Print i) Parts of a word
5.1.6T4 Mail merge processing window
i) Create a main ii) Exiting a word
document processing package
ii) Create a data resource 5.1.6P2 Document creation
document i) Creating a new
iii) Merging process document
iv) Merge the information ii) Editing a document
to a file iii) Saving, closing and
v) Print individualized opening a document
documents iv) Formatting a document
5.1.6T5 Application of word 5.1.6P3 Formatting
processing utilities i) Character formatting
i) Search and replace ii) Bold
ii) Grammar checker iii) Italics
iii) The sources iv) Underline
iv) Book marks v) Fonts (size, style,
v) Sorting and selecting colour)
vi) Line sort vi) Paragraph formatting
vii) Paragraph sort vii) Alignment
viii) Merge sort viii) Indentation
ix) Table sort ix) Spacing
x) Page breaks ii) Selecting a printer
xi) Bullet and numbering iii) Print settings
xii) Change case iv) Printer connection
xiii) Page formatting v) Print options
xiv)Page layout vi) Printer status
xv) Page set up vii) Print range
xvi)Page numbering viii) Multiple pages
xvii) Headers and footers ix) Copies
xviii) Foot notes and end x) Print preview
notes xi) Display
5.1.6P4 Creation of xii) One page
multicolumn document xiii) Full screen
i) Create columns xiv)Multiple pages
ii) Manipulate columns xv) Magnify
iii) Column width xvi)Ruler
iv) Column spacing xvii) Print
v) Column lines xviii) Close
vi) Column breaks xix)Printing a document
vii) Balancing columns
xix)Converting 5.1.7 SPREAD SHEETS
columns
5.1.6P5 Creating and editing Theory
tables
i) Ways of creating a 5.1.7T0 Specific Objectives
table By the end of the sub
ii) Entering data module unit, the trainee
iii) Resizing should be able to:
iv) Editing tables i) explain the meaning of
v) Inserting rows and a spread sheet
columns ii) identify areas where
vi) Merging and splitting spreadsheets are
cells applied
vii) Deleting rows, iii) explain worksheets
columns and table layout
viii) Enhancing tables iv) explain how to build
ix) Borders and shading and save a worksheet
x) Performing v) manipulate data in a
calculations worksheet
5.1.6P6 Word processing vi) explain how to apply
graphics cell data types
i) Inserting pictures vii) explain formulae and
ii) Drawing objects functions
iii) Creating and editing viii) explain use of
text boxes charts
5.1.6P7 Printing
i) Printer set up Content
5.1.7T1 Meaning of a The trainee should have
spreadsheet the ability to:
5.1.7T2 Areas where i) Create a spreadsheet
spreadsheets are applied ii) Edit a spreadsheet
5.1.7T3 Demonstration of iii) Format a spreadsheet
worksheet layouts iv) Save/open a
i) Columns spreadsheet
ii) Rows v) Use formula
iii) Cells vi) Use statistical
5.1.7T4 Building and saving a functions/Analysis
worksheet vii) Use macros in
i) Build/enter simple spreadsheet
worksheets viii) Perform
ii) Save a worksheet file calculations
iii) Exit a worksheet file ix) Print spreadsheet
iv) Insert numbers
v) Insert text Content
vi) Insert simple formulae 5.1.7P1 Starting a spreadsheet
5.1.7T5 Data manipulation on package
worksheet i) Loading and running a
5.1.7T6 Data application to cell spreadsheet package
5.1.7T7 Formulae and function ii) Parts of spreadsheet
5.1.7T8 Use charts window
iii) Exiting a spreadsheets
package
5.1.7P2 Entering and editing data
Practice i) Entering numbers, text
and formulae
5.1.7P0 Specific Objectives ii) Editing data
By the end of the sub iii) Selecting data in a
module unit, the trainee worksheet
should be able to: iv) Cancelling selected
a) start a spreadsheet areas
package v) Copying and moving
b) enter and edit data in a data
worksheet vi) Deleting data
c) edit a worksheet 5.1.7P3 Editing a worksheet
d) format a worksheet i) inserting and deleting
e) apply formulae and rows, columns and
functions worksheets
f) apply spreadsheet ii) Naming worksheets
charts iii) Adjusting column
g) print worksheet and width and row height
charts iv) Freezing rows and
columns
5.1.7C Competence 5.1.7P4 Formatting a worksheet
i) formatting cells and f) explain how to retrieve
worksheet data data
ii) copying and deleting g) discuss how to uphold
formats data security
iii) conditional formatting
5.1.7P5 Applying formulae and 5.1.8C Competence
functions The trainee should have
i) Types of formulae the ability to:
ii) Rules of entering i) Create a database
formulae ii) Enter data into a
iii) Copying and moving of database
formulae iii) Manipulate in a
iv) Cell references database
v) Parts and layout of a iv) Create tables, forms,
function queries and reports
vi) Entering a function
5.1.7P6 Working with charts
i) creating charts Content
ii) chart types 5.1.8T1 Meaning of database
iii) modifying/editing i) Data
charts ii) Database
iv) formatting charts iii) Databank
5.1.7P7 Printing 5.1.8T2 Data base design
i) printing a worksheet i) Field name
ii) printing a selection ii) Field type
iii) Field width
5.1.8 DATABASE iv) Field table
5.1.8T3 Data manipulation
Theory - editing
5.1.8T4 Data sorting
5.1.8T0 Specific Objectives i) Ascending order
By the end of the sub ii) Descending order
module unit, the trainee iii) Selective sorting
should be able to: 5.1.8T5 Data storage
a) explain the meaning of 5.1.8T6 Data retrieval
database i) Meaning
b) describe the database ii) Processes
design 5.1.8T7 Data security
c) explain how to carry i) Threats/hazards
out data manipulation ii) Data security controls
d) explain how to use iii) Ergonomics
various software for
data sorting and Practice
indexing
e) explain how to store 5.1.8P0 Specific Objectives
data appropriately
By the end of the sub 5.1.8P5 Application of reporting
module unit, the trainee and labelling
should be able to: i) Form design layouts
a) apply database concepts ii) Tabular
b) design database iii) Columnar
structure iv) Modifying a report
c) apply queries 5.1.8P6 Printing
d) use forms in entering i) printing tables
data ii) printing queries
e) apply reporting and iii) printing forms
labelling iv) printing reports
f) print tables, forms,
queries and reports 5.1.9 NETWORKING AND
INTERNET
Content
5.1.8P1 Application of database Theory
concepts
i) Field name 5.1.9T0 Specific Objectives
ii) Records By the end of the sub
iii) Files module unit, the trainee
iv) Database should be able to:
5.1.8P2 Designing a database a) explain the meaning of
structure (table) computer networks
i) Field name b) explain functions of
ii) Field type networks
iii) Field width c) describe types of
iv) Data entry networks
v) Saving the table in the d) explain how to carry
database out network
vi) Editing the table configuration
vii) Appending records e) describe internet and
viii) Insertion internet uses
ix) Deletion f) explain the e-mail
x) Altering the table concept
xi) Sorting and indexing
5.1.8P3 Application of querying 5.1.9C Competence
i) Single field condition The trainee should have
ii) Multiple field condition the ability to:
iii) Logical operators i) Identify network
iv) AND resources
v) OR ii) Share resources over
vi) NOT the network
5.1.8P4 Application of forms iii) Identify network types
i) Form design layout iv) Differentiate between
ii) Using forms to enter internet and www
data
v) Identify internet By the end of the sub
addresses module unit, the trainee
vi) Use browsers should be able to:
vii) Use search energies a) connect to the internet
viii) Surf the net b) browse the internet
ix) Create e-mail accounts c) apply electronic mail
and their facilities concepts
x) Print documents d) carryout network
configurations
Content Content
5.1.9T1 Meaning of computer 5.1.9P1 Connecting to the
networks internet
5.1.9T2 Functions of networks i) Leased line
5.1.9T3 Types of networks ii) Dial up
i) Local Area iii) Wireless
Network (L.A.N.) 5.1.9P2 Browsing the internet
ii) Metropolitan Area i) Internet browsers
Network (M.A.N.) ii) Website addresses
iii) Wide Area iii) Search engines
Network (W.A.N.) iv) Search techniques
iv) others 5.1.9P3 Application of
5.1.9T4 Configuration of electronic mail
networks i) E-mail address
i) tools ii) Creating e-mail
ii) process messages
5.1.9T5 Internet and internet iii) Sending and reading
uses messages
i) Internet browsing iv) Attaching files to e-
ii) Searching mail messages
techniques v) Using the address
5.1.9T6 Electronic mail (e- book
mail) vi) Organizing e-mail
i) Email address messages
ii) Creating email 5.1.9P4 Configurations of
messages network
iii) Sending and reading
messages 5.1.10 DESK TOP
iv) Using the address PUBLISHING
book
v) Organizing email Theory
messages
Practice By the end of the sub
5.1.9P0 Specific Objectives should be able to:
a) explain how to identify 5.1.10T3 Starting a new page in
the different icons and DTP, saving the setup,
tools used in DTP retrieving it and
b) explain page layout i) Closing files
c) explain how to open, ii) Start a new page
save and close files iii) Save a page
d) explain how to draw 5.1.10T4 Drawing various
various shapes using shapes using DTP
DTP i) Moving shapes
e) explain application of ii) Resizing shapes
colour pellets iii) Cropping
f) explain how to insert 5.1.10T5 Application of the use of
text from within colour pellets to
g) explain how to import enhance a document
and export text i) Demonstration of
h) explain object linking colour pellete
and embedding ii) Style pellet
i) explain how knowledge iii) Control pellete
is applied in design and 5.1.10T6 How text is inserted
output from within
scenario i) Procedures for
insertion
ii) Locating the source
5.1.10C Competence iii) Identifying the
The trainee should have destination
the ability to: use 5.1.10T7 Importing and
- Desk Top Publishing exporting text from
tools to produce a other sources
document i) Identifying source
and destination
Content 5.1.10T8 Explanation of object
5.1.10T1 Identification of linking and
various icons used in embedding.
DTP i) Object linking
i) Concepts of desktop ii) Embedding
publishing procedures
ii) Loading a DTP 5.1.10T9 Knowledge application
application learned in design and
5.1.10T2 Explanation of page output scenario
layout (margins, paper i) Designing functional
sizes, page items like:
i) Formatting) ii) Business cards
ii) Margins iii) Posters and flyers
iii) Paper size iv) Wedding cards
iv) Page formatting v) Calendars
Practice i) Moving shapes
ii) Resizing shapes
5.1.10P0 Specific Objectives iii) Cropping
By the end of the sub 5.1.10P5 Application of the use of
module unit, the trainee colour pellets to
should be able to: enhance a document
a) identify the different i) Demonstration of
icons and tools used in colour pellet
DTP ii) Style pellet
b) determine page layout iii) Control pellet
c) open, save and close 5.1.10P6 Inserting text from
files within
d) draw various shapes i) Procedures for insertion
using DTP ii) Locating the source
e) apply the use of colour iii) Identifying the
pellets destination
f) insert text from within 5.1.10P7 Importing and exporting
g) import and export text text from other sources
h) link and embed object i) Identifying source and
i) apply knowledge in destination
design and output 5.1.10P8 Object linking and
scenario embedding.
Content i) Object linking
5.1.10P1 Identification of ii) Embedding procedures
various 5.1.10P9 Application of the
icons used in DTP knowledge learned in
i) Concepts of design and output
desktop publishing Scenario
ii) Loading a DTP i) Designing functional
application items like:
5.1.10P2 Determination of ii) Business cards
page layout (margins, iii)Posters and flyers
paper sizes, page iv) Wedding cards
formatting) v) Calendars
i) Margins
ii) Paper size 5.1.11 PRESENTATION
iii) Page formatting PACKAGES
5.1.10P3 Starting a new page in
DTP, Theory
saving the setup,
retrieving it and 5.1.11T0 Specific Objectives
i) Closing files By the end of the sub
ii) Start a new page module unit, the trainee
iii) Save a page should be able to:
5.1.10P4 Drawing various a) discuss various types of
shapes using DTP presentation packages
b) explain how to create
slides Content
c) explain how to format 5.1.11P1 Opening a presentation
slides package
d) explain how to run 5.1.11P2 Creating slides
slides 5.1.11P3 Formatting slides
e) describe how to edit 5.1.11P4 Running slides
objects 5.1.11P5 Editing objects
f) describe how to print 5.1.11P6 Printing slides and
slides and handouts handouts
5.1.11C Competence
The trainee should
i) Create slides
ii) Format slides
iii) Edit slides
iv) Run the
presentation
v) Print the slide and 5.1.12 EMERGING TRENDS
handout AND ISSUES IN
INFORMATION
Content COMMUNICATION
5.1.11T1 Types of presentation TECHNOLOGY
packages
5.1.11T2 Creating slides Theory
5.1.11T3 Formatting slides
5.1.11T4 Running slides 5.1.12T0 Specific Objectives
5.1.11T5 Editing objects By the end of the sub
5.1.11T6 Printing slides and module unit, the trainee
handouts should be able to:
a) explain how to identify
Practice emerging trends and
5.1.11P0 Specific Objectives and Communication
By the end of the module Technology
unit the trainee should be b) explain the challenges
able to: posed by emerging
a) open presentation trends and issues in
packages Information and
b) create slides Communication
c) format slides Technology
d) run slides c) explain ways of coping
e) edit objects with challenges posed
f) printing slides and by emerging trends and
handouts issues in Information
and Communication 5.1.12PT1Group discussion on the
Technology emerging trends and
5.1.12C Competence and Communication
The trainee should have Technology
the ability to cope with
emerging issues and Suggested teaching/Learning
technologies related to Activities
ICT - Discussion
- Illustration
Content - Demonstration
5.1.12T1 Emerging trends and - Note taking
issues in Information - Practical exercise
and Communication - Visits to industries
Technology - Project work
emerging trends and Suggested teaching/Learning
issues in information Resources
and communication
technology - Electrical power supply
5.1.12T3 Ways of coping with - Computers and their
challenges posed by peripherals
emerging trends and - Assorted software
issues in information
and communication Suggested Evaluation Methods
technology - Oral tests
- Timed written tests
Practice - Assignments
- Timed practical tests
By the end of the sub
module unit the trainee
should be able to discuss
the emerging trends and
issues in information and
communication
technology
Content
6.1.0 ENTREPRENEURSHIP
6.1.01 Introduction
This module unit is intended to equip the trainee with

necessary knowledge; skills and attitudes that will enable
him/her start, operate and manage a personal or group business
enterprise effectively. It is also intended to instil in a trainee
the drive necessary to venture into profit making activities.

a) demonstrate positive attitude towards self employment
b) understand concepts and elements of entrepreneurship
development
c) demonstrate entrepreneurial behaviour in starting, operating
and managing a business
d) prepare a viable business plan
6.1.03 Module Unit Summary And Time Allocation
Entrepreneurship
Code Sub Module Content Time

Unit Hrs
6.1.1 Entrepreneurship  Definition of terms 6
 Contribution of
entrepreneurship towards
national development
 Self employment
versus salaried employment
6.1.2 Evolution of  History of 6
Entrepreneurship entrepreneurship in Kenya
 Economic, political
and social factors affecting
entrepreneurial
development
 Entrepreneurial
cultural practices in Kenya,
South Africa and India
6.1.3 Entrepreneurial  The entrepreneurial 4
Culture culture
 Cultural factors that
promote entrepreneurial
development
 Cultural factors habits
inhibiting entrepreneurial
development
 Ways of managing
factors that inhibit
development of
entrepreneurial culture
6.1.4 The  Myths associated with 4
Entrepreneur entrepreneurship
 Types of
entrepreneurs
 Characteristics/traits
of an entrepreneur
 Roles of an
entrepreneur in an
enterprise
6.1.5 Entrepreneurial  Business ideas 6
Opportunities  Business idea
generation
 Sources of business
ideas
 Identification and
evaluation of business
opportunities
 Matching
Competence with business
opportunities
6.1.6 Starting a  Forms of business 6
Small Business ownership
 Factors to be
considered when starting a
small enterprise
 Procedure of starting
a small enterprise
 Business life cycle
 Challenges faced
when starting a small
enterprise
 Resources for a
business
6.1.7 Enterprise  Definition of terms 8
Management  Managing of the
enterprise resources
 Managing the
business finances
 Business records
 Business support
services
 Marketing activities
in a small enterprise
6.1.8 Enterprise  Meaning of enterprise 4
Social social responsibility
Responsibilities  Importance of
enterprise social
responsibility
 Social concerns of an
enterprise
6.1.9 Business Plan  The Business Plan 10
 Components of a
Business Plan
6.1.10 Information and  Benefits of ICT to a 10
Communication small enterprise
Technology in  Use of computer
Entrepreneurship applications software in a
small business
6.1.11 Emerging  Emerging trends in 4
Trends in enterprise management
Entrepreneurship  Challenges posed by
emerging trends and issues
 Management of
challenges posed by
emerging trends and issues
in entrepreneurship
Total time 66
6.1.1 INTRODUCTION TO by employer and
ENTREPRENEURSHIP employee
Theory Content
6.1.1P1Visit a business enterprise
6.1.1T0 Specific Objectives in the locality and
By the end of the sub interview
module unit, the employers/employees
trainees should be able and identify their roles
to:
a) define various terms 6.1.2 EVOLUTION OF
used in ENTREPRENEU-
entrepreneurship RSHIP
b) explain the contribution
of entrepreneurship Theory
towards national
development 6.1.2T0 Specific Objectives
c) explain the differences By the end of the sub
between self and module unit, the trainee
salaried employment should be able to;
a) describe the history of
6.1.1 C Competence entrepreneurship in
The trainee should have Kenya
the ability to contribute b) explain economic,
to national development political and social
through self factors affecting
employment entrepreneurial
development
Content c) explain various
6.1.1T1 Definition of terms entrepreneurial cultural
6.1.1T2 Contribution of practices in Kenya,
entrepreneurship South Africa and India
towards national
development 6.1.2C Competence
6.1.1T3 Self employment versus The trainee should have
salaried employment the ability to: handle
social factors that hinder
Practice entrepreneurial
development
module unit, the 6.1.2T1 History of
trainees should be able entrepreneurship in
identify the role played Kenya
6.1.2T2 Economic, political
and social factors d) explain ways of
affecting entrepreneurial managing factors that
development inhibit development of
6.1.2T3 Entrepreneurial e) entrepreneurial culture
cultural practices in in Kenya
Kenya, South Africa
and India 6.1.3C Competence
Practice the ability to: deal with
cultural biases that hinder
6.1.2P0 Specific Objective entrepreneurial
By the end of the sub development
should be able to identify Content
cultural practices in 6.1.3T1Entrepreneurial culture
Kenya, South Africa and 6.1.3T2Cultural habits that
India promote entrepreneurial
development
Content 6.1.3T3Cultural factors inhibiting
6.1.2P1 Case study on economic, Entrepreneurial
political and social factors development
affecting entrepreneurial 6.1.3T4Ways of managing factors
development in Kenya, that inhibit development
South Africa and India of entrepreneurial
culture in Kenya
6.1.3 ENTREPRENEURIAL
CULTURE Practice
Theory 6.1.3P0 Specific Objective

6.1.3T0 Specific Objectives module unit, the trainee
By the end of the sub should be able to identify
module unit, the trainee the cultural habits which
should be able to; promote or inhibit
a) explain the concept of entrepreneurial
culture development
b) outline cultural habits
that enhance Content
entrepreneurial 6.1.3P1 Visit a successful
development entrepreneur in the
c) outline cultural factors locality and collect
inhibiting information on cultural
entrepreneurial habits that inhibit or
development promote entrepreneurial
development
6.1.4 THE ENTREPRENUER
Theory Content
6.1.4P1Trainees to do self-
6.1.4T0Specific Objectives assessment exercise on
By the end of the sub their entrepreneurial
module unit, the trainee potential
should be able to: 6.1.4P2Visit a successful
a) explain the myths entrepreneur within the
associated with locality and write a
entrepreneurship profile on him.
b) describe typs of
entrepreneurs 6.1.5 ENTREPRENEURIAL
c) state the OPPORTUNITIES
characteristics/traits of
an entrepreneur Theory
d) explain the roles of an
entrepreneur in an 6.1.5T0 Specific Objectives
enterprise By the end of the sub
6.1.4C Competence should be able to:
The trainee should have a) define a business idea
the ability to: identify b) explain ways of
entrepreneurial potential generating business
in self ideas
c) explain the various
Content sources of business
6.1.4T1Myths associated with ideas
entrepreneurship d) outline and evaluate
6.1.4T2Types of entrepreneurs business opportunities
6.1.4T3Characteristics/traits of an e) explain ways of
entrepreneur matching
6.1.4T4Role of an entrepreneur in entrepreneurial
an enterprise competencies with
f) business
Practice
6.1.5C Competence
By the end of the sub the ability to identify and
module unit, the trainee evaluate a business
should be able to: opportunity
a) assess his or her
entrepreneurial
potential Content
b) write a profile on a 6.1.5T1 Business idea
successful entrepreneur 6.1.5T2 Generation of business
in the locality ideas
6.1.5T3 Sources of business d) explain the business life
ideas cycle
6.1.5T4 Identification and e) outline challenges that
evaluation of Business are faced when starting
opportunities a small enterprise
6.1.5T5Ways of matching f) state business resources
entrepreneurial
competencies and 6.1.6C Competence
matching with business The trainee should have
opportunities the ability to: set up a
small enterprise
Practice
Content
6.1.5P0 Specific Objectives 6.1.6T1 Forms of business
By the end of the sub ownership
module unit, the trainee 6.1.6T2 Factors to be considered
should be able to: when starting a small
a) generate business ideas enterprise
b) evaluate business 6.1.6T3 Procedure of starting a
opportunities small enterprise
6.1.6T4 Business life cycle
Content 6.1.6T5 Challenges faced when
6.1.5P1 Brainstorming on starting a small
business ideas enterprise
6.1.5P2 Business opportunity 6.1.6T6 Business Resources
evaluation
Practice
6.1.6 STARTING A SMALL
BUSINESS 6.1.6P0 Specific Objective
Theory module unit, the trainee
should be able to illustrate
6.1.6T0 Specific Objectives a business life cycle,
By the end of the sub using a diagram
a) explain the different 6.1.6P1 Illustration of a business
forms of business life cycle
ownership
b) explain the factors to be 6.1.7 ENTERPRISE
considered when MANAGEMENT
starting a small
enterprise Theory
c) explain the procedure
of starting a small 6.1.7T0 Specific Objectives
enterprise
By the end of the sub a) use various resources to
module unit, the trainee manage a business
should be able to: b) keep business records
a) define enterprise
management Content
b) explain ways by which 6.1.7P1 Assist a business
various resources in an enterprise in locality to
enterprise should be manage business
c) managed resources
d) outline ways of 6.1.7P2 Management of business
managing business records
finances
e) describe business 6.1.8 ENTERPRISE SOCIAL
records RESPONSIBILTIES
f) state business support
services Theory
g) explain relevant
marketing activities in a 6.1.8T0 Specific Objectives
small enterprise By the end of the sub
The trainee should have a) explain the meaning of
the ability to: properly enterprise social
manage a small business responsibility
enterprise b) explain the importance
of enterprise social
Content responsibility
6.1.7T1 Definition of terms c) outline the social
6.1.7T2 Managing of the concerns of an
enterprise resources enterprise
6.1.7T3 Managing the business
finances 6.1.8C Competence
6.1.7T4 Business records The trainee should have
6.1.7T5 Business support the ability to: integrate
services business enterprise with
6.1.7T6 Marketing activities in a the society
small enterprise
Practice Content
6.1.8T1 Meaning of enterprise
6.1.7P0 Specific Objectives social responsibility
By the end of the sub 6.1.8T2 Importance of enterprise
module unit, the trainee social responsibility
should be able to: 6.1.8T3 Social concerns of an
enterprise
a) collect relevant data to
Practice enable him/her write a
business plan
6.1.8P0 Specific Objective b) write a business plan
should be able to 6.1.9P1 Trainee to go out and
undertake collect data relevant to
a relevant community his/her business plan
social activity area
6.1.9T2 Writing business plan
Content
6.1.8P1 Participate in a 6.1.10 INFORMATION AND
community social COMMUNICATION
activity within the TECHNOLOGY IN
locality ENTREPRENEURSHIP
6.1.9 BUSINESS PLAN Theory
Theory 6.1.10T0 Specific Objectives

By the end of the sub should be able to:
module unit, the trainee a) explain the benefits of
should be able to: ICT to a small
a) explain a business plan enterprise
b) state the components of b) describe the use of
a business plan computer application
software in a small
6.1.9C Competence business
the ability to write a plan 6.1.10C Competence
for a business The trainee should have
the ability to: use ICT in a
Content business enterprise
6.1.9T1 Business plan
6.1.9T2 Components of a
business plan
Practice Content
6.1.10T1 Benefits of ICT to a
6.1.9P0 Specific Objectives small business
By the end of the sub enterprise
module unit, the trainee 6.1.10T2 Use of a computer
should be able to: application in a small
business enterprise
emerging trends and
Practice issues in
entrepreneurship
By the end of the sub Suggested Learning Activities
module unit, the trainee i) Discussions
should be able to identify ii) Visits to existing businesses
benefits of ICT in a small and customers, Chamber of
business enterprise iii) Commerce, trade fairs and
exhibitions
Content iv) Preparation of business
6.1.10P1 Visit a small business records
enterprise with ICT and v) Brainstorming on types of
identify benefits of ICT technologies used
vi) Personal interviews
6.1.11 EMERGING TRENDS vii) Case studies
IN viii) Simulation
ENTREPRENEURSHIP ix) Field visits
Theory Suggested Learning/Teaching

Resources
6.1.11T0 Specific Objectives i) Television and radios
By the end of the sub ii) Manuals, newspapers and
module unit, the trainee business journals
should be able to: iii) Guest speaker
a) state the emerging
trends in Suggested Methods Assessment
entrepreneurship i) Question and answer
b) explain the challenges ii) Presentation
posed by the emerging iii) Field report
trends and issues in iv) Continuous Assessment
entrepreneurship Test (CAT)
c) outline ways of v) Written examination
managing challenges
posed by emerging
trends and issues in
entrepreneurship
Content
6.1.11T1 Emerging trends in
enterprise management
emerging trends and
issues
6.1.11T3 Management of
challenges posed by
7.1.0 MATHEMATICS I
7.1.0 1 Introduction
This module unit is designed to equip the trainee with the relevant
mathematical knowledge, skills, techniques and attitudes
necessary to enhance better understanding of other analytical units
of this course, and at the same time provide the trainee with a firm
foundation for further training in the trade
7.1.0 2 General Objectives

By the end of the sub module unit, the trainee should be able to:
a) use mathematical concepts and techniques in solving
problems related to Automotive Engineering trade
b) organize, draw simple deductions and conclusions from
the given data
c) interpret graphical representation of functions relevant to
the Automotive engineering trade area.
7.1.0 3 Module Unit Summary and Time Allocation
Mathematics I
Unit Hrs
7.1.1 Fractions and  Proper fractions and mixed 14
Decimals  numbers
 Conversion of mixed and
improper
 Fractions and vice versa
 Application of the knowledge of
decimals to engineering
problems
 Application of fraction to real
life situations
 Conversion of fractions into
decimals and vice versa
 Recurring decimals
 Compare fractions
7.1.2 Indices and  Base and index 10
Logarithms  Laws of indices
 Indicial equations ‘logarithm
 Laws of logarithm
 Logarithmic equations
 Conversion of bases
 Use of calculator
7.1.3 Algebra  Reduction of equations 14
 Solution of equations reduced to
quadratic form
 Solutions of simultaneous linear
equations in three unknowns
 Solution of problems involving
AP and GP
7.1.4 Trigonometry  Half –angle formula 10
 Factor formula
 Trigonometric functions
 Parametric equations
7.1.5 Permutations  Definition of permutation 12
and  Definition of combination
Combinations
 The factorial notation
 Expressions involving
permutations and combinations
 Solution of problems involving
permutations and combinations
7.1.6 Binomial  Binomial theorem Power series 12
Expansion using binomial theorem Roots of
numbers using binomial theorem
 Estimation of errors of small
changes using binomial theorem
7.1.7 Coordinate  Polar equations 12
Geometry  Cartesian equation
 Graphs of polar equations
 Normals and tangents
7.1.8 Hyperbolic  Definition of hyperbolic 18
Functions equations
 Properties of hyperbolic
functions
 Evaluation of hyperbolic
functions
 Hyperbolic identities
 Osborne’s Rule
 Achx+bshx=C equation
7.1.9 Inverse  One to-one relationship in 18
Functions functions
 Inverse functions for one-to-one
relationship
 Inverse functions for
trigonometric functions
 Graph of inverse functions
 Inverse hyperbolic functions
Complex  Definition of complex numbers 12
numbers  Stating complex numbers in
terms of conjugate argument and
 modulus
 Representation of complex
numbers on the Argand diagram
 Arithmetic operation of complex
numbers
 Application of Demoivre’s
theorem
 Application of complex numbers
to engineering
Total Time 132
7.1.1 FRACTIONS AND 7.1.1T1 Proper fractions and mixed
DECIMALS numbers
7.1.1T2 Conversion of mixed and
7.1.1T0 Specific Objectives improper fractions and
By the end of the sub vice versa
module unit, the trainee 7.1.1T3 Comparison of fractions
should be able to: 7.1.1T4 Application of fraction to
a) identify proper, real life situations
improper and mixed 7.1.1T5 Conversion of fractions
fractions into decimals and vice
b) convert mixed numbers versa
7.1.1T6 Identification of Recurring
to improper fractions
decimals
and vice versa 7.1.1T7 Conversion of recurring
c) compare fractions decimals into fractions
d) apply the knowledge of 7.1.1T8 Application of the
fractions to real life knowledge of decimals to
situations engineering problems
e) convert fractions into
decimals and vice Suggested Learning Resources
versa - Chart illustration on
f) identify recurring fractions equivalent
decimals fraction
g) convert recurring - Real life situations
decimals into fractions
h) apply the knowledge of 7.1.2 INDICES AND
decimals to LOGARITHMS
engineering problems
7.1.1C Competence
module unit, unit the
trainee should be able to:
ability to:
i) Perform the basic a) define the terms base
operations on fraction and index
and decimals b) state the laws of
ii) Apply the knowledge indices
of fractions and c) perform simple
decimals in operations of indices
engineering d) define the term
logarithm
e) state laws of
Content logarithms
f) perform simple b) solve equations
operations of reduced to quadratic
logarithms forms
g) change the bases of c) solve linear
logarithms simultaneous equations
h) use calculator in with three unknowns
solving problems d) solve problems
related to logarithms involving Arithmetic
Progression (AP) and
7.1.2C Competence Geometric Progression
The trainee should have the (GP)
ability to work out
mathematical problems Content
related to indices and 7.1.3T1 Reduction of equations
logarithms 7.1.3T2 Solution of equations
reduced to quadratic form
Content 7.1.3T3 Solutions of simultaneous
7.1.2T1 Base and index linear equations in three
7.1.2T2 Laws of indices unknowns
7.1.2T3 Opera rations of indices 7.1.3T4 Solution of problems
7.1.2T4 Definition of Logarithm involving AP and GP
7.1.2T5 Laws of Logarithm
7.1.2T6 Operations of Logarithms Suggested Learning Resources
7.1.2T7 Changing bases of - Print media
Logarithms
- Audio media
7.1.2T 8 Use of calculator in
solving problems related to
- Real live experience
logarithms
7.1.4 TRIGONOMETRY
Suggested Learning Resources
- Calculates By the end of the sub
- Charts module unit, unit the trainee
- Audio visual media should be able to:
a) derive the half-angle
7.1.3 ALGEBRA
b) derive the factor
formula
By the end of the sub c) solve trigonometric
module unit, unit the trainee functions
should be able to: d) determine parametric
a) reduce logarithmic equations
equations to quadratic
equations
Content
7.1.4T1 Half –angle formula 7.1.5T4 Expressions involving
7.1.4T2 Factor formula permutations and
7.1.4T3 Trigonometric functions combinations
7.1.4T4 Parametric equations 7.1.5T5 Solution of problems
involving permutations
Suggested Learning Resources and combinations
- Charts
- Mathematical tables Suggested Learning Resources
- Calculators - Charts
- Light-angled triangles - Real life situations
- Real life experience
7.1.6 BINOMIAL
7.1.5 PERMUTATIOONS EXPANSION
AND COMBINATIONS
By the end of the sub module unit, unit the trainee
module unit, unit the trainee should be able to:
should be able to: a) State the binomial
a) define the term theorem
permutation b) Apply the binomial
b) define the term theorem in deriving
combination power series of simple
c) express numbers in functions
factorial notation c) Apply binomial
d) simplify expressions theorem to estimate
involving permutations errors of small changes
and combinations d) Apply binomial
e) solve problems theorem to estimate
involving permutation roots of numbers
and combination.
7.1.6C Competence
7.1.5C Competence The trainee should have the
The trainee should have the ability to apply binomial
ability to solve problems in theorem to estimating
permutations and errors.
combinations
Content
Content 7.1.6T1 Binomial theorem
7.1.5T1 Definition of permutation 7.1.6T2 Power series using
7.1.5T2 Definition of combination binomial theorem
7.1.5T3 The factorial notation 7.1.6T3 Roots of numbers using
binomial theorem
7.1.6T4 Estimation of errors of By the end of the sub
small changes using module unit, unit the trainee
binomial theorem should be able to:
a) Define hyperbolic
Suggested Learning Resource functions
- Charts b) Deduce properties of
hyperbolic functions
7.1.7 COORDINATE c) Evaluate hyperbolic
GEOMETRY
functions for given
arguments
By the end of the sub d) Verify simple
module unit, unit the trainee hyperbolic
should be able to: relationships of
a) Convert polar equations to identities
Cartesian equation e) Sate the Osborne’s rule
b) Convert Cartesian equation f) Solve equations of the
to polar equations form achx+bshx=C
c) Plot graphs of polar
equations 7.1.8C Competence
d) Determine normals and
ability to work out
tangents using co-ordinate problems in hyperbolic
geometry functions.
7.1.7C Competence Content
The trainee should have the 7.1.8T1 Definition of hyperbolic
ability to work out equations
problems in coordinate 7.1.8T2 Properties of hyperbolic
geometry functions
7.1.8T3 Evaluation of hyperbolic
Content functions
7.1.7T1 Polar equations 7.1.8T4 Hyperbolic identities
7.1.7T2 Cartesian equation 7.1.8T5 Osborne’s Rule
7.1.7T3 Graphs of polar equations 7.1.8T6 Achx+bshx=C equation
7.1.7T4 Normals and tangents
- Tables
- Charts - Calculators
- Squared grid-board 7.1.9 INVERSE FUNCTIONS
- Calculators
7.1.8 HYPERBOLIC By the end of the sub
FUNCTIONS module unit, unit the trainee
should be able to:
a) identify one-to-one By the end of the sub
relation in functions module unit, unit the
b) define inverse function trainee should be able to:
for one-to-one a) define a complex
relationship number
c) define inverse function b) state complex
for trigonometric numbers in three
functions forms
d) draws graphs of c) segment complex
inverse functions numbers on the
e) describe many valued argand diagram
nature of functions d) perform arithmetic
f) describe the principal operation on complex
of inverse numbers
trigonometric function e) state and apply the
g) derive the inverse Demoivre’s theorem
hyperbolic function f) apply complex
numbers to
Content engineering problems
7.1.9T1 One to-one relationship in
functions Content
7.1.9T2 Inverse functions for one- 7.1.10T1 Definition of complex
to-one relationship numbers
7.1.9T3 Inverse functions for 7.1.10T2 Stating complex
trigonometric functions numbers in terms of
7.1.9T4 Graphs of inverse conjugate argument and
functions modulus
7.1.9T5 Description of many 7.1.10T3 Representation of
valued nature of functions complex numbers on the
7.1.9T6 Describe the principle of Argand diagram
inverse trigonometric 7.1.10T4 Arithmetic operation of
function complex numbers
7.1.9T7 Derivation of inverse 7.1.10T5 Application of
hyperbolic function Demoivre’s theorem
7.1.10T6 Application of complex
numbers to engineering
- Tables Competence
- Calculators The trainee should have the
ability to:
7.1.10 COMPLEX NUMBERS - Demonstrations
- Questions and answers
7.1.10T0 Specific Objectives - Discussions
- Charts
- Calculators
8.1.0 MECHANICAL SCIENCE
8.1.0.1 Introduction
Mechanical science introduces the trainee to the science
applicable to the engineering field. Its aim is to equip the trainee
with the basic concepts of engineering science. It is covered in the
first stage of the course.
The instructional approach will emphasize on experiments,

industrial visits and analysis of various engineering concepts.
8.1.02 General Objectives:

By the end of these module units, the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the basic concepts of engineering science
b) design simple engineering structures.
Mechanical Science
Code Sub Content Time Hrs
Module T P Total
Unit
8.1.1 Forces  Definition 6 2 8
 Resolution of forces
 Statement and
application of theorems
8.1.2 Moments  Definition of a moment 4 4 8
 Principle of moments
 Calculation of moments
and reaction on beams
 Couples
 Engineering examples
8.1.3 Friction  Nature of friction 4 4 8
 Laws of dry friction
 Calculation of limiting
friction force for a pull /
push parallel to the
surface
 Calculation of pull/push
applied at an angle to the
horizontal surface
 Definition of angle of
friction
 Calculation of
coefficient of friction
 Advantages and
disadvantages of friction
8.1.4 Motion  Definitions 6 2 8
 Laws of motion
 Calculations of velocity,
acceleration & distance
covered
 Using graphs of velocity-
time & displacement-
time
 Relationship
between linear and
angular motion
8.1.5 Work  Definitions of terms 4 4 8
Energy and  Calculation on work,
Power energy and power
8.1.6 Machines  Definitions 4 2 8
 Problems on simple
machines
 Problems on levers
 Laws of machine
8.1.7 Gases  Gas laws 4 2 6
 Engineering examples
 Simple problems
8.1.8 Heat  Definition of heat 4 2 6
 Simple thermometer
 Heat capacity
 Definition of the latent
heats
 Solve simple problems
on heat
8.1.9 Density  Definitions 2 4 4
 Simple measurements of
density
 Archimedes principles
 Simple calculations
8.1.10 Pressure  Simple calculations on 2 2 4
pressure
 Simple barometer
 Applications of
atmospheric pressure
Total Time 40 28 66
8.1.1 FORCES iii) Polygon of forces
iv) State the Bow’s
8.1.1T0 Specific Objectives notation
By the end of the sub 8.1.1T4 Determination of the
module unit, the trainee resultant force of two or
should be able to: more forces
a) define a force
b) resolve forces into Suggested Learning Resources
two perpendicular - Text books
components - Hand outs
c) state the
parallelogram, 8.1.2 MOMENTS
triangle and polygon
of forces theorems 8.1.2T0 Specific Objectives
d) determine then By the end of the sub
resultant/equilibrant
should be able to:
of two or more
a) define a moment of a
coplanar forces
force
8.1.1C Competence b) calculate the
The trainee should have moment of a force
the ability to: about an axis
i) Define forces (multiple forces)
ii) State the following c) define a couple
forces theorems d) state engineering
iii) Parallelogram examples where
- Triangle moments area
- Polygon couples are applied
iv) Determine the
resultant of 8.1.2C Competence
coplanar forces
the ability to:
Content i) Define moments
8.1.1T1 Definition ii) Calculate moments
i) Force iii) State the principle of
ii) Scalar quantity moments
iii) Vector quantity iv) Define couples
8.1.1T2 Resolution of forces v) State engineering
8.1.1T3 Statement and examples on
application of theorems application of
i) Parallelogram of moments
forces
ii) Triangle of forces Content
8.1.2T1 Definition of a moment i) State the laws of
8.1.2T2 Calculation of moment friction
i) Principle of moments ii) Calculate the limiting
ii) Calculation of friction
moments and reaction iii) Calculate forces
on beams applied at an angle to
iii) Single load on beam the horizontal plane
iv) Multiple loads on iv) Calculate Coefficient
beam of friction
8.1.2T3 Couples v) Explain advantages
i) Definition and disadvantages of
ii) Calculation on friction
couples
8.1.2T4 Engineering examples Content
i) Tightening (spanners) 8.1.3T1 Nature of friction
ii) Beams (for 8.1.3T2 Laws of dry friction
supporting cranes) 8.1.3T3 Calculation of force to
overcome friction on a
8.1.3 FRICTION horizontal plane
8.1.3T4 Calculation of force to
8.1.3T0 Specific Objectives overcome friction on an
By the end of the sub inclined plane
module unit, the trainee i) Definition of angle
should be able to: of friction
a) explain the nature of ii) Calculation of
friction coefficient of friction
b) state the laws of dry 8.1.3T5 Advantages and
friction disadvantages of friction
c) calculate the force to
overcome friction on Suggested Learning Resources
a horizontal plane - Text books
d) calculate the force to - Hand outs
overcome friction on
an inclined plane
e) state advantages and
disadvantages of
friction
8.1.4 MOTION
8.1.3 Competence 8.1.4T0 Specific Objectives
The trainee should have By the end of the sub
the ability to: module unit, the trainee
should be able to:
a) Define terms used in vi) Relationship between
the study of motion linear and angular
b) state the laws of
motion Suggested Learning Resources
c) calculate problems - Text books
related to related to - Hand outs
motion
8.1.5 WORK ENERGY AND
8.1.4C Competence POWER
the ability to: 8.1.5T0 Specific Objectives
i) define terms related By the end of the sub
to motion
should be able to:
ii) State the law of
a) Define terms related
motion
to work, energy and
iii) Perform calculations
power
on motion
b) calculate problems
iv) Use
related to work
Displacement/time
energy and power
graphs
v) Use Velocity/time 8.1.5C Competence
graphs The trainee should have
vi) Convert angular to the ability to calculate:
linear motion i) Work done
ii) Energy either kinetic
Suggested Learning Resources or potential
- Text books iii) Power and efficiency
- Hand outs
Content
Content 8.1.5T1 Definitions of terms
8.1.4T1 Definitions i) Work
i) Displacement ii) Energy
ii) Speed iii) Kinetic energy
iii) Velocity iv) Potential energy
iv) Acceleration v) Power
8.1.4T2 Laws of motion 8.1.5T2 Calculation on
8.1.4T3 Calculations of i) Work done
i) Linear motion ii) Energy
ii) Angular motion iii) Power
iii) Using graphs of iv) Efficiency
iv) displacement / time v) Uniform velocity
v) Velocity/time vi) Variable velocity
8.1.6T3 Problems on simple
8.1.6 MACHINES machines
i) Wheel and axle\
8.1.6T0 Specific Objectives Screw jack
By the end of the sub ii) Pulleys
module unit, the trainee iii) Belt and chain drives
should be able to: iv) Gears
a) define related terms v) On mechanical
b) calculate problems advantage, velocity
related to machines ratio, and efficiency
c) determine the law of 8.1.6T4 Problems on Laws of
machine
the machine
i) Load-effort graphs
d) solve problems using ii) Solution of problem
the law of machine using the law of the
machine
8.1.6C Competence
The trainee should have Suggested Learning Resources
the ability to: i) Text books
i) Define terms ii) Hand outs
ii) Mechanical
advantage 8.1.7 GASES
iii) Velocity ratio
iv) Efficiency 8.1.7T0 Specific Objectives
v) Solve problem on By the end of the sub
machines related to module unit, the
vi) Mechanical trainee should be able
to:
advantage
a) state the gas laws
vii) Velocity ratio b) establish the ideal
viii) Efficiency gas equation
ix) Determine the law of c) calculate the simple
the machine problems on gases
x) Solve problems using d) state engineering
the machine examples where
Content gases are used
8.1.6T1 Definitions
i) Mechanical Content
advantage 8.1.7T1 Gas laws
ii) Velocity ratio i) Boyles law
iii) Efficiency ii) Charles law
8.1.6T2 Problems on levers on: 8.1.7T2 Gas equation
i) Mechanical 8.1.7T3 Simple problems on:
advantage i) Boyles law
ii) Velocity ratio ii) Charles law
iii) Efficiency iii) Gas equation
8.1.7T4 Engineering examples iii) Define heat capacity
i) Engines iv) Define the latent
ii) Air compressors heats
v) Solve simple
8.1.7C Competence
problems on heat
the ability to:
Content
i) State the gas laws
8.1.8T1 Definition of heat
ii) Apply the gas laws to
8.1.8T2 Simple thermometer
solve simple gas
8.1.8T3 Heat capacity
problems
8.1.8T4 Definition of the latent
iii) State engineering
heats
examples where gases
8.1.8T5 Solve simple problems
are used.
on heat
- Textbooks i) Textbooks
- Handouts ii) Handouts
8.1.8 HEAT 8.1.9 DENSITY
8.1.8T0 Specific Objectives 8.1.9T0 Specific Objectives
By the end of the sub By the end of the sub
module unit, the trainee module unit, the trainee
should be able to: should be able to:
a) define heat a) define density and
b) describe the working relative density
of a simple b) state Archimedes
thermometer principle
c) explain the c) solve simple
application of thermal problems on density
expansion and relative density
d) describe methods of
heat transfer
e) explain the specific
heat capaci 8.1.9C Competence
8.1.8C Competence the ability to:
The trainee should have - Solve simple problems
the ability to: on density
i) Define heat
ii) Explain the working Suggested Learning Resources
principle of a - Textbooks
thermometer - Handouts
8.1.10T2 Simple barometer
Content 8.1.10T3 Applications of
8.1.9T1 Definitions atmospheric pressure
i) Density i) Vacuum pump
ii) Relative density ii) Hydraulic pump
iii) Simple iii) Simple calculations
measurements of on pressure
density 8.1.10T4 Use of hydrometers
8.1.9T2 Archimedes principles
8.1.9T3 Simple calculations Suggested Learning Resources
- Textbooks
8.1.10 PRESSURE
- Handouts
should be able to:
a) define pressure
b) describe a simple
barometer
c) explain the
application of
atmospheric and
liquid pressure
d) explain the use of
hydrometers
8.1.10C Competence
the ability to:
i) Define pressure
ii) Describe a simple
barometer
iii) Solve simple
problems on
pressure
iv) Explain the use of
hydrometers
Content
8.1.10T1 Definition of pressure
9.1.0 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS PRINCIPLES
9.1.01 Introduction:
Most machines in mechanical engineering use electricity as
source of power and use electrical/electronic controls. The
understanding of electrical and electronics principles on which
they operate is necessary.
The assessment mode shall be mainly practical. Some
reference materials for this module unit are listed by the end of
the module and it should be noted that this list is not
exhaustive.

By the end of the Module unit, the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the general working of various electrical
and electronic components.
b) select and use special electrical and electronic tool and
equipment
c) diagnose, service, maintain and repair faults in
electrical and electronic systems
d) service and maintain electrical and electronic systems
9.1.03 Module Summary and Time Allocation
Electrical and Electronics Principles

Unit
Th. Prac. Total
9.1.1 Direct Current  State the basic 4 2 6
Circuits electrical quantities
and their units.
 draw electric circuits
 apply electric circuits
laws and theorems to
solve problems on
electrics circuits
 Determine resistance
of conductor of a
Wheatstone bridge.
 Explain the principle
of operation of a
potentiometer
9.1.2 Magnetism and  Terminologies 4 2 6
Electromagnetis  Types of magnets
m  Magnetic fields
 Magnetic circuits
 Electromagnetic
induction
 Classification of
magnetic and non-
magnetic materials
 Verification of the
existence of magnetic
field
9.1.3 Introduction to  DC machines 6 4 10
Direct (D.C.)  Separately excited
Generators and generators
Motors
 Shunt wound
generators
 Series wound
 Compound wound
 Starting methods
 Voltage regulation
 Speed control
 Maintenance of DC
machines
9.1.4 Alternating  AC circuits 8 4 12
Current Circuits  Wave forms
 Amplitude
 Phase angle
 Period
 Root mean square
value
 Average value
 Frequency
 Identification of
components of an ac
generator
 Sine wave generation
 Experiment of power
factor
9.1.5 Battery  Types of batteries 2 4 6
(chemical cells )  Construction
 Principles of operation
9.1.6 Electron Theory  Atomic and molecular 4 2 6
structure
 Semiconductor
materials
 Intrinsic and extrinsic
conduction
 Crystal structure of
semiconductor
 Crystal structure of
semiconductor
 Formation of P- and N-
type semiconductor
9.1.7 Semiconductor  Construction and 4 4 8
Devices symbol of
semiconductor devices
 Operation of semi
conductor devices
 Characteristics of
semi-conductor
devices
 Applications of
 Identification of semi
conductor devices
 Connection of
 Tests on
semiconductor
components
9.1.8 Electronic  Electronics 2 4 6
Components Components
9.1.9 Power  Methods of power 4 2 6
Rectification rectification
 Smoothing
 Regulation
 Voltage multipliers
 Methods of power
Supply protection
 Voltage division and
multiplication
 Construction of power
supply regulators
 Tests and
measurements
Total Time 38 28 66
9.1.1 DIRECT CURRENT
CIRCUITS iii) Resistance in Ohms
iv) Power in watts
Theory 9.1.1T2 Electric circuits
i) Simple electric circuits
9.1.1T0 Specific Objectives ii) Resistors in parallel
By the end of the sub iii) Resistors in series
module unit, the trainee parallel
should be able to: 9.1.1T3 Circuit laws and theorems
a) state the basic electrical i) Ohms law
quantities and their ii) Kirchhoff’s laws
units. 9.1.1T4 Resistance of metal
b) draw electric circuits conductors and resistors
c) apply electric circuits i) Length
laws and theorems to ii) cross-sectional area
solve problems on iii) resistivity
electrics circuits iv) conductivity
d) determine resistance of v) effects of temperature
conductor of a 9.1.1T5 Potentiometer
Wheatstone bridge. i) operation
e) explain the principle of ii) derive formula
operation of a iii) Wheatstone bridge
potentiometer
Practice
9.1.1C Competence
The trainee should have the 9.1.1P0 Specific Objectives
ability to: By the end of the sub
i) Derive formulae for module unit, the trainee
various direct current should be able to:
circuits a) connect electrical direct
ii) Determine resistance of current circuits
conductors and resistors b) measure electrical
in various circuit quantities
iii) arrangement c) verify given electric
iv) Connect various laws
electrical circuits d) use a Wheatstone bridge
v) Perform measurement of to measure resistance
electrical quantities e) use a potentiometer to
vi) Verify Ohm’s and measure voltage
Kirchoff’s laws
Content
9.1.1T1 Electrical quantities and
their units Content
i) voltage in volts 9.1.1P1 Circuit connections
ii) Current in amperes i) Series
ii) Parallel f) explain the principle of
iii) Series/parallel electromagnetic
9.1.1P2 Electrical quantities induction
i) Current
ii) Voltage 9.1.2C Competence
iii) Resistance The trainee should have the
iv) Power ability to:
9.1.1P3 Verification of Electrical i) explain the principle of
laws operation of
i) Ohm electromagnetic
ii) Kirchoff induction
9.1.1P4 Measurement of resistance ii) verify the existence of
using Whetstone’s bridge existence of magnetic
9.1.1P5 Measurement of resistance field
using a Potentiometer
Content
Suggested Learning Resources 9.1.2T1 Terminologies
- Text book i) Magnetic flux
- Hand out ii) Magnetic field
- Charts strength
- Multimeter iii) Magnetic flux density
- Capacitors iv) Magnetic motive force
- Resistors v) Reluctance
- Circuit vi) Permeability
- Test modules vii) Hysteresis
- Simulation software 9.1.2T2 Types of magnetic
- Computer system materials
9.1.2T3 Types of magnets
9.1.2 MAGNETISM AND i) Permanent
ELECTROMAGNETISM ii) Electromagnets
9.1.2T3 Magnetic fields patterns
Theory i) Bar magnets
ii) Current conductors
9.1.2T0 Specific Objectives 9.1.2T4 Magnetic circuits
By the end of the sub i) Introduction
module unit, the trainee ii) Laws
should be able to: iii) Inductance
a) define terminologies used iv) Energy stored in an
in magnetic. inductor
b) state types of magnetic v) Calculation
materials 9.1.2T5 The principle of
c) list types of magnets electromagnetic
d) describe magnetic fields induction
patterns
e) describe magnetic Practice
circuits
9.1.2P0 Specific Objectives By the end of the sub
By the end of the sub module unit, the trainee
module unit, the trainee should be able:
should be able: a) explain the construction
a) identify various types of of electric machines
magnetic materials. b) explain characteristics of
b) classify different types of electrical machines and
magnets and non- their typical applications
magnetic material c) describe different types
c) verify the existence of of DC windings
magnetic field. d) derive e.m.f equation for
Ac and DC machines
Content
9.1.2P1 Identification of various 9.1.3C Competence
magnetic materials The trainee should have the
9.1.2P2 Classification of ability to:
magnetic and non- i) Operate DC machines
magnetic materials ii) Carry out maintenance of
9.1.2P3 Verification of the DC machines
existence of magnetic
field Content
i) Bar magnet 9.1.3T1 The construction of
ii) Horse shoe magnet electric machines
iii) Combination of i) DC machines
magnets ii) Principle of operation
iv) Current carrying iii) Commutator
conductor iv) Windings
v) Electromagnetic
Suggested Learning Resources induction
i) Text book vi) Armature reaction
ii) Hand out vii) Excitation
iii) Magnets viii) Ac machines
iv) Iron filings ix) Principle of operation
x) armature
xi) Commutator
xii) Windings
xiii) Electromagnetic
induction
9.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO xiv)Armature reaction
DIRECT CURRENT xv) Excitation
MACHINES 9.1.3T2 Characteristics of
electrical machines
Theory i) Typical applications
9.1.3T3 Types of DC windings
9.1.3T0 Specific Objectives 9.1.3T4 Derivation of the e.m.f
equation
i) Ac machines By the end of the sub
ii) Motors module unit, the trainee
iii) Generators should be able to:
iv) DC Machines a) explain the principle of
v) Generators operation of Ac circuits
vi) Motors b) explain the effects of
various passive elements
Practice in a current.
c) Determine power factor
9.1.3P0 Specific Objectives in Ac circuits
module unit, the trainee 9.1.4C Competence
should be able: The trainee should have the
a) operate DC machines ability to:
b) carry out maintenance of i) Determine power factor.
DC machines ii) Calculate power in ac
currents
Content iii) Explain the principle of
9.1.3P1 Operation of DC machines operation of ac
i) Starting methods generation
ii) Voltage regulation iv) Perform power factor
iii) Speed control improvement
9.1.3P2 maintenance of DC v) Install power factor
machines correction equipment
vi) Operate ac generator
i) Lab equipment and tools Content
ii) DC motor 9.1.4T1 Operation of Ac circuits
iii) Ac motor 9.1.4T2 Effects of passive elements
iv) Electrical instruments in a.c circuits
v) DC generators i) Wave forms
vi) DC conductors ii) Amplitude
vii) Electronic DC motor iii) Phase angle
starters iv) Period
viii) Face plate starters v) Roof mean square valve
ix) Drum starters vi) Average valve
x) Workshop tools vii) Frequency
9.1.4T3 Power factor
9.1.4 ALTERNATING
CURRENT CIRCUITS Practice
Theory 9.1.4P0 Specific Objectives

should be able to:
a) generate a series wave
b) establish the features of b) describe the construction
an Ac wave form of different types of
c) perform experiment to batteries
show effect of power c) state advantages and
factor disadvantages of both
d) identify components of lead-acid and nickel
an Ac generator alkaline
e) verify the effects of
passive elements in ac 9.1.5C Competence
circuits The trainee should have the
ability to:
Content i) Service and maintain
9.1.4T1 Wave generation various types of
9.1.4T2 Features of an Ac batteries
waveform
9.1.4T3 Verification of Power Content
factor 9.1.5T1 Principles of operation:
9.1.4T4 Components of an Ac - Chemistry of charge and
generator discharge
9.1.4T5 Effects of Passive 9.1.5T2 Construction
elements in Ac circuits i) Casing
ii) Separators
Suggested Learning Resources iii) Plates
i) Charts iv) Electrolyte
ii) Graph 9.1.5T3 Types of batteries
iii) Calculations i) Lead-acid high
iv) Cathode Ray Oscilloscope maintenance
v) Multimeter ii) Lead Acid Maintenance
vi) Ac generator kit free
vii) Ac generator iii) Lead Low maintenance
iv) Nickel alkaline
v) Small batteries
9.1.5 BATTERY
Practice
Theory
9.1.5T0 Specific Objectives By the end of the sub-
By the end of the sub- module unit, the trainee
should be able to: a) service and maintain
a) explain the principles of different types batteries
operation of different b) replace different types of
types of batteries. batteries
c) use battery service and a) describe the atomic and
maintenance molecular structure of
tools/equipment semi conductors
d) charge batteries b) state the types of
semiconductor materials
Content c) explain intrinsic and
9.1.5P1 Service and maintenance extrinsic conduction
i) Battery charging d) explain the crystal
ii) Battery charger structure of a
iii) Battery testing semiconductor
iv) Battery replacement e) describe the formation of
v) Safety P- and N-type
9.1.5P2 Battery replacement semiconductors
9.1.5P3 Battery maintenance tools
and equipment Content
9.1.5P4 Battery charging 9.1.6T1 Atomic and molecular
structure
Suggested Learning Resources i) neutron
- Text books ii) proton
- Charts iii) electrons
- Voltmeter iv) orbit
- Battery 9.1.6T2 Semiconductor materials
- Charger i) silicon
- Hydrometer ii) germanium
- Funnel iii) periodic table
- Electrolyte 9.1.6T3 Intrinsic and extrinsic
- Distilled water conduction
- Workshop tools i) electrons
- Jumper cables ii) holes
iii) influence of external field
iv) generation and
recombination of charge
carriers
9.1.6T4 Crystal structure of
semiconductor
i) covalent bond
9.1.6 ELECTRON THEORY ii) energy levels
iii) lattice
Theory 9.1.6T5 Formation of P and N-type
semiconductor
9.1.6T0 Specific Objectives i) donor and acceptor atoms
By the end of the sub- ii) doping
module unit, the trainee iii) trivalent and pentavalent
should be able to: atoms
iv) free electrons and holes
v) diffusion and drift iv) Zener diode
currents v) Light emitting diode
vi) Silicon controlled
9.1.7 SEMI CONDUCTOR rectifier (SCR)
DEVICES vii) Liquid crystal display
LCD)
Theory 9.1.7T2 Operation of semi
conductor devices
9.1.7T0 Specific Objectives i) Diode
By the end of sub- module ii) Bipolar junction
unit, the trainee should be transistor (BJT)
able to: iii) Field effect transistors
a) describe the construction (FET/MOSFET)
of semi conductor iv) Zener diodes
devices v) Silicon controlled
b) explain the operations of rectifier (SCR)
semi conductor devices vi) Liquid Crystal display
c) explain and plot the (LCD)
characteristics of semi- vii) Light emitting diodes
conductor devices (LEDs)
d) state application of 9.1.7T3 Characteristics of semi-
semiconductor devices conductor devices
i) Diode
9.1.7C Competence ii) BJT
The trainee should have the iii) FET/MOSFET
ability to: iv) Zener diode
i) Construct electronic v) Light emitting diode
circuits using (LED)
semiconductor devices vi) Liquid crystal display
ii) Test semiconductor (LCD)
devices vii) SCRs
iii) Explain and plot the 9.1.7T4 Applications of
characteristics of semiconductor devices
semiconductor devices i) Diode
iv) Select and use various ii) BJT
semiconductor devices iii) FET
iv) Zener diode
Content v) LED
9.1.7T1 Construction and symbol vi) SCR
of semiconductor vii) LCD
devices
i) Diode Practice
ii) Bipolar junction
transistor (BJT) 9.1.7P0 Specific Objectives
iii) Field effect transistors
(FETs)
By the end of the sub b) describe the operation
module unit the trainee of various electronic
should be able to components
a) Identify types of c) state the application of
semiconductor devices various electronic
b) Connect and operate component
c) Test the semiconductor 9.1.7C Competence
devices The trainee should have the
ability to;
Content i) Select and use various
9.1.7P1 Identification of semi electronic components
conductor devices ii) Test electronic
9.1.7P2 Connection of components
semiconductor devices iii) Determine component
9.1.7P3 Tests on semiconductor value and rating
components
Content
Suggested Learning Resources 9.1.7T1 Electronics Components
i) Charts i) Resistors
ii) Selected textbooks ii) Capacitors
iii) Reliance iii) Inductors
iv) Catalogue iv) Diodes
v) Handouts Test v) Bi polar transistor
instruments (BJT)
vi) Charts vi) Field effect
vii) Circuit trainer kits transistors (FETS)
vii) Triacs
viii) Thyristors ( SCR)
ix) Photo conductive
cells
x) Photo diodes
xi) Photo transistors
xii) Light emitting
9.1.8 ELECTRONIC diodes (LED)
COMPONENTS xiii) Liquid crystal
display (LCD)
Theory xiv) Integrated circuits
(ICS)
9.1.7T0 Specific Objectives 9.1.7T2 Operation of electronics
By the end of the sub components
module unit, the trainee 9.1.7T3 Applications of
should be able to: electronics components
a) describe the
constructional features Practice
of various components
9.1.7P0 Specific Objectives a) explain the principles of
By the end of the sub power regulation and
module unit, the trainee stabilization
should be able to: b) describe the rectification
a) identify various processes
electronic c) describe different
components methods of smoothing
b) determine values and d) explain the operation of
ratings of electronic voltage multipliers and
components dividers
c) test various electronic e) explain the methods of
components power supply protection.
Content 9.1.8C Competence

9.1.7P1 Identification of various The trainee should have the
electronic components ability to:
9.1.7P2 Values and rating - Rectify voltage
i) Component size rectification
ii) Colour code - Apply different methods
iii) Component Data of smoothing
9.1.7P3 Testing of electronic
component Content
i) Short circuit 9.1.8T1 Methods of power
ii) Open circuit rectification
iii) Change in value i) Half wave
iv) leakage ii) Full wave
iii) Full wave bridge
Suggested Learning Resources 9.1.8T2 Smoothing
i) Text books i) Reservoir
ii) Data books ii) capacitor
iii) Charts iii) R – C filter
iv) Assorted electronics iv) Pie filter
components 9.1.8T3 Regulation
v) Assorted electronics i) Zener diode regulator
components ii) Transistor regulator
iii) IC regulator
9.1.8 POWER 9.1.8T4 Voltage multipliers
RECTIFICATION i) Double
ii) Triplex
Theory iii) Quadrupler
9.1.8T5 Methods of power Supply
9.1.8T0 Specific Objectives protection
By the end of the sub i) Circuit breakers
module unit, the trainee ii) Switches
should be able to: iii) Fuses
Practice i) Chats
ii) Handouts
9.1.8P0 Specific Objectives iii) Textbooks
By the end of the sub iv) Reservoir
module unit, the trainee v) Capacitor
should be able to: vi) R – c filter
a) build simple regulator vii) Pie filter
circuit viii) Zener diode regulator
b) test and measure ix) Transistor regulator
various supply x) Ic regulator
parameters xi) Double
xii) Triplex
Content xiii) Quadrupler
9.1.8P1 Construction of power xiv) Circuit breakers
supply regulators xv) Switches
i) Zener diode regulator xvi) Fuses
ii) Transistor regulator xvii) Electrical workshop
iii) IC regulator tools
9.1.8P2 Tests and measurements
i) DC out put on no load
ii) DC out put on load
iii) Load current
iv) Ripple

10.1.0 BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
10.1.01 Introduction
This module is designed to equip the trainee with the necessary
skills and attitude in geometric and engineering drawing.

By the end of the module, the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the principles of mechanical engineering drawing
b) read and interpret engineering drawing
c) communicate effectively using drawings and symbols
Basic Engineering Drawing

Unit Hrs
10.1.1 Introduction  Drawing instruments 6
to Engineering  Drawing Office
Drawing and  Drawing paper
Design
10.1.2 Paper Layout  Paper layout 6
 Lettering
 Numbering
10.1.3 Plane  Straight lines 6
Geometry  Common angles
 Triangles
 Quadrilaterals
 Polygons
 Circles
10.1.4 Blending of  Straight lines 6
Lines and  Arcs
Arcs  Circles
10.1.5 Tangents  Circles and tangents 6

 Common tangents
 External and Internal
tangents
10.1.6 Pictorial &  Pictorial and 21
Orthographic  Orthographic
Projections  Isometric oblique
 Cavalier, cabinet
 1st angle projection and
 rd angle
10.1.7 Lines In  True length 12
Space  Traces of the straight
 Line given the Plan and
elevation.
 True angle between the
 VP and the oblique plane
 True shape of a lamina
10.1.8 Solid  Solid Geometry 12
Geometry  Surface development
 Intersection of Geometrical
objects
 Auxiliary views
10.1.9 Conic  Ellipse 12
Sections  Parabola
 Hyperbola
10.1.10 Loci and  Loci of plane figures 12
mechanisms  Loci of rigid link
 mechanisms
Total Time 99
10.1.1 INTRODUCTION TO Suggested Learning Resources
ENGINEERING - Drawing office
DRAWING - Drawing text books
AND DESIGN - Mechanical drawing boards
- Manual drawing boards
10.1.1P0 Specific Objectives - The Internet
should be able to: 10.1.2 PAPER LAYOUT
a) appreciate the need for
engineering drawing 10.1.2P0 Specific Objectives
b) identify drawing By the end of the sub-
instruments and module unit the trainee
equipment should be able:
c) use drawing a) layout the paper correctly
instruments and b) print letters and numbers
equipment correctly to the required standard
10.1.1C Competence 10.1.2C Competence

The trainee should have the The trainee should have
ability to: the ability to:
i) Sharpen pencils i) Set out the drawing
ii) Set the compass paper on the drawing
iii) Select paper size board
iv) layout paper ii) Draw boarder lines
and title block
Content iii) Print numbers and
10.1.1P1 Need for engineering letters correctly.
drawing
10.1.1P2 Drawing instruments and Content
Equipments 10.1.2P1 Paper layout
i) T-Square i) Boarder lines
ii) Set squares ii) Outlines
iii) Drawing board iii) Masking the paper on
iv) Types of pencils the board
v) Drawing set iv) Construction lines
vi) Eraser v) Centre lines
vii) Drawing paper vi) Dimension lines
viii) Paper sizes vii) Guidelines
ix) Square grid and viii) Title block
isometric grid 10.1.2P2 Printing letters and
10.1.1P3 Correct use of drawing numbers
instruments and i) Upper case
equipment ii) Lower case
b) determine the centre of
10.1.3 PLANE GEOMETRY an arc given its radius
which blends with a
10.1.3P0 Specific objectives line and a circle.
By the end of the sub- c) find the centre of an arc
module unit the trainee of a given radius which
should be able to: blend with the two
a) construct lines and circles
angles
b) construct plane 10.1.4C Competence
geometric figures The trainee should have
the ability to:
Content i) blend lines and curves
10.1.3P1 Straight lines ii) determine the centre of
10.1.3P2 Common angles an arc
10.1.3P3 Plane geometric figures iii) blend circles with arcs
i) Triangles and other circles
ii) Quadrilaterals
iii) Polygons Content
iv) Circles 10.1.4P1 Straight lines
10.1.4P2 Arcs
10.1.3C Competence 10.1.4P3 Circles
ability to: Suggested Learning Resources
- Drawing offices
i) Construct lines and - Text books
angles - Drawing equipment
ii) Divide a straight line into
any number of equal 10.1.5 TANGENTS
parts
iii) Construct plane figures 10.1.5P0 Specific Objectives
Suggested Learning Resources module unit the trainee
- Drawing office should be able to:
- Textbooks d) construct a tangent to a
circle
10.1.4 BLENDING OF LINES e) construct a tangent to a
AND ARCS circle from a point
outside
10.1.4P0 Specific Objectives f) construct a common
By the end of the sub- tangent to two equal
module unit the trainee circles
should be able to: g) construct a common
a) blend straight lines and interior tangents to two
arcs equal circles
h) construct a common d) dimension the drawing
external tangent to two correctly
unequal circles
i) construct a common 10.1.6C Competence
internal tangent The trainee should have the
between two un equal ability to:
circles i) construct pictorial views
in isometric and oblique
10.1.5C Competence projections
The trainee should have ii) change pictorial drawings
the ability to: into orthographic and
i) Draw a tangent to a vice versa
circle iii) dimension a given
ii) Draw common drawing
internal and
external tangents Content
two circles
10.1.6P1 Identification of types of
Content projection
10.1.5P1 Circles and tangents i) First-angle
10.1.5P2 Common tangents ii) Third-angle projections
10.1.5P3 External and Internal 10.1.6P2 Pictorial drawings
tangents i) Isometric projections
ii) Oblique projections
Suggested Learning Resources iii) Cabinet
- Drawing offices iv) Cavalier
- Text books 10.1.6P3 Pictorial and
- Drawing equipment Orthographic
10.1.6P4 Dimensioning
10.1.6 PICTORIAL & Rules for dimensioning
ORTHOGRAPHIC drawing
PROJECTIONS
10.1.6P0 Specific Objectives - Textbooks
By the end of the sub- - Models
module unit the trainee - Drawing equipment
should be able to:
a) identify two types of
projection
b) construct objects in
isometric and oblique
projection 10.1.7 LINES IN SPACE
c) convert pictorial to
orthographic and vice 10.1.7P0 Specific Objectives
versa
By the end of the sub- a) construct geometric
module unit the trainee solids
should be able to: b) develop different type
a) draw the projection of of solids
a line not parallel to c) draw the development
any of the principal of intersecting objects
planes d) draw auxiliary views
b) find the true length of a
line not parallel to any 10.1.8C Competence
of the principal planes The trainee should have
c) determine the angle the ability to:
made between the line i) construct various solid
and the front vertical figures
plane (FVP) and the ii) draw surface
horizontal plane.(H.P) development of
truncated figures
10.1.7C Competence iii) draw Auxiliary views
the ability to draw the Content
true shape of projection 10.1.8P1 Solid figures
lines. Cylinders
i) Cones
Content ii) Pyramids
10.1.7T1 Non Principal Planes 10.1.8P2 Surface development of
i) True length solid figures
ii) Traces of the straight i) Box
line given the Plan and ii) Cylinder
elevation. iii) Pyramid
iii) True angle between iv) Cone
the VP and the oblique 10.1.8P3 Intersection of
plane Geometrical objects
iv) True shape of a lamina i) Lines of intersection
10.1.7T2 True length of a line ii) Curves of intersection
10.1.7T3 Determination of angles 10.1.8P4 Auxiliary views
between FVP and HP i) Auxiliary views of
truncated objects
Suggested Learning Resources ii) True shape of the cut
i) Text books portion
ii) Models
10.1.8 SOLID GEOMETRY - Drawing office
- Textbooks
10.1.8P0 Specific Objectives - Models
By the end of the sub- - Internet
module unit the trainee - Drawing equipment
should be able to:
10.1.9 CONIC SECTIONS b) draw the locus of a
point in relation to a
10.1.9P0 Specific objectives circle
By the end of the sub- c) draw the locus of a
module unit the trainee point for a given
should be able to: mechanism
a) draw an ellipse using d) draw the locus o rigid
various methods link mechanisms
b) parabola using various
methods 10.1.10C Competence
c) hyperbola using The trainee should have
various methods the ability to design link
mechanisms for
Content engineering components.
10.1.9P1 Ellipse
i) Focus Content
ii) Minor axis 10.1.10P1 Definition of a locus of a
iii) Major axis point
iv) Directrix 10.1.10P2 Loci of plane figures
v) Vertex i) Circle
10.1.9P2 Parabola ii) Ellipse
i) Focus iii) Parabola
ii) Directrix 10.1.10P3 Loci of given
iii) Eccentricity mechanisms
10.1.9P3 Hyperbolas 10.1.10P4 Loci of rigid link
i) Focus mechanisms
ii) Directrix iv) The sliding ladder
iii) Eccentricity v) The piston-crank and
connecting rod link
Suggested learning resources vi) The four bar link
i) Textbooks
ii) drawing office Suggested Learning Resources
iii) Models i) Piston-crank and
connecting rod model
ii) Textbooks
iii) The internet
iv) Drawing equipment
10.1.10 LOCI AND
MECHANISMS

should be able:
a) define the locus of a
point
11.1.0 MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY AND METALLURGY
Materials technology and metallurgy is the study of engineering
materials and their applications in engineering field.
These engineering materials include metals, ceramics, organics,
composites, and semiconductors.
The study involves the composition of materials their production
processes, mechanical and physical properties.
The module also exposes the trainees to various methods of
improving the properties of metals by heat treatment methods

At the end the module, the trainee should be able to:
a) understand various materials and their applications in
engineering field
b) understand production processes of engineering materials
c) apply heat treatment processes on metal to improve their
properties
d) select the right engineering materials for various applications in
the automotive industry
e) understand factors to be considered when selecting materials
for particular use.
Materials Technology and Metallurgy

Code Sub-Module Content Time Hrs
Unit
11.1.1 Properties of  Types of engineering 4 2 6
Engineering materials
Materials  Properties of engineering
materials
 (physical and
mechanical)
11.1.2 Structure of  Crystalline state 2 2 4
Materials  Crystal structures
 Terminologies
11.1.3 Production of  Types of ores, charging 4 2 6
Iron, Steel and materials
Cast Iron  Types of furnaces
11.1.4 Cast Irons  Types and structures of 2 2 4
cast irons
 Properties of C.I.
11.1.4 Carbon Steels  Classification of carbons 2 2 4
steels
 Properties of plain
carbon steel
 Application of plain
carbon steel
11.1.5 Alloy Steels  Alloying elements and 6 2 8
their effects
 Classification of alloy
steels
 Corrosion resistant steels
and their application
 Ferritic, martensitic and
austenitic stainless steels
 Weld decay and sigma
phase
 Heat resisting steels
 Tool steels
11.1.6 Non-Ferrous  Non-ferrous metals 6 4 10
Metals and  Production of non-
Alloys ferrous metals
 Properties of non ferrous
metals
 Forms of supply
 Brass, Bronze,
Cupronickels
 Duralumin
 Cast and Wrought Alloys
11.1.7 Plastics, Wood  Types of plastics 2 2 4
and Rubber  Wood
 Rubber
11.1.8 Bearing  Metals/non-metals 2 2 4
Materials  Bearing properties
11.1.9 Corrosion and  Types of corrosion 2 2 4
Its Prevention  Corrosion prevention
11.1.1 Heat  Annealing 4 8 12
0 Treatment  Tempering
 Normalizing
 Hardening
 Case hardening
Total Time 36 30 66
11.1.1 PROPERTIES OF vi) Electrical conductivity
ENGINEERING vii) Magnetism
MATERIALS 11.1.1T3 Mechanical properties
i) Tensile strength
Theory ii) Hardness
iii) Ductility
11.1.1T0 Specific Objectives iv) Impact strength
By the end of the sub- v) Malleability
module unit, the trainee vi) Brittleness
should be able to: vii) Elasticity
a) identify various types viii) Plasticity
of engineering ix) Weldability
materials 11.1.1T4 Forms of supply
b) describe physical i) Sheets
properties of ii) Plates
engineering materials iii) Bars
c) define mechanical iv) Tubes
properties of v) Rolled Sections
engineering materials vi) Granules
d) state forms of supply vii) Pellets
viii) Powder
11.1.1C Competence
The trainee should have the Practice
ability to:
i) identify various types 11.1.1P0 Specific Objectives
of engineering By the end of the sub-
materials for a given module unit, the trainee
task should be able to:
ii) determine various i) identify various types
material properties of engineering
materials
Content ii) determine various
11.1.1T1 Types of engineering material properties
materials
i) Metals Content
ii) Ceramics 11.1.1P1 Types of materials
iii) Composite i) Ferrous
iv) Organic ii) Non-ferrous
v) Semiconductors iii) Composites
11.1.1T2 Physical properties iv) Organic
i) Colour v) Ceramics
ii) Thermal conductivity vi) Semiconductors
iii) Corrosion resistance 11.1.1P2 Determination of
iv) density material properties
v) Melting point i) Colours
ii) Density iii) Face centered cubic
iii) Conductivity (F.C.C)
iv) Hardness iv) Hexagonal close
v) Corrosion resistance packed (H.C.P)
11.1.2T3 Terms for material
Suggested Learning Resources states:
- Various metals i) Mixture, compound,
- Science laboratory alloy, solid solution,
liquids, eutectic,
11.1.2 STRUCTURE OF solidus,
MATERIALS ii) eutectoid, thermal
equilibrium diagrams
Theory
Practice
By the end of the sub- 11.1.2P0 Specific Objectives
should be able to: module unit, the trainee
a) explain crystalline should be able to:
state a) grow crystals
b) describe types of b) identify various
crystal structures crystal structures
c) describe terminologies c) demonstrate various
material states
11.1.2P3 Competence
The trainee should have Content
the ability to: 11.1.2P1 crystal growing (sugar,
i) Describe crystalline salt)
states, structures and 11.1.2P2 crystal structure models
terminologies h.c.p, b.c.c, f.c.c, s.c
ii) grow crystals material states
iii) identify crystal 11.1.2P3 material states –
structures compound, mixture,
iv) demonstrate various alloy
material states
Content i) Experiments
11.1.2T1 Crystalline state ii) Models
i) Cell and space lattice 11.1.3 PRODUCTION OF
ii) Grain and grain IRON, STEEL AND
boundary CAST IRON
iii) Growth of dendrites
11.1.2T2 Crystal structures Theory
i) Simple cubic
ii) Body centred cubic 11.1.3T0 Specific Objectives
(B.C.C)
By the end of the sub- By the end of the sub-
module unit, the trainee module unit, the trainee
should be able to: should be able to:
a) state various types of a) identify various types
iron ore of ores and charging
b) state the additional materials
charging material in a b) identify various types
furnace and their of furnaces
effects on iron c) practice safety
c) describe the
construction and Content
operational principles 11.1.3P1 Ores and charging
of furnaces materials
d) state the care and 11.1.3P2 Types of furnaces
safety necessary in 11.1.3P3 Safety
blast furnace i) personal
ii) equipment
11.1.3C Competence
the ability to: - Various ores
i) identify various ores - Various charging
and charging materials
materials - Various furnaces
ii) identify various types
of furnaces 11.1.4 CAST IRONS
iii) observe safety
Theory
Content
11.1.3T1 Types of iron ores 11.1.4T0 Specific Objectives
11.1.3T2 Additional charging By the end of the sub-
materials module unit, the trainee
11.1.3T3 Features of furnaces should be able to;
i) Blast a) name various types of
ii) Cupola cast irons and their
iii) Open hearth applications
iv) Bessemer b) describe properties of
v) Electric furnace cast irons
vi) Oxygen process c) describe the effects of
(Kaldo) alloying elements on
11.1.3T4 Safety the properties of cast
irons
Practice d) state defects in iron
casting
11.1.4C Competence
the ability to: Theory
i) describe grey and
white iron 11.1.5T0 Specific Objectives
ii) describe properties of By the end of the sub-
various cast irons module unit, the trainee
iii) Identify different should be able to:
types of cast iron a) classify various types
iv) Test mechanical of plain carbon steels
properties of cast based on carbon
irons content
v) state casting defects b) state properties of
plain carbon steels
Content c) state applications of
11.1.4T1 Types of cast iron and plain carbons steels
their application
11.1.4T2 Properties of cast irons 11.1.5 Competence
11.1.4T3 Effects of alloying The trainee should have
elements the ability to:
11.1.4T5 Effects of heat treatment i) state different plain
defects in iron casting carbon steels, their
properties and
Practice applications
ii) identify types of plain
11.1.4P0 Specific Objectives carbon steels
By the end of the sub- iii) identify cold
module unit, the trainee rolled/drop forged
should be able to: items
a) Identify various types
of cast iron Content
b) Test properties of cast 11.1.5T1 Classification of plain
iron carbon steels
dead mild, mild, medium
Content carbon, high carbon
11.1.4P1 Types of cast iron 11.1.5T2 Properties of plain
11.1.4P2 Mechanical tests on cast carbon steel tensile
iron strength, ductility,
hardness, toughness,
malleability, brittleness
11.1.5T3 Applications chain,
Suggested Learning Resources rivets, structural,
- Various types of cast iron crankshafts, hammers,
- Heating furnace drills
- Cast iron castings
Practice
11.1.5 CARBON STEELS
By the end of the sub- the ability to identify:
module unit, the trainee i) Of stainless steels
should be able to: ii) Tool alloying
a) identify types of plain elements
carbon steels iii) Uses of alloy steels
b) identify cold rolled/ iv) Uses materials and
drop forged items their properties
Content Content
11.1.5P1 Types of plain carbon 11.1.6T1 Alloying elements
steels i) Nickel, molybdenum,
i) Dead Mild, chromium, sulphur,
ii) Mild, titanium, vanadium
iii) Medium Carbon, 11.1.6T2 Classification of alloy
iv) High Carbon Steel steels
11.1.5P2 Cold rolled/drop forged i) Manganese steels
items ii) Nickel steels
iii) Nickel chrome
Suggested Learning Resources iv) Nickel chrome
- Various types of plain carbon vanadium steels
steel v) Nickel chromium,
- Cold rolled/drop forged molybdenum alloys
products vi) Chromium steels
11.1.6T3 Corrosion resistant steels
11.1.6 ALLOY STEELS (stainless steels)
i) Nickel, chromium,
Theory molybdenum alloys
ii) Austenitic, ferritic,
11.1.6T0 Specific Objectives martensitic steels
By the end of the sub- iii) Weld decay and sigma
module unit, the trainee phase
should be able to: iv) Applications:
a) list typical alloying v) Cutlery, beer barrel,
elements chemical plant
b) classify alloy steels 11.1.6T4 Heat resistant steels
c) describe corrosion i) Molybdenum
resistant steels and ii) Tungsten
their applications iii) Vanadium
d) describe heat resistant 11.1.6T5 Selection of steels for
steels, their properties specific application
and applications i) Tools
e) select steel for ii) Dies
specific application iii) Kitchenware
iv) Furnace Conveyor
11.1.6C Competence v) Turbine Blades
a) describe methods of
Practice producing non ferrous
metals and properties
11.1.6P0 Specific Objectives b) state forms of supply
By the end of the sub- c) describe non ferrous
module unit, the trainee alloys
should be able to: d) state alloys for
a) identify various specific application
alloying elements
b) identify uses of alloy 11.1.7C Competence
steels The trainee should have
c) identify applications the ability to:
of stainless steels i) methods of producing
d) identify various tool non-ferrous metals
materials and their ii) forms of supply of
properties non-ferrous metals
iii) non-ferrous metals
Content iv) electrolysis process
11.1.6P1 Alloying elements v) tests on materials
11.1.6P2 Uses of alloy steels vi) non-ferrous alloys
11.1.6P3 Applications of stainless vii) selection of alloys for
steels specific application
11.1.6P4 Tool materials and
properties Content
11.1.7T1 Non ferrous metals
Suggested Learning Resources i) Copper, aluminium
- Various alloy steels ii) Electrolysis of
aluminium oxide
iii) Smelting of copper
iv) Properties
v) High electrical
conductivity
vi) Affinity for oxygen
vii) Light weight
viii) Corrosion resistance
11.1.7 NON FERROUS ix) High thermal
METALS AND conductivity
ALLOYS x) Ductility and
malleability
Theory 11.1.7T2 Forms of supply
i) Sheets, bars, rolled
11.1.7T0 Specific Objectives sections, tubes
By the end of the sub- 11.1.7T3 Non ferrous alloys
module unit, the trainee i) Aluminium alloys
should be able to:
ii) Wrought, cast, non- 11.1.7P3 Non ferrous alloys
heat treatable, heat i) Copper based
treatable ii) Brasses
iii) Copper alloys iii) Bronzes
iv) Brasses, bronzes, iv) Cupronickels
cupro-nickels Babbitt v) Aluminium based
11.1.7T4 Applications vi) Cast wrought
i) Conductor, heat vii) Heat treatable/non
exchanger, aircraft heat treatable
fuselage and structural viii) Applications
construction, thrust ix) Cartridges, shell
bearing, cartridges cases, heat
exchangers, bearings,
Practice aircraft fuselage and
seat frames
By the end of the sub- Suggested Learning Resources
module unit, the trainee i) Copper oxide
should be able to: ii) Aluminium oxide
a) identify non-ferrous iii) Furnace
metals iv) Various non-ferrous
b) perform an metallic samples
electrolysis process v) Various non-ferrous
c) determine various alloy samples
material properties vi) Science laboratory
d) identify non-ferrous equipment
alloys
e) identify alloying
elements in non-
ferrous alloys
f) select alloys for
specific applications 11.1.8 PLASTICS, WOOD
AND RUBBER
Content
11.1.7P0 Non-ferrous metals Theory
i) Aluminium
ii) Copper 11.1.8T0 Specific Objectives
11.1.7P1 Electrolysis process By the end of the sub-
i) Use of copper module unit, the trainee
solvents should be able to:
11.1.7P2 Properties of materials a) differentiate
i) Hardness, heat thermoplastics from
conductivity, thermosetting plastics
corrosion resistance, b) describe properties of
affinity for oxygen, plastics
magnetism
c) classify polymeric 11.1.8T1 Thermoplastics and
materials thermosetting plastics
d) state forms of supply, 11.1.8T2 Properties
mechanical properties i) Plasticity
and engineering ii) Low Melting
applications Temperature
e) state types of iii) Light Weight
polymeric adhesives iv) Weldability
f) explain how joint v) Strength
design affects strength vi) Brittleness
of joint vii) Durability Toughness
g) explain the structure viii) Corrosion Resistance
of wood 11.1.8T3 Classification
h) explain the process of i) P.V.C., P.T.F.E.
wood preservation ii) Thermo plastics
i) describe various iii) Cellulose derivatives,
elastomers polyethylene,
j) state types of rubber terephthylene, nylon,
k) describe properties of poly carbonate
rubber iv) Thermosetting plastics
v) Phenol – formal
11.1.8 Competence dehyde, phenol, amino
The trainee should have the formaldelyde,
ability to: polyesters, epoxy
polyurethane
i) Distinguish vi) Elastomers
thermoplastics/thermosett vii) Natural rubber,
ing plastics isobutylene,
ii) Explain the effect of joint butadylene,
design on strength of polysulphide,
joint polyurethanic
iii) Distinguish different 11.1.8T4 Forms of supply
wood structures 11.1.8T5 Adhesives – araldite,
iv) Season and cure wood epoxies, phenolic resins
v) Apply heat test to plastic 11.1.8T6 Joint design: butt, lap,
vi) Test plastic for various contact surface, tension
properties load, cleavage
vii) Identify applications for 11.1.8T7 Cross section of wood
plastics 11.1.8T8 Preservation
viii) Identify polymeric i) Seasoning
adhesives ii) Curing
ix) Distinguish different 11.1.8T9 Types of Rubber
types of rubber i) Natural
ii) SBR
Content iii) Butyl
iv) Nitride
v) EPR
vi) Polysulphide 11.1.9T0 Specific Objectives
11.1.8T10 Properties of rubber By the end of the sub-
Practice should be able to:
a) state classification of
11.1.8P0 Specific Objectives bearing materials
By the end of the sub- b) explain bearing
module unit, the trainee properties
should be able to: c) select material for
a) distinguish plastics by bearing application
heat application
b) test plastics for 11.1.9C Competence
various properties The trainee should have
c) identify various the ability to:
plastics application i) identify various types
d) identify various of bearing materials
polymeric adhesives ii) carry out tests for
bearing properties
Content iii) select bearing
11.1.8P1 Types of plastics material for a given
i) Thermoplastics application
ii) Thermosetting iv) produce a plain
11.1.8P2 Properties bearing
i) Weight, low melting
temperature strength, Content
electrical 11.1.9T1 Bearing materials
conductivity, elasticity i) Metals
11.1.8P3 Applications ii) White metals (Tin
i) Machine operations, base, Lead base)
bearing materials, car iii)Copper based
trims, seat covers, iv) Aluminium based
tiles handles v) Non-metals
11.1.8P4 Adhesives vi) Graphite
i) Araldite, epoxies, vii) Nylon
phenolics viii) P.T.F.E.
ii) Wood 11.1.9T2 Bearing properties
iii) Types of rubber i) Wear resistance
ii) Shock resistance
Suggested Learning Resources iii) Strength
i) Various plastic material iv) Ductility
ii) Science laboratory v) Corrosion resistance
11.1.9T3 Select bearing materials
11.1.9 BEARING MATERIALS i) Metals
ii) Non-metals
Theory
Practice 11.1.10 CORROSION AND
ITS PREVENTION
By the end of the sub- Theory
should be able to: 11.1.10P0 Specific Objectives
a) identify various types By the end of the sub-
of bearing materials module unit, the trainee
b) carry out tests for should be able to:
bearing properties a) outline mechanism of
c) select suitable corrosion
bearing for a given b) describe methods
application available for
d) produce a plain prevention of
bearing corrosion
Content
11.1.9P1 Bearing materials 11.1.10C Competence
i) Metal based The trainee should have
ii) Tin based the ability to:
iii) Lead based i) outline types of
iv) Copper based corrosion
v) Aluminium based ii) describe methods of
vi) Non-metals preventing corrosion
vii) Graphite iii) subject material to
viii) Nylon corrosive atmosphere
ix) P.T.F.E. iv) perform corrosion
11.1.9P2 Bearing properties preventive method
i) Wear resistance v) observe safety
ii) Shock resistance
iii) Strength Content
iv) Ductility 11.1.10T1 Types of corrosion
v) Corrosion Chemical attack
11.1.9P3 Bearing applications - Electrolytic action
i) End thrust with reference to
ii) Side thrust electronic chemical
11.1.9P4 Plain bearing production – series
i) Bush 11.1.10 T2 Corrosion prevention
ii) Split i) Electroplating
ii) Cladding
Suggested Learning Resources iii) Spraying
- Various bearing iv) Calourising
materials v) Sherardizing
- Science laboratory vi) Chromizing
vii) Phosphading
viii) Painting a) describe various heat
ix) Varnishing treatment processes
x) Cathodic protection b) state advantages and
limitations of heat
Practice treatment processes
c) select heat treatment
11.1.10P0 Specific Objectives process for a given
By the end of the sub- task
should be able to:
a) subject materials to
corrosive
environment
b) perform corrosion
preventive methods 11.1.11C Competence
c) observe safety The trainee should have
precautions the ability to:
i) describe various heat
Content treatment processes
11.1.10P1 Corrosive conditions ii) state advantages and
Acids, salts, air limitations of heat
11.1.10P2 Preventive methods treatment processes
Painting, spraying, iii) observe safety
varnishing, iv) identify various
electroplating , carbonaceous
carbonizing, sheradising material
anodizing v) identify and select
11.1.10P3 Safety heat treatment
Personal, equipment process
Content
Suggested Learning Resources 11.1.11T1 Heat treatment process
- Supply of various corrosive i) Annealing
media ii) Tempering
- Supply of various material iii) Normalizing
- Science lab iv) Hardening
v) Surface hardening
11.1.11 HEAT TREATMENT processes
vi) Case hardening
Theory vii) Carburizing
viii) Refining the
11.1.11T0 Specific Objectives case
By the end of the sub- ix) Nitriding
module unit, the trainee x) Flame hardening
should be able to: xi) Induction hardening
xii) Advantages and d) practice safety when
limitations of heat performing heat
treatment treatment
xiii) Wear
resistant Content
xiv)Toughness 11.1.11P1 Heat Treatment Process
xv) Process selection i) Annealing
11.1.11T2 Advantages and ii) Normalizing
limitations iii) Tempering
11.1.11T3 Treatment processes iv) Hardening
v) Surface hardening
11.1.11P2 Carbonaceous material
i) Solids
Practice ii) Liquid
iii) Gas
11.1.11P0 Specific Objectives 11.1.11P3 Surface hardening
By the end of the sub- processes
module unit, the trainee i) Case hardening
should be able to: ii) Carbon nitriding
a) identify various iii) Flame hardening
carbonaceous iv) Induction hardening
material 11.1.11P4 Safety precautions
b) identify and select
heat treatment Suggested Learning Resources
process - Heat treatment furnaces
c) perform heat - Salt bath furnace
treatment process - Carburizing material
- Safety masks/gear
12.1.01.0 WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY
12.1.01.01 Introduction
This module unit is designed to equip the trainee with knowledge,
skills and attitudes in engineering production processes with
emphasis on high quality finishing processes when using machine
tools, and varied engineering materials.
12.1.01.02 General Objectives

By the end the end of the module unit the trainee should be able
to:
a) understand the importance of safety in the workshop
environment
b) understand the production and uses of ferrous and non-ferrous
metals
c) understand the working principles of measuring, marking out
and inspection tools and equipment
d) acquire knowledge of various types of cutting fluids and
lubricants
e) demonstrate care and maintenance on heat treatment equipment
12.1.01.03 Module Unit Summary Table and Time Allocation
Production Processes Technology 1

Code Module Sub-Module Unit
Unit Th. Prac. Total
12.1.01.1 Health and  Importance of safety
Safety  Factors which
enhance safety
 Electrical hazards
 Fire hazards 2 2 4
 Factory Acts
Abstract
 Machine and
personal safety
12.1.01.2 Engineering  Types of engineering
Materials materials
 Application of
engineering
materials
 Production of metals
 Properties of 2 2 4
engineering
materials
 Material
specification
 Workshop tests
 Safety precautions
12.1.01.3 Materials  Methods of handling
Handling materials
and Waste appropriately
Disposal  The public
procurement and 2 2 4
disposal’s act 2005
 Methods of
disposing waste
materials
12.1.01.4 Quality  Meaning of quality
Control control
 Procedure of work
process
2 2 4
 Good workmanship
 Factors contributing
to marketability of a
product
12.1.01.5 Measuring,  Measuring, marking
Marking out and inspection
Out and tools
Inspection  Parts of measuring
instruments
 Principles of
measuring
instruments
 Gauge materials
 Inspection tools
 Nomenclature of
marking out
equipment
 Materials for
marking out
equipment
 Design features of 2 4 6
equipment
 Procedure for
marking out
 Care and
maintenance of
marking out
measuring and
inspection tools
 Limits and fits
 Types of fits
 Uses of fits
 Identification of fits
 Types of tolerances
 Calculation of
clearances or
interferences
12.1.01.6 Hand  Hand and forming
Cutting and tools
Forming  Parts of hand tools
Tools  Materials for hand
tools
2 4 6
 Design features and
construction
 Use of hand tools
 Care and
maintenance
12.1.01.7 Machine  Types of machine
Tools 1 tools
 Machine tool
construction and
accessories
 Tool and work
holding
2 4 6
 Machine operations
 Cutting tool design
 Cutting fluids and
lubrication
 Care and
maintenance
 Safety
12.1.01.8 Culture of  Meaning of culture
maintenance of maintenance
 Need for
2 0 2
maintenance
 Types of
maintenance
12.1.01.9 Metal  Joining methods
Joining I  Tools and equipment
 Procedure for
2 4 6
making a joint
 Defects in joints
 Safety
12.1.01.10 Heat  Term heat treatment
Treatment  Heat treatment
effects
 Heat treatment
processes
 Purpose of heat
treatment
4 8 12
 Heat treatment
process for a given
metal
 Cooling media
 Heat Treatment
equipment
 Safety precautions
12.1.01.11 Finishing  Types of finishing
Processes processes
 Techniques of
finishing
 Safety precautions 2 6 8
 Care and
maintenance of
finishing tools and
equipment
12.1.01.12 Limits and  Types of fits
Fits  Uses of fits
 Definition of
common terms 2 7 9
 Calculation of
clearance and
interferences
12.1.01.13 Sheet Metal  Sheet metal tools and
Work their uses
 Sheet metal
materials and their
2 8 10
uses
 Sheet metal forming
processes
 Safety
12.1.01.14 Metal  Gas welding
Joining II  Gas cutting
 Manual metal arc
welding
 Metal Inert Gas
4 14 18
(MIG) welding and
 Tungsten Inert Gas
(TIG) welding
 Safety
 Adhesives
Total Time 108 99
12.1.01.1 HEALTH AND iii) identify classes of fire
SAFETY and methods of
fighting them
Theory iv) demonstrate
appropriate fire
12.1.01.1T0 Specific Objectives fighting skills
By the end of the sub v) administer first aid to
module unit, the trainee a victim
should be able to; vi) identify exits,
a) explain the positions of fire
importance of safety extinguishers and first
in a workshop aid kits
b) state factors that
enhance safety in the Content
workshop 12.1.01.1T1Importance of safety in
c) state the methods of a workshop
stopping a machine in i) accidents prevention
an emergency to workers
d) explain the reasons for ii) accidents prevention
personal safety when to equipment
working in a 12.1.01.1T2Factors enhancing
workshop safety
e) list the dangers i) rules
associated with use of ii) organization
electricity in a 12.1.01.1T3Machine control
workshop emergency
f) explain the i) remote switches
requirements of the ii) main switches
factories act abstract 12.1.01.1T4Personal safety
and its relevance to i) safety gear
general safety ii) Electricity hazards
g) explain First Aid iii) electrocution
procedures in the iv) burning down
workshop v) damaging equipment
h) explain types of fires 12.1.01.1T5 Factories Act
and methods of Abstract
fighting them i) personal safety
ii) workshop requirement
Competence iii) environmental safety
The trainee should have 12.1.01.1T6First Aid procedures
the ability to: for:
i) stop a machine in an i) burns
emergency ii) cuts and bruises (HIV
ii) demonstrate safe risk)
working habits in the iii) electric shock
workshop iv) falls
v) explosives iv) neatness in the
12.1.01.1T7Types of fires workshop (spilt oil,
i) Class A (paper, wood) clear gangway)
ii) Class B (chemical 12.1.01.1P2Dangerous situations in
fuel) the workshop
iii) Class C (Electrical ) i) naked live electrical
iv) Fire Extinguishers wires
v) water ii) avoid obnoxious gases
vi) asbestos blanket iii) helmets (falls,
covering splashes of acids)
vii) CO2 iv) fires (gaseous fuels
viii) foam and electrical faults)
ix) dry powder v) sharp edges/burns
vi) noise
Practice vii) flying chips (goggles)
viii) lifting heavy loads
12.1.01.1P0Specific Objectives 12.1.01.1P3Machine control
By the end of the sub i) remote controls
module unit, the trainee ii) isolating switches
should be able to; iii) machine brakes
a) observe safety in the 12.1.01.1P4Identification of exits,
workshop positions of fire
b) identify and avoid extinguishers and First
dangerous situations Aid kits
in the workshop 12.1.01.1P5Administration of First
c) stop a machine in case Aid
of an emergency i) mouth to mouth
d) identify exits and resuscitation
positions of fire ii) dressing wounds and
extinguishers and First cuts
Aid kits 12.1.01.1P6 Fire fighting drills
e) administer First Aid to
a victim Suggested Teaching Methods
f) demonstrate i) lecture
appropriate fire ii) charts
fighting skills iii) videos
iv) demonstrations
Content v) illustration
12.1.01.1P1Observation of safety in
the workshop Suggested Learning Resources
i) correct, handling of i) Working environment
tools ii) Up-to date fire
ii) dressing fighting equipment
iii) horse play iii) Manufacturers’
specifications
iv) Manuals
i) identify various
Suggested Assessment Methods engineering materials
i) observations in a ii) select various
working environment materials for a given
ii) C.A.Ts job
iii) handle material safely
12.1.01.2 ENGINEERING iv) carry out various
MATERIALS workshop tests on
engineering materials
Theory (bend test, hardness
test, spark test, ringing
12.1.01.2T0 Specific test)
ObjectivesBy the end of v) demonstrate safety
the sub module unit, the precautions when
trainee should be able to; handling, using and
a) list common storing Engineering
engineering materials materials
b) distinguish ferrous
and non-ferrous Content
metals 12.1.01.2T1Common engineering
c) explain the production materials
and uses of ferrous i) ferrous and non-
and non-ferrous ferrous metals
metals ii) plastics (thermosetting
d) explain mechanical and thermoplastics)
properties and iii) wood
characteristics of iv) glass
common ferrous and v) ceramics composites
non-ferrous metals 12.1.01.2T2Distinguish between
e) state the various forms ferrous and non-ferrous
of supply of metals
engineering materials 12.1.01.2T3Production of ferrous
f) explain correct metals
workshop tests used to i) cast iron/pig iron
identify a given ii) plain carbon steel
material iii) alloy steels
g) explain the safety iv) Production and uses
precaution to be of non-ferrous metals
observed when v) copper and its alloys
handling engineering vi) aluminium and its
materials alloys
vii) zinc and its alloys
Competence viii) tin
The trainee should have 12.1.01.2T4Characteristics of
the ability to: common ferrous and
non-ferrous metals
i) cast iron used for the
ii) plain carbon steel production of ferrous
iii)alloy steels and non-ferrous
iv) copper and its alloys metals
v) aluminum and its f) carry out various
alloys mechanical tests for
vi) zinc and its alloys ferrous and non-
vii) tin ferrous metals
12.1.01.2T5 Forms of supply g) identify various forms
i) flat bars of supply of
ii) round bar engineering materials
iii) sheets h) carry out various
iv) plates workshop tests for
v) section (e.g. channel Z ferrous and non-
and I sections) ferrous metals
vi) tubes i) observe safety
vii) granules precautions when
viii) powder handling, using and
ix) tablets storing engineering
12.1.01.2T6 Workshop tests materials.
i) spark test
ii) bend test Content
iii) ringing test 12.1.01.2P1Identification of
12.1.01.2T7 Safety precautions common engineering
i) personal materials
ii) material handling i) ferrous metals
iii) tools and equipment ii) non-ferrous metals
iii) plastics
Practice (thermosetting and
thermoplastics)
12.1.01.2P0Specific Objectives iv) wood (hard and soft)
By the end of the sub v) ceramics
module unit, the trainee vi) glass
should be able to; vii) composites
a) identify common 12.1.01.2P2Selection of materials
engineering materials for a given task
b) select materials for a 12.1.01.2P3Identification of raw
given task/job materials for production
c) identify raw materials of ferrous materials
for the production of a 12.1.01.2P4Identification of raw
given ferrous material materials for the
d) identify raw materials production of non-
used in the production ferrous materials
of non-ferrous metals 12.1.01.2P5Operation of equipment
e) identify and operate for production of ferrous
various equipments
and non ferrous
materials Theory
12.1.01.2P6Mechanical tests for
ferrous and non-ferrous 12.1.01.3T0Specific Objectives
metals By the end of the sub
i) tensile test module unit, the trainee
ii) hardness test should be able to;
iii) notch test/impact test a) list various methods
12.1.01.2P7Forms of supply of handling materials
i) flat bar appropriately
ii) round b) outline methods of
iii) plate disposing waste
iv) sheet materials
v) sections
vi) granules Content
vii) powder 12.1.01.3T1Methods of handling
viii) tablet materials appropriately
12.1.01.2P8Workshop tests i) delicate materials to
i) spark test be handled with care
ii) ringing test 12.1.01.3T2Methods of disposing
iii) bend test waste materials
12.1.01.2P9Safety i) burning: carbonaceous
i) personal safety materials
ii) equipment safety ii) burying: broken glass
or recycling
Suggested Teaching Methods iii) feeding domestic
i) discussion animals with:
ii) demonstration - food left-overs
- banana/ potato
Suggested Learning Resources peelings
i) specimens of various iv) recycling
materials - glass
ii) furnace(s) - paper
iii) equipment(s) - wood shavings
laboratory - textile wastes
iv) slides (overhead
projector) Practice
Suggested Assessment Methods 12.1.01.3P0Specific Objectives

i) C.A.Ts By the end of the sub
ii) Oral/written tests module unit, the trainee
iii) Laboratory report should be able to;
a) identify appropriate
12.1.01.3 MATERIALS methods of handling
HANDLING AND materials
WASTE DISPOSAL
b) demonstrate methods ii) Dumping sites
of disposing waste
appropriately Suggested Assessment Method
i) Practical exercises on
Content handling
12.1.01.3P1Appropriate methods of ii) heavy objects
handling materials iii) heavy materials
i) heavy materials iv) delicate materials
ii) delicate materials
12.1.01.3P2Appropriate methods of 12.1.01.4 QUALITY CONTROL
disposing waste
i) type of materials Theory
ii) consider recycling
iii) environmental 12.1.01.4T0Specific Objectives
considerations By the end of the sub
iv) Health and safety module unit, the trainee
requirements should be able to;
v) Local Authority’s a) explain the meaning
Bye-Law of quality control
requirements on: b) outline the procedure
vi) Waste Disposal of the work process
vii) Siting of dump sites c) enumerate the
viii) Proximity to advantages of good
residential areas workmanship
ix) Proximity to water d) list factors
catchment areas contributing to
marketability of
Competence products
the ability to: Competence
i) Identify appropriate The trainee should have
methods of handling the ability to:
materials safely i) control work process
ii) Demonstrate methods ii) ascertain good
of disposing wastes workmanship
appropriately iii) produce marketable
products
Suggested Teaching Methods
i) Demonstration on Content
handling: 12.1.01.4T1Meaning of quality
ii) Heavy materials control
iii) Heavy objects 12.1.01.4T2Procedure of the work
iv) delicate materials process
i) sequence of activities
Suggested Learning resources 12.1.01.4T3Advantages of good
i) Realia materials workmanship
i) quality products - methods of
ii) customer satisfaction controlling work
12.1.01.4T4 Factors processes
contributing to - identify
marketability of products qualities of good
i) Durability workmanship
ii) Finishing - techniques of
iii) Quality of selected producing
materials marketable
iv) Intended purpose products
Practice Suggested Learning resources

i) Manufactured
12.1.01.4P0 Specific Objectives products
By the end of the sub ii) materials selection
module unit, the trainee iii) workmanship
should be able to; iv) finishing techniques
a) control the work v) Aesthetic value of the
process products
b) ensure good
workmanship Suggested Assessment Method
c) produce marketable i) Producing items of
products high quality
ii) Producing items to
Content specifications
12.1.01.4P1 Control the work iii) Satisfying needs of
process the customer
- sequencing of
activities 12.1.01.5 MEASURING,
MARKING OUT AND
12.1.01.4P2 Ensure good INSPECTION
workmanship
i) quality products Theory
ii) customer satisfaction
12.1.01.4P3 Marketable 12.1.01.5T0Specific Objectives
products By the end of this sub-
i) durability module unit, the trainee
ii) finishing should be able to;
iii) quality of selected a) differentiate between
materials measuring and
iv) serves intended inspection
purpose b) name various
measuring and
Suggested Teaching Methods inspection tools
i) illustration on:
c) explain the principle 12.1.01.5T2Naming of tools
of measuring and i) Measuring
inspection tools - Micrometer
d) name the materials - Vernnier caliper
from which gauges - Combination set
are made - Vernnier
e) state various marking protractor
out tools and - Inspection
equipment - Spirit level
f) name the parts of - Dial test
marking out tools and indicator (DTI)
equipment - Line bar
g) name the materials 12.1.01.5T3Principles of measuring
from which the and inspection tools
marking out tools and i) Function of part
equipment are made ii) Accuracy
from 12.1.01.5T4Naming materials for
h) describe the design gauges
features of marking i) Plug
out equipment ii) Gap
i) explain the procedure iii) Ship/block
for marking out iv) Ring
various projects. v) Feeler
j) explain the correct vi) Screw pitch
method of caring and vii) Angle gauges (angled
maintaining the tools. blocks)
12.1.01.5T5Stating marking out
Competence tools and equipment
The trainee should have i) Marking out table
the ability to: ii) Surface plate
i) identify marking out iii) Angle plate
tools iv) Vee block
ii) use marking out tools v) Vernnier height gauge
correctly vi) Scribing block
iii) care and maintain vii) Combination set
measuring ,marking viii) Dividers
out, and inspection ix) Odd leg calipers
tools x) Centre punch
iv) work safely with xi) Scribers
measuring, inspection xii) Steel rule
and marking out tools xiii) Try square
12.1.01.5T6Naming parts of
Content marking out tools and
12.1.01.5T1Differentiating between equipment
measuring and
inspection
12.1.01.5T7Materials for marking i) micrometer (external,
out tools and equipment internal, depth)
(stated above) ii) vernnier caliper
12.1.01.5T8Design features of iii) vernnier protractor
marking out tools and iv) combination set
equipment v) spirit level
12.1.01.5T9Procedure for marking vi) sine bar
out vii) sine table
12.1.01.5T10Care and maintenance viii) Dial Testing
of: Indicator (D.T.I)
i) Measuring and ix) Inspection Instrument
inspection tools x) gauges
ii) Marking out tools and xi) Spirit level
equipment xii) DTI
xiii) Usage of the
Practice instruments
xiv)condition of the
12.1.01.5P0Specific Objectives instrument
By the end of the sub xv) handling
module unit, the trainee xvi)measurement
should be able to; 12.1.01.5P3Care and maintenance
a) select the appropriate of the instruments
measuring and i) handling
inspection instrument ii) cleaning and oiling
for a given job iii) storage
b) use the measuring and 12.1.01.5P4Selecting Equipment for
inspection tool marking out
correctly 12.1.01.5P5Demonstrate the proper
c) care and maintain the procedures when
instrument marking out
d) select the appropriate i) preparation of work
equipment for surface
marking out ii) setting up the work
e) demonstrate the iii) scribing of lines and
proper procedures arcs
when marking out iv) centre punching
f) care and maintain the v) caring and
marking out maintaining
equipment equipment
vi) handling
Content vii) cleaning and oiling
12.1.01.5P1Selection of measuring viii) storage
and inspection 12.1.01.5P6 Care and maintenance
instruments of the marking out tools
12.1.01.5P2Measuring instruments & equipment
i) Condition of construction of hand
instrument/tool tools
ii) Handling d) explain the correct
iii) Storage procedure for using
the hand tools
Suggested Teaching Methods e) explain the proper
i) discussion method of caring and
ii) demonstration maintaining the hand
iii) practical tools.
exercises/assignments
Competence
Suggested Learning Resources The trainee should have
i) measuring, inspection the ability to:
and marking out tools i) select appropriate tool
(see above) for a given task
ii) videos and slides ii) set and use tool
(overhead projector correctly
iii) charts
iv) software (power Content
point) 12.1.01.6T1Hand tools
i) chisel
Suggested Assessment Methods ii) taps and dies
i) practical tests on iii) reamers
measuring iv) scrapers
observations v) hacksaw
ii) continuous assessment vi) snips
tests (C.A.Ts) vii) files
iii) oral/written tests viii) pipe cutter
ix) hammers
12.1.01.6 HAND CUTTING x) mallets
AND FORMING xi) stakes
TOOLS xii) fullers
xiii) anvil
Theory xiv)swages
xv) swage clock
12.1.01.6T0 Specific Objectives xvi)flatters
By the end of the sub xvii) formers
module unit, the trainee 12.1.01.6T2Materials for hand tools
should be able to; as stated in hand tools
a) name hand tools and above
their specific parts 12.1.01.6T3Design features and
b) name the materials construction of the tools
from which the tools i) shape
are made ii) material
c) describe the design iii) purpose
features and
12.1.01.6T4Correct use of hand ii) correct posture
tools iii) correct tool handling
i) positioning of work iv) correct pressure and
piece strokes
ii) tool holding and v) reconditioning of tools
manipulation 12.1.01.6P3Safety
iii) posture i) personal safety
iv) pressure application ii) tools and equipment
v) Care and maintenance safety
of hand tools 12.1.01.6P4Care and maintenance
vi) tool selection i) handling
vii) handling ii) cleaning
viii) cleaning/conditioning iii) storage
ix) storage
Suggested Teaching Methods
Practice i) demonstration on;
ii) correct use of the tools
12.1.01.6P0Specific Objectives iii) sharpening of tools
By the end of the sub iv) illustrations on;
module unit, the trainee v) various hand tools
should be able to; vi) discussions
a) select the appropriate
tool for a given task Suggested Learning Resources
b) use the tool correctly i) realia (hand tools)
c) practice safe working ii) relevant reference
habits books
d) care and maintain the iii) charts
tools iv) overhead
projector/LCD
Content
12.1.01.6P1Selection of the tool for; Suggested Assessment Method
i) chipping i) quizzes/assignments
ii) tapping ii) practical project work
iii) reaming iii) examinations
iv) scraping
v) sawing 12.1.01.7 MACHINE TOOLS 1
vi) shearing
vii) filing Theory
viii) forming
ix) twisting 12.1.01.7T1Specific Objectives
x) flattering By the end of the sub
xi) punching module unit, the trainee
xii) bending should be able to;
12.1.01.6P2Usage of the tools a) name various types of
i) correct clamping of machines tools
work piece
b) name the various parts machine tools and
of machine tools and their accessories
their accessories ix) observe safety
c) explain the procedure precautions
of mounting the tool
and work correctly Content
d) explain the operations 12.1.01.7T1Types of machine tools
of machine tools i) Pedestal grinder and
correctly hand grinder
e) explain the functions ii) Power saw
of various tool angles iii) drilling machine
f) name various types of iv) centre lathe
cutting fluids and v) Shaping machine
lubricants vi) milling machine
g) explain the purpose of 12.1.01.7T2Parts and Accessories
using cutting fluids of machine tools
and lubricants (above)
h) explain the proper 12.1.01.7T3Work and Tool
methods of caring and Mounting
maintaining various i) tool setting
machine tools ii) work setting
i) state the safety 12.1.01.7T5Operation of Machine
precautions to be Tools
observed when using i) Power saw
a machine tool. - cutting
- Drilling machine
Competence - hole drilling and
The trainee should have reaming
the ability to: - Centre lathe
i) identify various types - Facing
of machine tools - Plain turning
ii) identify parts of - Drilling and
machine tools and boring
accessories - Taper turning
iii) mount tool and work - Knurling
correctly - Shaping
iv) operate machine tools machine
correctly - Plain
v) grind tool angles - Serrations
correctly - Angular cutting
vi) identify types of - Milling machine
cutting fluids - Plain milling
vii) apply correct cutting - Gang milling
fluids for a given task - Straddle milling
viii) carry out proper care ii) Grinding
and maintenance on
- Types of 12.1.01.7T6Types of Cutting Fluids
grinding and Lubricants
machines i) soluble oils
- pedestal ii) lubricants
- angle grinder iii) water
- Features of iv) Functions of Cutting
grinding Fluids
machines v) cooling of work and
- Pedestal tool
- motor casing vi) lubrication
- spindle vii) washing away swaps
- tool test 12.1.01.7T7Care and Maintenance
- wheel guard i) cleaning
- screen ii) oiling
- Angle grinder iii) reconditioning
- main body iv) storage
- switch 12.1.01.7T8Safety
- wheel spindle i) personal
- Features of ii) equipment/tool
grinding wheel
- Abrasive Practice
- natural
(sandstone, 12.1.01.7P0Specific Objectives
quartz, garnet) By the end of the sub
- artificial (SiC, module unit, the trainee
Al2O3, Boron should be able to;
carbide) a) identify various types
- Bonds (rubber, of machine tools
shellac, b) identify various parts
Ocychloride, of machine tools and
Resinod, their accessories
Vitrified) c) mount the tool and
- Structure work correctly
- Grit size d) operate various
- Grade machine tools
- Mounting, correctly
dressing and e) identify various types
truing of cutting fluids for a
- Safety given task
- personal safety f) carry out proper care
- equipment safety and maintenance of
- Tool angles various machine tools
- rake and their accessories
- clearance g) observe safety
- point angle precautions when
- relief angle
using various machine - care and
tools. maintenance of
machine tool
Content ii) Illustration on:
12.1.01.7P1Types of machine tools - machine tools
i) power saw - parts of machine
ii) drilling machine tools
iii) centre lathe - application of
iv) shaping machine coolants
v) milling machine - Discussion
vi) grinding
12.1.01.7P2Identification of Suggested Learning Resources
machine tool parts and i) realia (machine tools)
accessories ii) realia (cutting tools)
12.1.01.7P3Mounting of various iii) relevant reference
machine tools correctly books
12.1.01.7P4Operation of various iv) charts
machine tools v) overhead projector/lcd
12.1.01.7P5Cutting fluids and
lubricants Suggested Assessment Method
i) soluble oils i) quizzes/assignment
ii) lubricants ii) practical project work
iii) water iii) examination
iv) Application of cutting
fluids 12.1.01.8 CULTURE OF
v) ferrous metals MAINTENANCE
vi) non ferrous metals
vii) plastics Theory
viii) ceramics
12.1.01.7P6Care and maintenance 12.1.01.8T0Specific Objectives
i) oiling By the end of the sub
ii) cleaning module unit, the trainee
iii) reconditioning should be able to;
iv) storing a) explain the meaning
12.1.01.7P7Safety of culture of
i) personal maintenance
ii) equipment b) explain the need for
maintenance
Suggested Teaching Methods c) describe types of
i) Demonstration on: maintenance
- tool and work
mounting Competence
- operating various The trainee should have
machine tools the ability to:
- tool grinding
i) explain meaning of c) observe safety
culture of precautions during
maintenance maintenance
ii) illustrate need for d) costing maintenance
maintenance tasks
iii) discuss maintenance
procedures Content
iv) observe safety rules 12.1.01.8P1 Justifying need for
v) cost tasks maintenance
i) observing
Content ii) recording
12.1.01.8T1Explaining the culture iii) reporting
of maintenance iv) costing the tasks
12.1.01.8T2Explaining the need for 12.1.01.8P2Maintenance procedures
maintenance i) identification
i) restoring good ii) trouble shooting
working order analysis
ii) tools iii) operations
iii) materials implications
iv) equipment iv) cost implications
v) structure v) procurement of
vi) components components/parts
vii) maintaining health vi) actual maintenance
standards vii) testing
viii) avoiding 12.1.01.8P3Observe safety
deterioration or decay precautions
of the i) care for existing
components/materials/ undamaged parts or
tools/equipment components
12.1.01.8T3Types of maintenance ii) personal safety
i) routine maintenance iii) materials safety
ii) preventive iv) other operatives safety
maintenance v) tools and equipment
iii) planned maintenance safety
12.1.01.8P4Costing maintenance
Practice tasks
i) materials estimation
12.1.01.8P0Specific Objectives by:
By the end of the sub - calculation
module unit, the trainee - past
should be able to; experience/similar
a) justify need for tasks
maintenance - labour requirements
b) discuss maintenance and availability
procedure - types of labour
- skilled
- semi-skilled 12.1.01.9 METAL JOINING 1
- casual
- availability Theory
- skills assessment
- number of persons 12.1.01.9T0 Specific Objectives
required for the By the end of the sub
task(s) module unit, the trainee
- maintenance should be able to;
time/duration a) state various joining
ii) alternative methods
arrangement at time of b) list tools and
maintenances equipment for the
- cost implication joining methods in (a)
- convenience above
- costing works/tasks c) explain the proper
- materials cost procedure of making
- item cost joints
- transport cost d) state various defects
- cost of storage in joints
- storage safety e) state safety
- contingencies precautions to be
- labour cost observed when metal
- profit and over heads joining
Suggested Teaching Methods Competence

i) Illustration on: The trainee should have
ii) Need for maintenance the ability to:
iii) Maintenance i) make a mechanical
procedures joint
iv) Methods of working ii) make a soldered joint
safely iii) carry out gas welding
operation
Suggested Learning resources iv) carry out arc welding
i) materials that require operation
maintenance v) spot welding
ii) tools that require vi) identify defects
maintenance vii) care and maintenance
iii) Manuals of tools and
equipment
Suggested Assessment Method viii) demonstrate safe
i) Practical exercises on: working habit in
ii) Identifying tools that respect of personal
require maintenance and equipment safety
iii) Maintaining tools
iv) Costing tasks that Content
require maintenance 12.1.01.9T1Joining methods
i) Mechanical iii) studs and screws
ii) bolts, nuts, studs and iv) rivets
screws v) keys
iii) locking devices for vi) pins
nuts vii) Thermal
iv) bevel and taper pins 12.1.01.9P2Performing a given task
v) rivets and keys i) prepare work piece
vi) Thermal ii) select suitable tools
vii) Soldering (soft and and equipment
hard) iii) make joints using
viii) Gas welding right methods
ix) Arc welding iv) inspecting and testing
x) Spot welding the joint
12.1.01.9T2Tools and equipment 12.1.01.9P3Identify defects
for processes above i) Care and maintenance
12.1.01.9T3Joint preparations of tools
12.1.01.9T4Joint defects ii) cleaning
12.1.01.9T5Safety iii) handling
i) Personal safety iv) storing
ii) Equipment safety 12.1.01.9P4Safety
i) personal safety
Practice ii) equipment safety
12.1.01.9P0Specific Objectives Suggested Teaching Methods

By the end of this sub- i) discussions
module unit, the trainee ii) illustrations
should be able to; iii) demonstrations
a) select appropriate
joining method for a Suggested Learning Resources
given job i) supply of various
b) perform a given mechanical fasteners
joining task using ii) gas welding
suitable tools and equipment
equipment iii) soldering equipment
c) identify defects in iv) arc welding
metal joints equipment
d) demonstrate safe v) spot welding
working habit when equipment
performing metal
joining tasks. Suggested Assessment Method
i) C.A.Ts
Content ii) practical exercises
12.1.01.9P1Selection of joining iii) oral/written tests
method iv) project work
i) Mechanical
ii) bolts and nuts
12.1.01.10 HEAT TREATMENT Content
12.1.01.10T1Term heat treatment
Theory 12.1.01.10T2 Heat treatment
effects
12.1.01.10T0Specific Objectives i) re-structure
By the end of the sub ii) refining of grains
module unit, the trainee 12.1.01.10T3Heat treatment process
should be able to; i) hardening
a) explain the term heat ii) tempering
treatment iii) annealing
b) describe effects of iv) normalizing
heat treatment on v) case hardening
metals 12.1.01.10T4Purpose of heat
c) explain types of heat treatment
treatment processes i) hardening
d) explain the purpose of ii) toughening
heat treatment iii) softening
processes iv) relieving internal
e) state heat treatment stress
processes appropriate v) Heat treatment of
for a given metal specific metals
f) explain types of vi) Carbon steels
cooling media vii) Aluminium and its
g) describe a given alloys
equipment used for viii) Copper and its alloys
heat treatment process 12.1.01.10T5Cooling media
h) explain safety i) air
precautions during ii) water
heat treatment process iii) brine
iv) acids
Competence v) sand
The trainee should have vi) ash
the ability to: 12.1.01.10T6Heat treatment
i) select appropriate heat equipment
treatment equipment i) furnaces
and cooling media for ii) gas flames
a given task iii) forge
ii) perform heat iv) temperature
treatment processes measuring equipment
iii) perform tests on heat 12.1.01.10T7Safety
treated work pieces i) personal safety
iv) demonstrate safety ii) equipment safety
when handling heat
treatment processes
Practice ii) setting up the
equipment
12.1.01.10P0Specific Objectives iii) correct heating
By the end of the sub iv) correct cooling
module unit, the trainee 12.1.01.10P3Workshop test
should be able to: i) filing
a) select the appropriate ii) impact test
heat treatment 12.1.01.10P4Care and maintenance
equipment and i) handling
cooling media for a ii) usage
given task iii) storage
b) perform a heat 12.1.01.10P5Safety
treatment process i) personal safety
c) perform workshop test ii) equipment safety
on heat treated work
piece Suggested Teaching Methods
d) care and maintain heat i) demonstrations on
treatment equipment heat treatment
e) practice safety during processes
heat treatment ii) illustrations
processes iii) discussions
iv) notes taking
Content
12.1.01.10P1Heat treatment Suggested Learning Resources
equipment and cooling i) heat treatment
media for the following furnaces
tasks ii) temperature
i) hardening measuring equipment
ii) heating temperature iii) cooling tanks and
iii) cooling media medias
iv) Tempering iv) realia
v) meeting temperature v) charts
vi) cooling media vi) overhead
vii) Annealing projectors/LCD
viii) heating temperature vii) relevant text books
ix) cooling media
x) Normalising Suggested Assessment Methods
xi) heating temperature i) practical exercises
xii) cooling media ii) quizzes
xiii) Case hardening iii) C.A.Ts
xiv)heating temperature iv) oral/written tests
xv) cooling media
12.1.01.10P2Heat treatment
processes
i) preparing the work-
piece
12.1.01.11 FINISHING v) Coating
PROCESSES vi) Varnishing
12.1.01.11T2Procedures in
Theory finishing
i) preparation
12.1.01.11T1Specific Objectives ii) treatment
By the end of the sub iii) storage
module unit, the trainee 12.1.01.11T3Care and maintenance
should be able to; i) cleaning
a) name types of ii) oiling and greasing
finishing processes iii) contamination
b) explain proper (coating processes)
procedure in finishing 12.1.01.11T4Safety
processes in (a) above i) personal safety
c) explain methods of ii) equipment safety
caring and
maintaining tools and Practice
equipment in finishing 12.1.01.11P1Specific Objectives
processes By the end of the sub
d) state safety module unit, the trainee
precautions to be should be able to;
observed in finishing a) select a finishing
processes. process for a given
task
Competence b) carry out a given
The trainee should have finishing process
the ability to: correctly
i) select a suitable c) care and maintain
finishing process for a tools and equipment
given task used for finishing
ii) carry out a finishing process
process correctly d) demonstrate safe
iii) service and maintain working habit when
finishing processes carrying out a
equipment finishing process
iv) work safely with
finishing processes Content
equipment 12.1.01.11P1Selection of a finish
process
Content i) bluing
12.1.01.11T1Types of finishing ii) lacquering
processes iii) blackening
i) Bluing iv) polishing
ii) Lacquering v) coating
iii) Blackening vi) varnishing
iv) Polishing
12.1.01.11P2Carrying out a given Competence
finishing process The trainee should have
correctly the ability to:
12.1.01.11P3Care and maintenance i) select suitable type of
of finishing processes fit for a given job
equipment ii) produce a project to a
12.1.01.11P4Safety given fit
i) personal safety
ii) equipment safety Content
12.1.01.12T1Definition of fits
Suggested Teaching Methods i) interference
i) discussion/lecture ii) clearance
notes iii) transition
ii) demonstrations 12.1.01.12T2Use of fits
iii) videos, films i) driving fit
ii) shrinking
Suggested Learning Resources i) running fit
i) textbook ii) force fit
ii) specimen 12.1.01.12T3Definition of common
iii) finishing processes terms
equipments i) tolerances
ii) upper limit
Suggested Assessment Methods iii) lower limit
i) written tests iv) allowance
ii) practical tests 12.1.01.12T4Types of tolerances
i) unilateral
12.1.01.12 LIMITS AND FITS ii) bilateral
iii) Calculation of
Theory clearances and
interferences
12.1.01.12T0Specific Objectives
By the end of the sub Practice
should be able to; 12.1.01.12P0Specific Objectives
a) define various types By the end of the sub
of fits module unit, the trainee
b) explain various uses should be able to;
of fits a) select suitable type of
c) define common terms fit for a given job
used in limits and fits b) produce a project to
systems given limits
d) explain types of
tolerances Content
12.1.01.12P1Selection of suitable
type of fit
- Machining to given metal forming
limits processes
Suggested Teaching Methods Competence

i) lecture/discussion The trainee should have
ii) demonstrations the ability to:
iii) illustrations i) select appropriate
iv) videos sheet metal tools for a
given job
Suggested Learning Resources ii) produce various sheet
i) textbooks metal articles using a
ii) specimens given sheet forming
iii) charts process
iv) measuring tools iii) care for and maintain
sheet metal tools and
Suggested Assessment Methods equipment
i) practical exercises iv) observe safety when
ii) written tests performing any sheet
metal forming
processes.
12.1.01.13 SHEET METAL
WORK Content
12.1.01.13T1Sheet metal tools
Theory i) snips
ii) stakes
12.1.01.13T1Specific Objectives iii) mallets
By the end of the sub iv) folding bars
module unit, the trainee v) anvil
should be able to; vi) grooving sets
a) explain the correct use vii) pliers
of given sheet metal viii) hammers
tools ix) punches
b) differentiate various x) chisels
materials used in sheet xi) Uses of the above
metal work tools
c) state the uses of 12.1.01.13T2Sheet metal materials
various sheet metal i) tinplate
materials ii) galvanized sheet
d) explain various sheet iii) mild steel
metal forming iv) aluminium
processes v) stainless steel
e) explain safety 12.1.01.13T3Uses of sheet metal
precautions to be materials
observed when 12.1.01.13T4Sheet metal forming
carrying out sheet processes
i) raising
ii) hollowing - raising
iii) drawing - beading
iv) beading - drawing
v) punching - punching
vi) grooving - grooving
vii) knocked-up seam - knocked up seam
12.1.01.13T5Safety ii) finishing
i) personal safety - quality control
ii) equipment safety - costing
12.1.01.13P3Safety
Practice i) personal safety
ii) equipment safety
12.1.01.1301Specific Objectives
By the end of the sub Suggested Teaching Methods
module unit, the trainee i) demonstrations on
should be able to; various sheet metal
a) select appropriate forming processes
sheet metal tools for a ii) illustrations
given job iii) notes taking
b) produce various sheet
metal articles using a Suggested Learning Resources
given sheet metal i) realia
forming process ii) charts/diagrams
c) demonstrate safe iii) relevant text books
working habits when
using sheet metal Suggested Assessment Methods
tools and materials i) practical exercises
ii) assignments
Content iii) observations
12.1.01.13P1Selecting sheet metal iv) written exams
tools
i) snips 12.1.01.14 METAL JOINING
ii) stakes PROCESSES 11
iii) mallets
iv) folding bars Theory
v) anvil
vi) grooving sets 12.1.01.14T1 Specific Objectives
vii) pliers By the end of the sub
viii) hammers module unit, the trainee
ix) punches should be able to;
x) chisels a) explain the principle
12.1.01.13P2Production of Sheet of gas welding
metal articles process
i) Application of various
b) name various gas
skills
- hollowing welding joints
c) explain gas welding 12.1.01.14T4Gas cutting
techniques accessories
d) name gas cutting i) cutting nozzle
accessories ii) gas cutting guides
e) explain the principle iii) gas cutting trammel
of gas cutting 12.1.01.14T5Gas cutting (principle)
i) pre-heating
f) explain the principle
ii) cutting stream
of arc welding process
(oxygen)
g) name various arc
iii) speed of travel
welding joints
iv) selection of nozzle
h) explain the arc
12.1.01.14T6Principle of arc
welding of a given
welding process
metal 12.1.01.14T7Arc welding joints
i) name equipment and i) butt
tools for MIG and ii) fillet
TIG welding process iii) corner
j) explain the principles iv) lap
of MIG and TIG v) edge
welding processes 12.1.01.14T8Arc welding of a given
k) explain various metal
adhesives used for i) mild steel
joining ii) cast iron
l) observe safety 12.1.01.14T9MIG and TIG welding
precautions for a equipment
given type of welding i) inert gas cylinders
process ii) filler wire/electrode
iii) MIG welder and
Content accessories
12.1.01.14T1Principle of gas iv) TIG welder and
welding accessories
12.1.01.14T2 Gas welding joints 12.1.01.14T10Principles of MIG
i) butt and TIG welding
ii) lap processes
iii) corner 12.1.01.14T11Adhesives for joining
iv) fillet 12.1.01.14T12Safety precautions
v) edge for a given welding
process
12.1.01.14T3 Gas welding
i) personal (operator)
techniques
i) leftward ii) equipment
ii) rightward
Practice
iii) positional welding
performing welding
12.1.01.14P0Specific Objectives process
should be able to; 12.1.01.14P1Gas welding
a) carry out gas welding operations
operations i) flame setting
b) execute a given gas ii) selection of nozzle
welding joint using iii) filler metal
correct welding iv) parent metal
techniques v) leftward welding
c) execute gas cutting technique
operations for a given vi) rightward welding
metal techniques
d) carry out arc welding vii) positional welding
operations for a given viii) overhead
metal ix) vertical up/down
e) perform MIG and TIG x) horizontal
welding operations 12.1.01.14P2Welding joints using:
f) practice safety when i) Butt
performing a given ii) Lap
type of welding iii) Corner
process iv) filler
12.1.01.14P3Gas cutting operation
Competence i) flame setting
The trainee should have ii) nozzle selection
the ability to: iii) pre-heating
i) carry out gas welding
12.1.01.14P4Arc welding operation
operations using i) selection of electrode
welding technique ii) current setting
ii) execute a given iii) electrode angle
welding joint iv) speed of travel
iii) execute gas cutting v) flat
operation for a given vi) positional welding
metal 12.1.01.14P5MIG and TIG welding
iv) carry out arc welding operation
operation i) type of inert gas
v) perform MIG and TIG ii) filler wire
welding operation iii) base metal
vi) practice safe working iv) speed control
habits when 12.1.01.14P6 Safety precautions
i) personal safety iii) relevant textbooks
ii) equipment safety iv) overhead
projector/laser
Suggested Teaching Methods compact disc (LCD)
i) demonstrations v) transparencies
ii) illustrations
iii) discussions Suggested Assessment Methods
iv) industrial visits i) C.A.Ts
ii) quizzes
Suggested Learning Resources iii) oral questions
i) charts iv) assignments
ii) realia v) Practical exercises
12.1.0 VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY
This module unit designed to equip the trainees with knowledge,
skills and attitudes to acquire Competence in routine vehicle
service. After completing this module, the trainee is capable of
working in a garage or service station. It targets persons who are
interested in gaining basic mechanics skills. The module forms a
basis for all other modules to be covered in the course.

By the end of this module unit, is the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the layout and functions of the main vehicle
components
b) understand the sealing and locking methods to seal and lock
motor vehicle components efficiently
c) carry out routine maintenance on motor vehicles
d) understand the working principle of combustion in spark and
compression ignition engines
e) understand workshop /garage layout and operations procedures
f) determine the cost of a vehicle service.
Vehicle Technology
Code Sub Content Time Hrs
Module T P Total
Unit
12.1.1 Safety  Safety rules
 First aid
 Fire classes
 Fire extinguishers:
 Flammable gases and 6 12 18
materials
 Safe working procedures.
 Factories and workplaces
Act
12.1.2 Vehicle  The major units
Layout  Layouts
 Types of vehicle drives 14 26 40
 Engine positions
 Types of chassis
12.1.3 Transmissio  Types of gear
n System construction
 Types of gearboxes
 Construction and
operation of various
types of vehicle
gearboxes
 Gearbox lubricants
 Types of clutch pressure
plates
 Types of clutch discs
 Types of clutches
operation of various
types of clutches
 Clutch actuating
mechanisms
14 26 40
 Types of final drives
operation of final drive
units
operation of the
differential unit
operation of rear axle
 Types of drive shafts
operation of drive shafts
 Types of constant
velocity (c.v)joints
operation of constant
velocity joints
12.1.4 Wheels and  Function of wheels.
Tyres  Types of wheels and
tyres.
 Types of rims
10 20 30
 Tread patterns
 Tyre pressures
 Wheel balancing
 Tyre and tube repairs
12.1.5 Steering  Function of a steering
System system
operation of conventional
steering system 8 18 26
 Steering system layouts
 Steering gearboxes
 Power assisted steering
 Power steering
12.1.6 Suspension  Types of suspension
system systems
 Types of suspension
units 14 16 30
 Air suspension
 Hydraulic suspension
 Rubber suspension
12.1.7 Braking  Layout of the braking
System system
 Types of brakes
 Brake actuating
mechanisms
 Power brakes
 Auxiliary brakes 14 26 40
 Types and properties of
brake fluids
 Anti – lock braking
system (ABS)
 Anti-jacknifing
mechanism
12.1.8 Driving  Model town board
 Road signs 16 24 40
 First aid
Total Time 96 168 264
12.1.1 SAFETY 12.1.1T5 Flammable gases and
materials
Theory 12.1.1T6 Safe working
procedures
12.1.1T0 Specific Objectives 12.1.1T7 Factories and
By the end of the sub workplaces Act.
should be able to: Practice
a) observe safety rules
b) apply first aid 12.1.1P0 Specific Objectives
techniques; By the end of the sub
c) categorize classes of module unit, the trainee
fire; should be able to:
d) use different types of a) practice safety rules
fire extinguishers and regulations in
e) differentiate the auto workshop
flammable materials b) perform first aid
and gases; and first aid
f) observe safe working techniques
procedures in the c) classify different
workshop; types of fires
g) employ the factories d) extinguish
and work places Act in different classes of
relation to workshop. fire using
appropriate fire
12.1.1C Competence extinguishers
the ability to: Content
i) Perform first aid drill 12.1.1P1 Safety rules and
ii) Perform fire fighting regulations
drill 12.1.1P2 First aid and first aid
techniques
Content i) Shock
12.1.1T1 Safety rules ii) Burns
12.1.1T2 First aid iii) Cut and wounds
12.1.1T3 Fire classes iv) Fractures
i) Class A,B,C,D and 12.1.1P3 Classes of fire
E i) Class A
12.1.1T4 Fire extinguishers: ii) Class B
i) water iii) Class C
ii) carbon dioxide iv) Class D
iii) foam v) Class E
iv) fire blankets 12.1.1P4 Fire extinguishers
v) sand i) Carbon dioxide
vi) powder ii) Foam
iii) Water iv) Braking
iv) Fire blankets v) Steering
v) Sand vi) Electrical system
i) Body
Suggested Learning Resources 12.1.2T2 Layouts
i) Workshop safety i) Conventional
equipment ii) Alternative layout
ii) Manuals 12.1.2T3 Types of vehicle drives
iii) Journals i) Rear wheel
iv) Charts ii) Front wheel
iii) Four wheel
12.1.2 VEHICLE LAYOUT iv) Six wheel
12.1.2T4 Engine positions
Theory i) Front engine
ii) Central engine
12.1.2T0 Specific Objectives iii) Rear engine
By the end of the sub 12.1.2T5 Types of chassis
module unit, the trainee i) Separate
should be able to: ii) Integral
a) describe the function of
the major vehicle Practice
components
b) describe types of 12.1.2P0 Specific Objectives
vehicle layouts. By the end of the sub
c) describe types of module unit, the trainee
vehicle drives. should be able to:
d) describe types of a) locate various types
engine positions. of vehicle units
e) differentiate types of b) design and
vehicle and body construct a vehicle
chassis chassis
12.1.2C Competence Content

The trainee should have 12.1.2P1 Vehicle units
the ability to: i) engine
i) locate various vehicle ii) transmission
parts iii) brakes
ii) design and construct iv) suspension
the vehicle chassis v) steering
vi) auxiliary
Content vii) chassis
12.1.2T1 The major components 12.1.2P2 Design project
i) Engine i) Vehicle chassis
ii) Transmission
iii) Suspension
i) Charts i) describe the
ii) Journals construction and
iii) Vehicle units operation of various
iv) Models types of clutch
v) Text books actuating mechanisms;
vi) Hand tools j) name the types of final
vii) Equipments drive units;
viii) Materials k) describe the
construction and
12.1.3 TRANSMISSION operation of final drive
SYSTEM units;
l) describe the
Theory construction and
operation of the
12.1.3T0 Specific Objectives differential unit;
m) describe the
construction and
should be able to:
operation of the rear
a) name the various types axle
of gear construction;
n) name various types of
b) name the various types drive shafts;
of gearboxes;
o) describe the
c) describe the construction and
construction and operation of various
operation of various types of drive shafts;
types of vehicle gear
p) name various types of
boxes;
constant velocity
d) describe the various (c.v)joints;
types and properties of
q) describe the
gearbox lubricants;
construction and
e) describe the operation of various
construction and types of c.v. joints;
operation of clutch
pressure plates; Content
f) describe the 12.1.3T1 Types of gear
construction and construction
operation of clutch i) Straight bevel
discs; ii) Spur
g) name the various types iii) Helical
of clutches iv) Hypoid
h) describe the v) Spiral bevel
construction and vi) Worm
operation of various 12.1.3T2 Types of vehicle
types of clutches; gearboxes
i) Manual
ii) Splitter ii) diaphragm spring
iii) Twin layshaft iii) multi-plate
iv) Constant mesh iv) semi-centrifugal
v) Synchromesh v) centrifugal
vi) Semi automatic 12.1.3T9 Clutch actuating
vii) Automatic mechanisms
viii) Continuously i) mechanical
variable ii) hydraulic
transmission 12.1.3T10 Types of final drive units
(CVT) i) crown wheel and
12.1.3T3 Construction and pinion
operation of various ii) worm and worm
types of vehicle wheel
gearboxes 12.1.3T11 Construction and
i) Manual operation of final drive
ii) Splitter units
iii) Twin layshaft i) crown wheel and
iv) Constant mesh pinion
v) Synchromesh ii) worm and worm
vi) Semi automatic wheel
vii) Automatic 12.1.3T12 Construction and
viii) Continuously operation of the
variable differential unit
transmission i) Planet wheel
(CVT) ii) Sun wheel
12.1.3T4 Types and properties of iii) Cross pin/spider
gearbox lubricants shaft
12.1.3T5 Construction and iv) Differential lock
operation of clutch v) Limited slip
pressure plate differential
i) Multi-coil (mechanical, viscous)
ii) diaphragm vi) Two – speed
12.1.3T6 Construction and differential
operation of clutch disc 12.1.3T13 Construction and
i) flexible hub operation of rear axle
ii) rigid hub i) Dead and live axle
12.1.3T7 Types of clutches ii) Axle casing (split,
i) coil spring banjo)
ii) diaphragm spring iii) Axle shafts
iii) multi-plate iv) Semi floating
iv) semi-centrifugal v) ¾ floating
v) centrifugal vi) Fully floating
12.1.3T8 Construction and vii) Drive shafts
operation of various viii) Double
types of clutches reduction drives
i) coil spring 12.1.3T14 Types of drive shafts
i) Front-wheel g) Service various types
ii) Rear-wheel of clutch actuating
iii) Rear axle propeller mechanisms
shafts h) Service final drive
12.1.3T15 Construction and units
operation of drive i) Service the differential
shafts unit
i) Drive shafts j) Service the rear axle
ii) Half shafts
k) Service various types
12.1.3T16 Types of constant
of drive shafts
velocity joints
i) Double Hooke’s
l) Service various types
of c.v. joints
ii) Rzeppa
iii) Weisss
Content
iv) Tracta
12.1.3P1 Identify various types of
v) Tripot
gears
12.1.3T17 Construction and
operation of various i) Straight bevel
types of constant ii) Spur
velocity joints iii) Helical
i) Double Hooke’s iv) Hypoid
ii) Rzeppa v) Spiral bevel
iii) Weisss vi) Worm
iv) Tracta 12.1.3P2 Service gearboxes
v) Tripot i) Manual gearbox
ii) Constant mesh
Practice iii) Synchromesh
iv) Semi automatic
12.1.3P0 Specific Objectives gearbox
By the end of the sub v) Automatic gearbox
module unit, the trainee vi) continuously variable
should be able to: transmission (CVT)
a) Identify various types 12.1.3P3 Identify and use
of gears gearbox lubricants
b) service various types of 12.1.3P4 Service clutch pressure
gearboxes plates
c) Identify and be able to i) multi-coil
use gearbox lubricants ii) diaphragm
d) service clutch pressure 12.1.3P5 Service clutch discs
plates i) flexible hub
e) Service clutch discs ii) rigid hub
12.1.3P6 Service different types
f) Service various types
of clutches
of clutches
i) coil spring
ii) diaphragm spring
iii) multi-plate
iv) semi-centrifugal Suggested Learning Resources
v) centrifugal - Models
12.1.3P7 Service different types - Transmission System
of clutch actuating Unit
mechanisms - Complete vehicle
i) mechanical fitted with final drive
ii) hydraulic differential and rear
12.1.3P8 Service different types axle
of final drive units - Assorted clutches
i) crown wheel and - Assorted gearboxes
pinion - Rear axles
ii) worm and worm - Constants velocity
wheel joints
12.1.3P9 Service differential unit - Drive shafts
i) Planet wheel - Tools
ii) Sun wheel - Equipment
iii) Cross pin/spider - Job Cards
shaft - Journals
iv) Differential lock - Manuals
v) Limited slip - Charts
differential
(mechanical, viscous) 12.1.4 WHEELS AND TYRES
vi) Two – speed
differential Theory
12.1.3P10 Service the rear axle
Dead and live axle 12.1.4T0 Specific Objectives
i) Axle casing (split, By the end of the sub
banjo) module unit, the trainee
ii) Axle shafts should be able to:
iii) Semi floating a) describe the purpose of
iv) ¾ floating wheels in the vehicle
v) Fully floating b) identify different types
vi) Drive shafts of wheels and tyres
vii) Double reduction c) describe different types
drives of rims
12.1.3P11 Service drive shafts d) describe the different
i) Drive shafts types of tread patterns
ii) Half shafts made on a tyre
12.1.3P12 Service constant
e) explain the importance
velocity joints
of tyre inflation
i) Double Hooke’s
pressures
ii) Rzeppa
iii) Weisss
f) describe the
importance of tyre
iv) Tracta
rotation
v) Tripot
12.1.4C Competence d) select suitable tyre
The trainee should have the tread patterns for given
ability to: vehicles and road
i) repair tubes, valves and conditions
tyres
ii) practice wheel balancing Content
using the correct 12.1.4P1 Types of rims and tyres
machines and procedures i) Tyres
iii) use and recommend ii) Tubes
suitable tyres for various iii) Valves
types of vehicles and iv) Rims
road conditions 12.1.4P2 Repair and service wheels
i) Wheel balancing
Content ii) Select tread patterns
12.1.4T1 Function of wheels. 12.1.4P3 Wheel balancing
12.1.4T2 Types of tyres. 12.1.4P4 Selection of tyre tread
i) Tubeless patterns for various road
ii) Tube type types
iii) Cross ply
iv) Radial ply Suggested Learning Resources
12.1.4T3 Wheel rims i) Wheels
i) Well type ii) LCD
ii) Three piece iii) Practical work
iii) Spooked iv) Tyres
12.1.4T4 Treads patterns v) Tools
i) Aquaplaning vi) Equipment
12.1.4T5 Inflation pressures vii) Manuals
ii) Under inflation viii) Charts
iii) Over inflation ix) Job cards
iv) Pressure gauges x) Journals
v) Pressure valves
12.1.4T6 Importance of tyre
rotation
Practice 12.1.6 STEERING SYSTEM
12.1.5P0 Specific Objectives Theory

module unit, the trainee 12.1.6T0 Specific objective
should be able to: By the end of the sub
a) identify types of rims module unit, the trainee
and tyres should be able to:
b) repair tubes and valves a) Explain the function of
c) carry out wheel a steering system
balancing b) Describe the
construction and
operation of ix) rack and pinion
conventional steering 12.1.6T5 Power assisted steering
system system
c) describe the various i) construction
steering system layouts ii) operation
d) describe the 12.1.6T6 Power steering
construction and i) construction
operation of different ii) operation
types of steering
gearboxes Practice
e) describe the
construction and 12.1.6P0 Specific objective
operation power By the end of the sub
assisted steering module unit, the trainee
f) describe the should be able to:
construction and a) Identify different types
operation power of steering systems
steering layouts
b) Diagnose, service and
12.1.6C Competence replace different types
The trainee should have the of steering gearboxes
ability to: c) Diagnose, service and
Diagnose steering system replace different types
faults of steering systems
Carry out service and repair
on different types of Content
steering system 12.1.6P1 Types of steering system
layouts
Content i) conventional
12.1.6T1 Function of a vehicle ii) twin-axle
steering system 12.1.6P2 Diagnosis and servicing of
12.1.6T2 Conventional steering different types steering
system gearboxes
i) construction i) worm and wheel
ii) operation ii) worm and sector
12.1.6T3 Steering system layouts iii) worm and nut
i) conventional iv) worm and roller
ii) twin-axle v) recirculating
12.1.6T4 Steering gearboxes vi) worm and
iii) worm and wheel vii) rack and pinion
iv) worm and sector 12.1.6P2 Diagnose, service and
v) worm and nut replace different types of
vi) worm and roller steering systems
vii) recirculating i) conventional
viii) worm and ii) power assisted
 Leakages
 Over steering operation of different
 Under steering types of suspension
iii) Power units
 identify e) Describe the
components of a construction and
four wheel steering operation of air
system suspension
f) Describe the
Suggested Learning Resources construction and
i) Vehicle fitted with operation of hydraulic
manual steering system suspension
ii) Manuals g) Describe the
iii) Workshop tools and construction and
equipment operation of rubber
iv) Manuals suspension
v) Vehicle fitted with
power assisted steering 12.1.9C Competence
system The trainee should have the
vi) Vehicle fitted with ability to service, repair and
power steering system replace
i) Different types of
suspension systems
ii) Different types of
suspension units, air
suspension, hydraulic
suspension and rubber
suspension
12.1.9 SUSPENSION SYSTEM Content
12.1.9T1 Types of suspension
Theory i) Macpherson strut
ii) Wishbone
12.1.9T0 Specific Objectives iii) Construction
By the end of the sub- iv) operation
module unit, the trainee 12.1.9T2 Suspension units
should be able to: i) springs
a) Name different types of - Leaf springs
suspension system - Coil springs
b) describe the - Rubber springs
construction and ii) arms
operation of different iii) dampers
types of suspensions
c) Name different types of 12.1.9T3 Air suspension
suspension units i) Hydra gas
d) Describe the ii) Hydro pneumatic
construction and 12.1.9T4 Hydraulic suspension
12.1.9T5 Rubber suspension v) Rubber suspension
i) Hydrolastic - Hydrolastic
vi) Leakage
Practice vii) Noise
viii) Body damage
12.1.9P0 Specific objectives ix) Wear on tyres
By the end of the module
unit, the trainee should be Suggested Learning Resources
able to: i) Vehicles fitted with
a) Identify different types Macpherson strut and
of suspension systems wishbone suspensions,
b) Service, repair and sir suspension, rubber
replace different types suspension and
of suspension hydraulic suspension
c) Identify different types ii) Various types of
of suspension units suspension units
d) Service, repair and iii) Charts
replace different types iv) Workshop manual
of suspension units v) Workshop tools and
equipment
e) Service, repair and
replace air suspension
f) Service, repair and
replace hydraulic
suspension
12.1.13 BRAKING SYSTEMS
g) Service, repair and
replace rubber Theory
suspension
12.1.13T0 Specific objectives
Content By the end of the sub-
12.1.9P1 Identify types of module unit, the
suspension systems trainee should be able
i) Macpherson strut to:
ii) Wishbone
a) describe the layout
12.1.9P2 Service, repair and
of a vehicle braking
replace different types of
system
suspension systems
i) Macpherson strut
b) describe the
construction and
ii) Wishbone
operation of
12.1.9P3 Service, repair and replace
different types of
different types of
brakes
suspension
iii) Air suspension c) describe the
- Hydra gas construction and
- Hydro pneumatic operation of brake
iv) Hydraulic suspension
actuating
mechanisms Content
d) describe the 12.1.13. T1 Layout of the braking
construction and system
operation of 12.1.13T2 Types of brakes
auxiliary brakes i) drum
e) name types and ii) disc
properties of brake iii) hand brake
fluids 12.1.13T3 Brake actuating
f) explain the mechanisms
construction and i) mechanical
operation of anti – ii) hydraulic
lock braking (ABS) iii) pneumatic
system iv) air
g) describe the 12.1.13T3 Construction and
construction and operation of auxiliary
operation of brakes
different types of i) Exhaust brakes
anti-jacknifing ii) Eddy currents
mechanisms iii) Hydraulic retarders
12.1.13T4 Power brakes
i) Vacuum assistance
ii) Vacuum assisted
servo units
- Indirect
12.1.13C Competence acting servos
The trainee should have - Direct acting
the ability to: servos
i) Identify layout of the iii) Hydraulic servo
braking systems system
ii) Service different types - Hydraulic
of brakes assistance
iii) Service and maintain - Continuous
different brake flow system
actuating mechanisms with
iv) carryout brake accumulator
adjustments - Air operated
v) bleed hydraulic brakes power brakes
vi) service and maintain - Air/hydraulic
auxiliary braking system
systems - Truck three-
vii) service the ABS line brake
braking system system
viii) service anti- - Truck two-line
jacknifing mechanisms brake system
12.1.13T5 Auxilliary braking 12.1.13P0 Specific Objectives
system By the end of the sub-
i) Single cylinder module unit, the trainee
ii) Tandem (dual) should be able to:
cylinder a) identify the layout of
12.1.13T6 Brake fluid the vehicle braking
i) Types system
ii) Properties b) service different types
12.1.13T7 Anti-lock braking of brakes
system c) service different types
i) Anti-lock braking of brakes
system d) service and maintain
ii) requirements auxiliary braking
iii) Types of ABS systems
- electronic e) service the ABS
- mechanical
braking system
iv) Operating
f) service anti-jacknifing
principles of ABS
mechanisms
v) Operation of
intrusive electronic
ABS
- Wheel speed
Content
sensors
12.1.13P1 Layout of braking
- Electronic
systems
control unit
i) mechanical brakes
- Modulator
ii) hydraulic brakes
assembly
12.1.13P2 Service different types of
- Layout of
brakes
intrusive ABS
i) drum
vi) Traction control
- Lining the brake
system
shoes
- Brake
- Adjustment of
application
brakes
- Torque control
- Bleeding of
(reducing
hydraulic brakes
engine power)
ii) Disc brakes
vii) Operation of
- Identify parts of
electronic brake
the disc brakes
pressure
- Service the disc
apportioning
brake parts
viii) Operation of
- Changing of disc
electronic vehicle
pads
stability control
- Changing a worn
out disc
Practice
- Replacement of ii) Vehicle with braking
rubber boots system
- Bleeding the iii) Hydraulic fluid
hydraulic system iv) Clear pipe
iii) Handbrake service v) Clear bottle
- Servicing the vi) Brake linings
handbrakes vii) Brake pads
- Adjustment of the viii) Brake replacement
handbrake parts
12.1.13P4 Service and ix) Master cylinders
maintenance of brake x) Wheel cylinders
actuating mechanism xi) Testing equipment
i) mechanical xii) Speed wheel
ii) hydraulic sensors
- Service the xiii) Vehicle air
master cylinder operated brakes
- Service the wheel xiv) Servo units
cylinders xv) Vehicle with ABS
- bleeding xvi) Vehicle with
12.1.13P5 Service and auxiliary brakes
maintenance of power
brakes
i) Identify servo units
- Direct
- Indirect
ii) Vacuum assisted 12.1.19 DRIVING
brakes
- Service 12.1.19T0 Specific Objectives
- Maintenance By the end of the sub
- Testing of brakes module unit, the
iii) Hydraulic servo trainees should be able
system to:
- Service a) demonstration
- Maintenance appropriate driving
- Testing of brakes skills this model
12.1.13P6 Identify different types town board
of auxiliary brakes b) enterprise roads
i) Exhaust brakes signs used in
ii) Eddy currents Kenyan roads
iii) Hydraulic retarders c) administer first aid
12.1.13P7 Service auxiliary brakes to injuries in the
12.1.13P8 Service the anti-lock event of an accident
braking system
Content
Suggested Learning Resources 12.1.19T1 Model town board
i) Hand tools i) Central island
ii) Round about The trainee should have
iii) Lane drill the ability to:
iv) Parking i) Carry out routine
v) Highway code checks.
12.1.19T2 Road signs ii) Read and interpret
i) Regulatory road signs.
ii) Hazard information iii) Interpret highway
iii) Facility codes.
12.1.19T3 First aid iv) Start and drive a
i) Burns motor vehicle which
ii) Cuts observing all the
iii) Blisters regulations.
v) Drive safely on
Practice Kenyan roads
vi) Give first aids to an
12.1.19P0 Specific Objectives injured passenger and
By the end of the sub- self
module unit, the
trainees should be able
to:
a) take off from rest
and move to other
gears
b) reverse a vehicle
c) park a vehicle
d) maintain the
correct lane while
driving
Content
12.1.19P1 Driving from rest
- Gear 1,2,3,4,and
5; hill start
12.1.19P1 Reversing
- 3 point turn
12.1.19P2 Use of driving mirror
12.1.19P3 Parking
i) Angle parking
ii) Flush parking
12.1.19P4 Lane drill
i) Lanes
ii) Roundabout
iii) Junctions
Competence
i) Model board
ii) Highway code
iii) Vehicle
iv) Road signs
v) Model cars
ENGINEERING
MODULE II
MODULE II
Introduction
This module is designed for trainees who meet the minimum entry requirement (or
other equivalent qualifications) for Diploma in Automotive Engineering. It is
designed with knowledge skills, attitudes and Competence that can be help
trainees perform as competent technician assistants in engine technology and
related areas workshop.
The module also covers knowledge, skills and attitudes in engineering drawing
and design to enable the trainee perform competently in vehicle designs related
fields.
The graduate of this module will be able to demonstrate the necessary skills for
the world of work as a technician trainee in the formal and the informal industry.
General Objectives
By the end of this module the trainee should be able to:
a) Prepare a viable business plan
b) Communicate effectively in matters relevant to motor vehicle industry
c) Face challenges posed by their physiological, psychological, social and
Economic circumstances
d) Appreciate the role of Information Communication Technology (ICT) in an
organizations and life in general
e) Use mathematical concepts and techniques in solving problems related to
Automotive Engineering trade
f) Perform the petrol and diesel engine tune up and test for efficiency
Key Competence
By the end of this module, the trainee should be able to demonstrate ability to;
- Diagnose, repair faults and service petrol and diesel engines
- Diagnose, repair faults and service various vehicle suspension systems
- Use various computer packages for design vehicle body works
Module Units
13.2.0 Business Plan
14.2.0 Mathematics II
15.2.0 Strength of Materials
16.2.0 Mechanics of Machines
17.2.0 Industrial Organisation and Management
18.2.0 Engineering Drawing and Design
19.2.0 Engine Technology
20.2.0 Vehicles Body Work
13.2.0 BUSINESS PLAN
The module unit is designed to equip the trainee with knowledge,
skills and attitudes to enable him/her prepare a business plan.

a) understand the background of intended business
b) understand the market environment of a business
c) understand organization and management plan
d) appreciate the role of an operational plan
e) prepare financial projections
f) prepare a business plan
Business Plan
Code Sub Unit Content Time
Module Hrs
T P Total
13.2.1 Introduction  Meaning of business plan
to Business  Purpose of a business plan
Planning  Features of a business plan 4 - 4
 Guidelines for developing
an effective business plan
13.2.2 Business  Business name
Description  Business location and
address
 Form of ownership
 Type of business
 Products/ services
 Justification of the 4 2 6
opportunity
 The industry
 Business goals and
objectives
 Entry and growth strategy
 SWOT analysis
13.2.3 Marketing  Customer identification
Plan  Competitor analysis
 Market share
 Promotion and advertising
 Pricing strategy 3 3 6
 Sales tactics
 Sales target
 Distribution strategy
 Customer service
13.2.4 Organization  Organization structure
and  Management team
Management  Recruitment, training and
Plan promotion
 Remuneration and 4 2 6
incentives
 Licenses, permits and
other requirements
 Supporting services
13.2.5 Operational/  Production facilities and
Production capacity utilization
Plan  Production and operation
strategy
 Production process 6 - 6
 Regulations affecting
operations
 Operational time
table/production schedule
13.2.6 Financial  Pre-operations cost
Plan  Working capital
 Cash flow projections
 Pro-forma income
statements
 Pro-forma balance sheets 4 2 6
 Break even analysis
 Profitability rations
 Desired financing
 Proposed capitalization
 Potential risks
13.2.7 Presentation  Business plan writing
 Presentation of the - 6 6
business plan
13.2.8 Emerging  Emerging issues in 4 - 4
Trends business planning
 Strategies in dealing with
emerging issues
Total 29 15 44
13.2.1 INTRODUCTION b) draw guidelines for
developing an
Theory effective business plan
13.2.1T0 Specific Objectives Content

By the end of the sub- 13.2.1P1 Features of a business
module unit, the trainee plan
should be able to: 13.2.1P2 Guidelines for
a) explain the meaning developing an effective
of a business plan business plan
b) explain the purposes
of a business plan Suggested teaching/Learning
c) identify the features of Activities
a business plan - Discussion
d) describe guidelines for - Question and answer
developing an - Illustration
effective business plan - Demonstration
- Note taking
13.2.1CCompetence - Observation
The trainee should have the - Presentations
ability to:
a) Identify the features of a Suggested teaching/Learning
business plan Resources
b) Draw guidelines for - Sample business plan write-
developing an effective ups
business plan - Text books
Content Suggested Evaluation Methods

13.2.1T1 Meaning of a business - Oral tests
plan - Assignments
13.2.1T2 Purposes of a business - Project
plan
13.2.1T3 Features of a business 13.2.2 BUSINESS
plan DESCRIPTION
13.2.1T4 Guidelines for
developing an effective Theory
business plan
Practice By the end of the sub-
By the end of the sub- a) provide the business
module unit, the trainee name
should be able to: b) describe business
a) identify the features of location and address
a business plan
c) discuss form of
ownership 13.3.2P0 Specific Objectives
d) explain the type of By the end of the sub-
business module unit, the trainee
e) describe the products should be able to:
offered a) develop business
f) discuss the names
justification of b) analyze form of
opportunity ownership
g) describe the industry c) list the type of
h) explain the goals of business
business d) examine the products
i) explain the entry and offered
growth strategy
j) discuss SWOT Content
analysis 13.2.2. P1 create the business
name
13.2.2C Competence 13.2.2. P2 Form of ownership
The trainee should have 13.2.2. P3 Type of business
the ability to: 13.2.2. P4 Products offered
i) develop business Suggested teaching/Learning
names Activities
ii) analyse form of - Discussion
ownership - Question and answer
iii) list the type of - Illustration
business - Demonstration
iv) examine the products - Note taking
offered - Observation
- Presentations
Content
13.2.2T1 Provide the business Suggested teaching/Learning
name Resources
13.2.2T2 Business location and - Sample business plan write-
address ups
13.2.2T3 Form of ownership - Text books
13.2.2T4 Type of business Suggested Evaluation Methods
13.2.2T5 Products offered - Oral tests
13.2.2T6 Justification of - Assignments
opportunity - Project
13.2.2T7 The industry
13.2.2T8 The goals of business 13.2.3 MARKETING PLAN
13.2.2T9 Entry and growth
strategy Theory
13.2.2T10 SWOT analysis
Practice
By the end of the sub- 13.2.3T3 Determination of the
module unit, the trainee market share
should be able to: 13.2.3T4 Methods of promotion
a) identify customers and advertising
b) describe the 13.2.3T5 Pricing strategy
competitors 13.2.3T6 Set sales target
c) determine the market 13.2.3T7 Sales tactics
share 13.2.3T8 Distribution strategy
d) explain the methods 13.2.3T9 Customer service
of promotion and strategy
advertising
e) explain the pricing Practice
strategy
f) set sales target 13.3P0 Specific Objectives
g) describe the sales By the end of the sub-
tactics module unit, the trainee
h) describe the should be able to:
distribution strategy a) identify potential
i) describe the customer customers
service strategy b) identify competitors
c) determine the methods of
13.2.3C Competence promotion and
The trainee should have advertising
the ability to: d) examine the factors to
i) Identify potential consider in pricing
customers e) identify the sales tactics
ii) Identify the f) analyze the distribution
competitors strategy
iii) Determine the g) draw the customer
methods of service strategy
promotion and
advertising
iv) Examine the factors
to consider in pricing
v) Identify the sales
tactics Content
vi) Analyze the 13.2.3P1 Identification of
distribution strategy customers
vii) Draw the customer 13.2.3P2 Competitors analysis
service strategy 13.2.3P4 Methods of promotion
and advertising
Content 13.2.3P5 Pricing strategy
13.2.3T1 Identification of 13.2.3P7 Sales tactics
customers 13.2.3P8 Distribution strategy
13.2.3T2 Competitors analysis 13.2.3P9 Customer service
strategy
f) identify licenses persist
Suggested teaching/Learning and legal requirements
Activities g) identify support
- Discussion services
- Question and answer
- Illustration 13.2.4C Competence
- Demonstration The trainee should have
- Note taking the ability to:
- Observation i) Draw organization
- Presentations structure
- Field visits ii) Assemble a the
management team
Suggested teaching/Learning iii) Develop a
Resources management plan
- Sample business plan write-
ups Content
- Text books 13.2.4T1 Organization structure
13.2.4T2 Management team
Suggested Evaluation Methods 13.2.4T3 Other business
- Oral tests personnel
- Assignments 13.2.4T4 Recruitment, training
- Project and promotion of
personnel
13.2.4 ORGANIZATION AND 13.2.4T5 Remuneration and
MANAGEMENT incentives for personnel
PLAN 13.2.4T6 Licenses persist and
legal requirements
Theory 13.2.4T7 Support services

should be able to:
a) describe the Practice
organization structure
b) describe the 13.2.4P0 Specific Objectives
management team By the end of the sub-
c) identify other business module unit, the trainee
personnel should be able to:
d) explain recruitment, a) draw organization
training and promotion structure
of personnel b) assemble a the
e) discuss remuneration management team
and incentives for c) develop a management
personnel plan
b) develop a production
Content and operation
13.2.4P1 Organization structure strategy
13.2.4P2 Management team c) describe the
13.2.4P3 Management plan production process of
the products
Suggested teaching/Learning d) discuss the
Activities regulations affecting
- Discussion operations
- Question and answer e) prepare operation
- Illustration time table/production
- Demonstration schedule
- Note taking
- Observation 13.2.5C Competence
- Presentations The trainee should have
the ability to:
Suggested teaching/Learning i) Identify production
Resources facilities and capacity
- Sample business plan write- ii) Draw the production
ups process of the
- Text books products
- Sample organisation plan
Content
Suggested Evaluation Methods 13.2.5T1 Production facilities
- Oral tests and capacity
- Assignments 13.2.5T2 Develop a production
- Project and operation strategy
13.2.5T3 Production process of
the products
13.2.5T4 Production process of
the products
13.2. 5T5 Regulations affecting
operations
13.2. 5 OPERATIONAL AND 13.2. 5T6 Prepare operation time
PRODUCTION PLAN table/production
schedule
Theory
Practice
a) identify production should be able to:
facilities and capacity a) identify production
facilities and capacity
b) describe the e) prepare pro-forma
production process of balance sheets
the products f) calculate break-even
point
Content g) calculate profitability
13.2.5P1 Production facilities rations
and capacity h) calculate desired
13.2.5P2 Production process of financing
the products i) calculate proposed
capitalization
Activities 13.2.6C Competence
- Discussion The trainee should have
- Question and answer the ability to:
- Illustration i) Determine pre-
- Demonstration operational costs
- Note taking ii) Estimate working
- Observation capital
- Presentations iii) Estimate cash-flow
projections
Suggested teaching/Learning iv) Prepare pro-forma
Resources income statements
- Sample business plan write- v) Prepare pro-forma
ups balance sheets
- Text books vi) Calculate break-even
point
vii) Calculate
profitability rations
Content
13.2.6 FINANCIAL PLAN 13.2. 6T1 Determination of pre
operational costs
Theory 13.2. 6T2 Estimating working
capital
13.2. 6T0 Specific Objectives 13.2. 6T3 Estimating cash-flow
By the end of the sub- projections
module unit, the trainee 13.2. 6T4 Preparation pro-forma
should be able to: income statements
a) determine pre- 13.2. 6T5 Preparation pro-forma
operational costs balance sheets
b) estimate working 13.2. 6T6 Calculation break-even
capital point
c) estimate cash-flow 13.2. 6T7 Calculation profitability
projections rations
d) prepare pro-forma 13.2. 6T8 Calculation desired
income statements financing
13.2. 6T9 Calculation Proposed - Note taking
capitalization - Observation
- Presentations
Practice
13.2. 6T0 Specific Objectives Resources
By the end of the sub- - Sample business plan write-
module unit, the trainee ups
should be able to: - Text books
a) determine pre- - Calculator
operational costs - Computer
b) estimate working
capital Suggested Evaluation Methods
c) estimate cash-flow - Oral tests
projections - Timed written tests
d) prepare pro-forma - Assignments
income statements - Business plan
e) prepare pro-forma
balance sheets 13.2.7 PRESENTATION
f) calculate break-even
point Theory
g) calculate profitability
rations 13.2. 7T0 Specific Objectives
13.2. 6T1 Determination pre- should be able to:
operational costs a) prepare final business
13.2. 6T2 Estimating working plan
capital b) make a presentation of
13.2. 6T3 Estimating cash-flow the business plan
projections
13.2. 6T4 Preparation pro-forma 13.2.7C Competence
income statements The trainee should have
13.2. 6T5 Preparation pro-forma the ability to:
balance sheets i) Write the final
13.2. 6T6 Calculation break-even business plan
point ii) Make a presentation
13.2. 6T7 Calculation profitability of the business plan
rations
Content
Suggested teaching/Learning 13.2. 7T1 Writing the final
Activities business plan
- Discussion 13.2. 7T2 Presentation of the
- Question and answer business plan
- Illustration
- Demonstration Practice
13.2. 7P0 Specific Objectives module unit, the trainee
By the end of the sub- should be able to:
module unit, the trainee a) identify the emerging
should be able to: trends in business plan
a) write the final b) identify the challenges
business plan posed by the emerging
b) make a presentation trends and issues
of the business plan c) explain various ways of
coping with challenges
Content
13.2. 7P1 Writing the final 13.2.8C Competence
business plan The trainee should have the
13.2. 7P2 Presentation of the ability to:
business plan i) Write the final business
plan
Suggested teaching/Learning ii) Make a presentation of
Activities the business plan
- Discussion iii) Identify emerging
- Question and answer issues/trends
- Illustration iv) Report on challenges of
- Demonstration emerging trends
- Note taking v) Interpret ways of
- Observation adapting to the emerging
- Presentations trends
Content
Suggested teaching/Learning 13.2. 8T1 Emerging trends in
Resources business plan
- Sample business plan write- 13.2. 8T2 Challenges posed by
ups the emerging trends and
- Text books issues
- Calculator 13.2. 8T3 Ways of coping with
- Computer challenges
Suggested Evaluation Methods Practice

- Oral tests
- Timed written tests 13.2.8P0 Specific Objectives
- Assignments By the end of sub-module
- Business plan unit, the trainee should be
able to:
13.2. 8 EMERGING TRENDS a) identify emerging
AND ISSUES issues/trends
b) report on challenges of
Theory emerging trends
13.2 8T0 Specific Objectives

c) interpret ways of
adapting to the emerging
trends Suggested Learning/Teaching
Resources
Content - Manuals
13.2.8P1 Identification of - Samples
Emerging Issues - Relevant text books
13.2.8P2 Reporting on - News papers and
challenges of emerging magazines
issues - Media
- Internet
Suggested Evaluation Methods
- Oral tests
- Timed written tests
- Assignments
- Business plan
13.2.8P3 Interpreting ways of

adapting to emerging
trends
14.2.0 MATHEMATICS II
14.2.01 INTRODUCTION
This module unit is designed to equip the trainee with the relevant
mathematical knowledge, skills, techniques and attitudes
necessary to enhance better understanding and application of
mathematics in the respective trade.
14.2.02 GENERAL OBJECTIVES

a) use mathematical concepts and techniques in solving
problems related to respective trade
b) organize, draw simple deductions and conclusions from the
given data
c) interpret graphical representation of functions relevant to
the respective trade area
14.2.0 MODULE UNIT AND TIME ALLOCATION
MATHEMATICS II
Unit
14.2.1 Probability  Definition of probability 10
 Laws of probability
 Expectation variance and S.D.
 Types of distributions
 Mean, variance and SD of probability
distributions
 Application of probability
distributions
14.2.2 Statistics  Definition of statistics 8
 Measures of centre tendency
 Measures of dispersion
14.2.3 Sequence  Sequence and series 6
and Series  Simple and compound interest
 Arithmetic and geometric
progressions
14.2.4 Vectors  Operation of vectors 4
 Resolution of vectors into vertical
and horizontal components
 Relative velocity
14.2.5 Mensuration  Units of measurements 4
s  Perimeters, areas, volumes of
regular figures and solids
 Area of irregular figures
14.2.6 Integral  Definition of integration 8
Calculus  Indefinite and definite integrals
 Methods of integration
 Application of integration
14.2.7 Differential  Definition of derivative of a function 14
Calculus  Differentiation from first principle
 Tables of some common derivatives
 Rules of differentiation
 Higher order derivatives
 Definition of partial derivative
 Partial differentiation for function of
two variables
 Application of partial differentiation
to small changes, stationary points,
curve sketching and rates of change
14.2.8 Power Series  Definition of the term power series 12
 Taylor’s theorem
 Deduction of Maclaurin’s theorem
from Taylor’s theorem
 Use Taylor’s theorem to obtain
power series
 Use Maclaurin’s theorem to obtain
power series
 Application of Taylor’s theorem and
Maclaurin’s theorems in numerical
work
Total Time 66
14.2.1 PROBABILITY ii) Charts
iii) Audio visual media
By the end of the sub 14.2.2 STATISTICS
module unit, unit the
trainee should be able to: 14.2.2T0 Specific Objectives
a) define the terms By the end of the sub
probability module unit, unit the
b) state and apply the trainee should be able to:
laws of probability a) define statistics
c) determine the b) determine measures of
expected value, central tendency
variance and standard c) determine measures of
deviation dispersion
d) illustrate the different
types of distributions 14.2.2C Competence
e) calculate the mean, The trainee should have
variance and standard the ability to apply
deviation of statistical knowledge to
probability functions engineering
f) apply the knowledge
of probability Content
distribution to solve 14.2.2T1 Definition of statistics
practice problems 14.2.2T2 Measures of centre
tendency
14.2.1C Competence 14.2.2T3 Measures of dispersion
the ability to work out Suggested Learning Resources
mathematical problems i) Print media
related to probability ii) Audio media
iii) Real live experience
Content
14.2.1T1 Definition of probability
14.2.1T2 Laws of probability 14.2.3 SEQUENCE AND
14.2.1T3 Expectation variance and SERIES
S.D
14.2.1T4 Types of distributions 14.2.3T0 Specific Objectives
14.2.1T5 mean, variance and SD By the end of the sub
of probability module unit, unit the
distributions trainee should be able to:
14.2.1T6 Application of a) distinguish between a
probability distributions sequence and a series
b) solve problems
Suggested Learning Resources involving in series
i) Calculates
c) apply the knowledge 14.2.4T 1 Operation of vectors
of series in 14.2.4T 2 Resolution of vectors
calculating simple and into vertical and
compound interest horizontal components
14.2.4T 3 Relative velocity
14.2.3C Competence
the ability to apply i) Charts
sequence and series to ii) Real life situations
engineering problems
14.2.5 MENSURATIONS
Content
14.2.3T1 Sequence and series 14.2.5 T0 Specific Objectives
14.2.3T2 Arithmetic and By the end of the sub
geometric progressions module unit, unit the
14.2.3T3 Simple and compound trainee should be able to:
interest a) state different units of
measurements
Suggested Learning Resources b) calculate perimeters,
i) Charts areas, volumes of
ii) Mathematical tables regular figures and
iii) Calculators solids
iv) Light-angled triangles c) use appropriate
v) Real life experience methods to calculate
areas of irregular
14.2.4 VECTORS figures
14.2.4T0 Specific Objectives 14.2.5 Competence

By the end of the sub The trainee should have
module unit, unit the the ability to work out
trainee should be able to: problems related to
a) carry out operations mensurations
on vectors
b) resolve vectors into Content
horizontal and 14.2.5T1 Units of measurements
vertical components 14.2.5 T2 Perimeters, areas,
c) determine relative volumes of regular
velocity figures and solids
14.2.5 T3 Area of irregular figures
14.2.4C Competence
the ability to ability to i) Charts
solve problems in
vectors
Content 14.2.6 INTEGRAL CULCULUS

c) refer to tables of
14.2.6 Specific Objectives derivatives of some
By the end of the sub common functions
module unit, unit the d) state and use rules of
trainee should be able to: differentiation
a) define integration e) determine the
b) differentiate between derivative of higher
indefinite and definite order
integrals f) define partial
c) solve problems derivatives of two
involving various variables
methods of integration g) differentiate partially
d) apply integration to functions of two
real life situations variables
h) apply differentiation
14.2.6C Competence to stationary points
The trainee should have curve sketching rates
the ability to apply of change, small
knowledge in integral changes
calculus to engineering i) solve problems
involving small
Content changes using partial
14.2.6T1 Definition of integration fractions
14.2.6T2 Indefinite and definite j) find stationary points
integrals for functions of two
14.2.6T3 Methods of integration variables
14.2.6T4 Application of
integration 14.2.7 Competence
Suggested Learning Resources ability to apply differential
i) Charts calculus engineering
ii) Squared grid-board
iii) Calculators Content
14.2.7T1 Definition of derivative
14.2.7 DIFFERENTIAL of a function
CALCULUS 14.2.7T2 Differentiation from first
principle
14.2.7T0 Specific Objectives 14.2.7T3 Tables of some common
By the end of the sub derivatives
module unit, unit the 14.2.7T4 Rules of differentiation
trainee should be able to: 14.2.7T5 Higher order derivatives
a) define the derivative 14.2.7T6 Definition of partial
of a function derivative
b) differentiate from first 14.2.7T7 Partial differentiation for
principle function of two variables
14.2.7T8 Application of partial f) apply Taylor’s and
differentiation to small Maclaurin’s theorems
changes, stationary of numerical work
points, curve sketching
and rates of change Content
14.2.7T9 Problems on small 14.2.8T1 Definition of the term
changes using partial power series
fractions 14.2.8T2 Taylor’s theorem
14.2.7T10 Stationary points for 14.2.8T3 Deduction of
functions of two Maclaurin’s theorem
variables from Taylor’s theorem
14.2.8T4 Application of Taylor’s
Suggested Learning Resources theorem to obtain power
i) Tables series
ii) Calculators 14.2.8T5 Use Maclaurin’s
theorem to obtain power
14.2.8 POWER SERIES series
14.2.8T6 Application of Taylor’s
14.2.8T0 Specific Objectives theorem and Maclaurin’s
By the end of the sub theorems in numerical
module unit, unit the work
trainee should be able to:
a) define the term power Suggested Learning Resources
series i) Calculators
b) state Taylor’s theorem
c) deduce Maclaurin’s
theorem from Taylor’s
theorem
d) use Taylor’s theorem
to obtain power series
e) use Maclaurin’s
theorem to obtain
power series
15.2.0 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
15.2.1 INTRODUCTION
Strength of materials is a module unit that deals with materials
and their application in structural engineering and tool room
processes.

a) Understand the concepts of the strength of engineering
materials
b) Select and use appropriate materials for fabrication work
c) Produce models of designed prototypes.
d) Apply the knowledge acquired to improve the performance of
various equipments.
e) Observe safety when dealing with various engineering
materials
15.2.3 MODULE UNIT SUMMARY AND TIME ALLOCATION
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
Code Sub-Module Content Time Hrs

Unit
T P Total
15.2.1 Stress and  Determination of 2 2 4
Strain elastic constants
15.2.2 Shearing Forces  Determination of 4 2 6
and Bending shearing force and
Moments bending moment
15.2..3 Bending  Verification of pure 3 3 6
Stresses in bending theory
Beams  Cantilevers
 Simply supported
beams
15.2.4 Deflection of  Determination of 6 2 8
Beams Young’s modulus
 Cantilevers
 Simply supported
beams
principles of super
position of deflection
in beams
 Determination of
fixing moments for
loaded beams
15.2.5 Thin  Determination of the 4 2 6
Cylinders and circumferential and
Shells longitudinal strains
and stresses in
pressurized thin
vessels
15.2.6 Torsion  Statement of the 8 2 10
simple theory of
torsion of circular
section bars.
 Explanation of
parameters in the
simple theory of
torsion equation
 Derivation from first
principle the
relationship between
strain and twist per
length.
 Using the equation to
develop other
equations
 Application of the
equations to solve
problems in torsion
15.2.7 Strain Energy  Definition of strain 8 4 12
energy
 Derivation of
expressions for strain
energy from first
principles of different
loading conditions
 Definition of
resilience and proof
resistance
 Derivation of an
expression for strain
energy of a three
dimensional principal
stress system.
 Definition of modules
of resistance
 Definition of a
maximum
instantaneous stress
 Definition of
maximum
instantaneous
extension
 Derivation of an
expression for strain
energy due to
instantaneous loading
 Statement of
Castigliano’s 1st
theorem for deflection
 Application of
Castigliano theorem to
derive expressions for
deflection on various
beam loading system
15.1.08 Springs  Definition of a spring 8 6 14
 Identification of
various types of
springs
 Derivation of stress
expression of springs
 Maximum shear stress
for coiled springs
 Sagging under axial
load
 Maximum bending
stress for a close
coiled spring sunder
axial torque
 Maximum bending
stress for semi-elliptic
spring under central
load
 Proof stress for semi-
elliptic spring under
central load
 Max. bending stress
for quarter-elliptic
spring
 Max. bending stress
for plain spiral spring
 Derivation of
deflection of springs
 Derivation of spring
rate expression for
various springs
expressions to solve
spring problems
 Derivation
expressions for
stiffness of springs
Total Time 43 23 66
15.2.1 STRESS AND 15.2.1P1 Explanation of elastic
STRAIN constants
i) Young modulus E
Theory ii) Modulus of rigidity
G
15.2.2T0 Specific Objectives iii) Poisson’s ratio γ
module unit, the trainee 15.2.2 SHEARING FORCES
should be able to AND BENDING
determine the elastic MOMENTS
constants of common
engineering materials. Theory
15.2.1C Competence 15.2.2T0 Specific Objectives

The trainee should By the end of the sub
have the ability to module unit, the trainee
perform and should be able to
demonstrate an determine shearing force
experiment to and bending moment at
determine: different points a long
i) Young’s Modulus E loaded beam
ii) Modulus of rigidity
G 15.2.2C Competence
iii) Poison’s ratio γ The trainee should have
the ability to perform
Content experiments to
15.2.1T1 Determination of elastic demonstrate shearing
constants forces and bending
i) Young’s modulus, E moments at different
ii) Modulus of rigidity points along loaded
G beams
iii) Poisson’s ratio, γ
Content
Practice 15.2.2T Determination of
shearing force and
9.2.1P0 Specific Objectives bending moment
module unit, the trainee Practice
should be able to explain
the elastic constants of 15.2.2P0 Specific Objectives
common engineering By the end of the sub
materials module unit, the trainee
should be able to
determine shearing force
Content and bending moment at
different points along Content
loaded beams 15.2.3P1 Verification of the pure
bending theory
Content i) Cantilever
15.2.2P1 Determination of ii) Simply supported
shearing force and beam
bending moment at
different points along 15.2.4 DEFLECTION OF
loaded beam
BEAMS
15.2.3 BENDING STRESSES
IN BEAMS Theory

15.2.3T0 Specific Objectives module unit, the
By the end of the sub trainee should be able
module unit, the to:
trainee should be able a) determine Young’ s
to derive the Modulus for beams
engineers’ bending b) verify the principle
theory (pure bending of superposition
theory). c) determine fixing
moments for loaded
15.2.3C Competence beams
The trainee should
have the ability to 15.2.4C Competence
perform experiments The trainee should
to verify bending have the ability Perform
theory. experiment to:
i) verify the principle
Content of super positioning
15.2.3T1 Derivation of pure bends ii) determine fixing
15.2.3T2 Cantilever moment for loaded
15.2.3T3 Simply supported beam beams
iii)determine fixing
Practice moment for built-in
beams
15.2.3P0 Specific Objectives iv) determine fixing
By the end of the sub moment for
module unit, the trainee continuous beams
should be able to derive
the engineer’s bending Content
theory (pure bending). 15.2.4T1 Determination of
Young’s modulus, E
15.2.4T4 Derivation of the 15.2.5 THIN CYLINDERS
principles of super AND SHELLS
position of deflection in
beams Theory
15.2.4T5 Determination of fixing
moments for loaded
beams
module unit, the
i) Built in beams
ii) Continuous beams
to:
a) Calculate the
Practice
circumferential
strains in
pressurized thin
vessels
module unit, the
b) Calculate the
trainee should be
longitudinal strains
able to:
in pressurized thin
a) determine young’s
vessels
modulus for beams
b) verify the principle
15.2.5C Competence
of super positioning
c) determine fixing
the ability to perform an
moments for loaded
experiment to determine
beams
the circumferential and
longitudinal strains and
Content
stresses in pressurized
15.2.4P1 Determination of
thin vessels and shells.
Young’s Modulus
15.2.4P2 Verification of the
Content
principle of super
15.2.5T1 Calculations for
position of deflection in
circumferential strains
beams
and stresses in
15.2.4P3 Determination of fixing
pressurized thin vessels
moments for loaded
15.2.5T2 Calculations for
beams Built in beams
longitudinal strains and
Continuous beams
stresses in pressurized
thin vessels
Practice
c) derive from first
15.2.5P0 Specific Objectives principle the
By the end of the sub relationship
module unit, the between shear
trainee should be able strain and twist per
to: unit length.
a) determine the d) use the equation to
circumferential develop other
strains in equations
pressurized thin e) apply the equations
to solve problems
vessels
involving torsion
b) determine the
longitudinal Content
strains in 15.2.6T1 Statement of the simple
pressurized thin theory of torsion of
shells circular section bars.
15.2.6T2 Explanation of
Content parameters in the simple
15.2.5P1 Determination of the theory of torsion
circumferential strains equation
and stresses in i) Polar second moment
pressurized thin vessels of area
i) Thin cylinders ii) Angle of twist
ii) Thin shells iii) Modulus of rigidity
15.2.5P2 Determination of the iv) Shear stress and shear
longitudinal strains and strain in shafts
stresses in pressurized 15.2.6T3 Derive from first
thin vessels principle the relationship
i) Thin cylinders between strain and twist
ii) Thin shells per length.
15.2.6T4 Using the equation to
15.2.6 TORSION develop other equations
i) Hollow shafts
Theory and Practice
ii) Stepped shafts
15.2.6T/P0 Specific Objectives
iii) Solid shafts
iv) Torsional rigidity
module unit, the
15.2.6T5 Application of the
equations to solve
to:
problems in torsion
a) state the simple
i) Hollow shafts
theory of torsion of
ii) Stepped shafts
circular section bars
iii) Solid shafts
b) explain the
iv) Diameters of shafts
parameters in the
v) Torque
simple section bars
vi) Torsional rigidity
vii) Maximum polar development
sectional modulus from
viii) Maximum shear Castigliano’s
strains acceptable theorem to solve
ix) Thickness of hollow problems.
shaft
x) Angle of twist Content
15.2.7T1 Definition of strain
15.2.7 STRAIN ENERGY energy
15.2.7T2 Derivation of
15.2.7T/P0 Specific Objectives expressions for strain
By the end of the sub- energy from first
module unit, the principles of
trainee should be different loading
able to: conditions
a) define strain i) Tension
energy ii) Compression
b) derive iii) Shear
expressions for iv) Bending
strain energy v) Torsion
from first 15.2.7T3 Definition of resilience
principle for and proof resistance
different loading 15.2.7T4 Definition of modules
conditions of resistance
c) define resilience 15.2.7T5 Definition of a
and proof maximum
resilience instantaneous stress
d) define modules of 15.2.7T6 Definition of
resilience maximum
e) define maximum instantaneous
instantaneous extension
stress 15.2.7T7 Derivation of an
f) define maximum expression for strain
instantaneous nergy due to
extension, instantaneous
g) derive on loading
expression for i) Axial loading
strain energy due ii) Torsional loading
to instantaneous iii) Bending
loading 15.2.7T8 Statement of
h) state Castigliano’s 1st
Castigliano’s 1st theorem for deflection
theorem for 15.2.7T9 Application of
deflection Castigliano theorem to
i) apply the derive expressions for
expression deflection on various
beam loading system i) Maximum shear
under stress for coiled
i) Bending springs
ii) Tension ii) Sagging under axial
iii) Shear load
iv) Solving problems iii) Maximum bending
stress for a close
15.2.8 SPRINGS
coiled spring under
15.2.8T/P0 Specific Objectives axial torque
By the end of the sub iv) Maximum bending
module unit, the stress for semi-
trainee should be able elliptic spring under
to: central load
a) define spring v) Proof stress for
b) identify the various semi-elliptic spring
types of springs under central load
c) derive stress vi) Maximum bending
expressions for stress for quarter-
springs elliptic spring
d) derive deflections vii) Maximum bending
for springs stress for plain spiral
e) derive spring rate spring
expression for 15.2.8T4 Derivation of
various springs deflection of springs
f) derive expressions i) Total deflection of a
for stiffness of closed coiled spring
springs. under axial load.
g) apply the ii) Wind up angle of a
expressions to solve closed, coiled spring
spring problems under axial torque
iii) Deflection of an
Content open coiled spring
15.2.8T1 Definition of a spring under axial load
15.2.8T2 Identification of iv) Angular rotation of
various types of an open coiled
springs spring under axial
i) Close coiled springs load.
ii) Open coiled springs v) Wind up angle of
iii) Semi-elliptic open coiled spring
iv) Quarter-elliptic under axial torque
v) Plain spiral springs vi) Axial deflection of
15.2.8T3 Derivation of stress an open coiled
expression of springs spring under axle
torque
vii) Deflection for
semi-elliptic
spring under - Work piece
central load - Testing machine
viii) Wind up angle - Procedure sheet
for a plain
spiral spring
15.2.8T5 Derivation of spring
rate expression for
various springs
i) Coiled spring under
axial load
ii) Torque per turn of a
coiled spring under
axial torque
iii) Semi elliptic
iv) Quarter elliptic
v) Torque per turn of a
plain spiral spring
15.2.8T6 Derivation expressions
for stiffness of springs
i) Springs in series
ii) Springs in parallel
spring problems
i) Bending stresses
ii) Compression of
springs
iii) Material size
iv) Angle of rotation
v) Deflection
vi) Bending moments
vii) Loads
viii) Applied
moments

- Relevant text books
- Handouts
16.2.0 MECHANICS OF MACHINES
16.2.1 Introduction
Mechanics of machines deals with forces, motion and power of
machines in motion like hoists and vehicles.
The recommended instructional approach is that which will

emphasize on experiments, industrial visits and analysis of
various mechanical principles.

b) size power requirements of motors used in engineering design
c) produce models of designed prototypes
d) apply the knowledge acquired to improve the performance of
various equipment
Mechanics of Machines
Unit Hrs
16.2.1 Kinematics  Definition of kinematics of 8
a particle
 Equations of motion
 Application of equations of
motion
principles expression for
centripetal acceleration of a
particle moving with
uniform angular velocity
16.2.2 Impulse and  Definition of linear 10
Momentum momentum
 Explanation of the
relationship between force
and momentum of a body
 Explanation of linear
impulse
 Explanation of the
relationship between linear
impulse and linear
momentum of a body
 Solution of problems in
Unit Hrs
linear momentum and
linear impulse
 Explanation of angular
momentum
principles, equations of
angular momentum and
impulse
 Solution of problems on
angular momentum and
impulse
conservation of momentum
16.2.3 Mass Moments of  Explanation of axial 6
Inertia moment of inertia of a
mass
 Statement of expression for
mass moment of inertia of
an element about three
mutually perpendicular
axes
 Derivation of expressions of
centroidal mass moment of
inertia (common regular
objects)
 Explanation of polar
moment of inertia
 Application of expressions
to solve problems
 Centroidal mass moment of
inertia for common regular
shapes
 Statement of parallel axes
theorem
 Explanation of parallel axes
theorem
 Application of parallel axes
theorem
 Definition of radius of
gyration
 Application of expression
of radius of gyration to
solve problems
Unit Hrs
16.2.4 Area Of Moment  Explanation of axial 6
of Inertia moment of inertia of an
area
 Elemental area rotated
about an axis perpendicular
to its plane
 Derivation of an expression
for polar moment of inertia
of an area
 Explanation of the product
of inertia
 Derivation of an expression
for the product of inertia of
an area
 Statement of parallel axis
theorem
 Diagram
 Application of inertia
problems in:
- regular areas
- composite areas
 Explanation of moments of
inertia of any (x, y) with
respect to rotated set of axis
 Statement of expressions
for moment of inertia of an
area with rotated axes
 Application of Mohr’s cycle
to solve problems
Unit Hrs
16.2.5 Belts and  Identification of common 8
Clutches types of belts
 Derivation of belt equations
 Application of equation to
solve belt problems
 Identification of common
clutches
 Derivation of clutch
equations
 Application of the equations
to solve clutch problems
 Ratio of belt tension
 Coefficient of friction
between belt and pulley
 Torque in clutches
 Coefficient of friction in
clutches
16.2.6 Geared Systems  Description of different 6
types of gear drives
 Derivation of equations for
gear drives
to solve gear drive
problems
 Torque in geared systems
 Mechanical advantage
 Efficiency in geared
systems
16.2.7 Dynamics of a  Definition of dynamics of a 10
Rigid Body in rigid body
Translation  Statement of the scalar
equation for translation
 Moment of external forces
about mass centre of a body
 Application of the equation
to solve problems
16.2.8 Dynamics of  Identification of rotation of 6
Rigid Body a body about a non-
in Rotation centroidal axis
 statement of equation of
motion for rotation about a
non-centroidal axis
Unit Hrs
 Balancing of masses
16.2.9 Dynamics of  Statement of plane motion 6
Rigid Body in  Explanation of equations of
Plane plane motion
 Application of equation of
plane motion
Total Time 66
16.2.1 KINEMATICS
16.2.2 IMPULSE AND
Theory MOMENTUM
Theory
By the end of the sub 16.2.2T0 Specific Objectives
module unit, the trainee By the end of the sub
a) define kinematics of a should be able to:
particle a) define linear
b) state the equations of momentum
motion b) explain the relationship
c) apply the equations of between force and
motion to solve momentum of a body
problems c) explain linear impulse
d) derive from first d) explain the relationship
principle the between linear impulse
expressions for and linear momentum
centripetal e) explain angular
acceleration of a momentum
particle. f) solve problems in
linear impulse and
Content linear momentum.
16.2.1T1 Definition of kinematics g) derive from first
of a particle principle, equations of
16.2.1T2 Equations of motion angular momentum and
i) linear motion impulse
ii) angular motion h) solve problems on
16.2.1T3 Application of equations angular momentum and
motion impulse
i) linear velocity,
ii) angular acceleration 16.2.2C Competence
iii) angular displacement The trainee should have
16.2.1T4 Derivation from first the ability to perform the
principles expression for experiment to verify the
centripetal acceleration of principles of conservation
a article moving with Content
uniform angular velocity 16.2.2T1 Definition of linear
2 momentum
a  r 2  16.2.2T2 Explanation of the
r relationship between
Suggested Learning Resources force and momentum of a
i) Relevant text books body
ii) Hand outs 16.2.2T3 Explanation of linear
impulse
16.2.2T4 Explanation of the
relationship between Theory
linear impulse and linear
momentum of a body 16.2.3T0 Specific Objectives
16.2.2T5 Solution of problems in By the end of the sub
linear momentum and module unit, the trainees
linear impulse should be bale to:
16.2.2T6 Explanation of angular a) explain axial moment
momentum of inertia of a mass
16.2.2T7 Derivation from first b) state expressions for
principles, equations of mass moment of inertia
angular momentum and of an element about
impulse three mutually
16.2.2T8 Solution of problems on perpendicular axes.
angular momentum and c) derive expressions for
impulse mass moment of inertia
d) explain polar moment
Practice of inertia
e) derive an expression of
16.2.2P0 Specific Objectives polar moment of inertia
By the end of the sub f) apply the expressions
module unit, the trainee to solve problems
should be able to verify g) state parallel axis
the principle of theorem
conservation of h) explain the parallel
momentum in collision of axes theorem
bodies. i) apply the parallel axes
theorem to solve
Content problems
16.2.2P1 Verification of the j) define radius of
conservation of gyration
momentum k) apply the expression of
i) Collision of bodies in radius of gyration to
linear motion solve problems.
ii) Collision of bodies in
angular motion Content
16.2.3T1 Explanation of axial
Suggested Learning Resources moment of inertia of a
i) Relevant text books mass
ii) Hand outs 16.2.3T2 Statement of expression
iii) Toy cars for mass moment of
iv) Procedure sheet inertia of an element
about three mutually
perpendicular axes
16.2.3 MASS MOMENTS OF 16.2.3T3 Derivation of expressions
INERTIA of Centroidal mass
moment of inertia c) explain polar moment
(common regular objects) of inertia of an area
16.2.3T4 Explanation of polar d) derive an expression
moment of inertia for the polar moment
16.2.3T5 Application of of inertia of an area
expressions of Centroidal e) explain the product of
mass moment of inertia to inertia of an area
solve problems f) derive an expression
16.2.3T6 Centroidal mass moment for the product of
of inertia for common inertia of an area
regular shapes g) state the parallel axis
16.2.3T7 Statement of parallel theorem
axes theorem h) apply the inertia
16.2.3T8 Explanation of parallel expressions to solve
axes theorem problems
16.2.3T9 Application of parallel i) explain moment of
axes theorem inertia of an area with
16.2.3T0 Definition of radius of axes (x, y) with respect
gyration to rotated set of axes
16.2.3T11Application of expression (x1, y1)
of radius of gyration to j) state expressions for
solve problems moments of inertia of
an area with rotated set
Suggested Learning Resources of axes
i) Relevant text books k) apply Mohr’s cycle to
ii) Hand outs solve problems related
iii) Workshop realia to rotation of axis
iv) Rotation motor
v) Various bodies Content
vi) Procedure sheet 16.2.4T1 Explanation of axial
vii) Specification manual moment of inertia of an
area
16.2.4 AREA OF MOMENT 16.2.4T2 Elemental area rotated
OF INERTIA about an axis
perpendicular to its
Theory plane
16.2.4T3 Explain polar moment of
16.2.4T0 Specific Objectives inertia of an area
By the end of the sub 16.2.4T4 Derivation of an
module unit, the trainee expression for polar
should be able to: moment of inertia of an
a) explain axial moment area
of inertia of an area 16.2.4T5 Explanation of the
b) derive an expression product of inertia
for axial moment of an
area
16.2.4T6 Derivation of an
expression for the product 16.2.5C Competence
of inertia of an area The trainee should have
16.2.4T7 Statement of parallel axis the ability to perform
theorem experiments to determine:
16.2.4T8 Application of inertia i) the ratio of belt
expressions to solve tensions
problems ii) the coefficient of
i) Regular areas friction between the
ii) Composite areas pulley and the belt
16.2.4T9 Moments of inertia of any iii) torque in clutches
(x, y) with respect to iv) coefficient of friction
rotated set of axis in clutches
16.2.4T10 State expressions for
moments of inertia of an Content
area with rotated set of 16.2.5T1 Identification common
axis types of belts
16.2.4T11 Application of Mohr’s i) Flat
cycle to solve problems ii) Vee
16.2.5T2 Derivation of belt
Suggested Learning Resources equations
i) Relevant text books i) Tension
ii) Hand outs ii) Angle of lap
iii) Workshop realia iii) Power
iv) Size of belt
16.2.5 BELTS AND v) Number of belts
CLUTCHES vi) Torque
16.2.5T3 Application of equation
Theory to solve belt problems on:
i) Flat belt
16.2.5T0 Specific Objectives ii) Vee belt
By the end of the sub iii) Power transmitted
module unit, the trainee iv) Angle of lap
should be able to: v) Tension
a) identify common types vi) Size of belts
of belts 16.2.5T4 Identification of common
b) derive belts equations clutches
c) apply the equations to i) plate
solve belt problems ii) Centrifugal
d) identify common iii) Conical
clutches 16.2.5T5 Derivation of clutch
e) derive equations for equations
clutches i) Force
f) apply the equation to ii) Torque transmitted
solve clutches iii) Number of plates
problems iv) Efficiency
16.2.5T6 Application of the viii) Oral practical tests
equations to solve clutch ix) Continuous practical
problems tests
Practice 16.2.6 GEARED SYSTEMS
16.2.5P0 Specific Objectives Theory

module unit, the trainee 16.2.6T0 Specific Objectives
should be able to: By the end of the sub
a) perform experiments to module unit, the trainee
verify the ratio of belt should be able to:
tensions a) describe different types
b) perform experiments to of gear drives
determine the b) drive equations for gear
coefficient of friction drives
between the pulley and c) apply the equations to
the belt solve gear drive
c) perform experiments to problems
determine torque in
clutches Content
d) perform experiments to 16.2.6T1 Description of different
determine coefficient types of gear drives
of friction in i) Spur gear trains
clutchesContent ii) Epicyclic gear systems
16.2.5P1 Ratio of belt tension 16.2.6T2 Derivation of equations
i) Flat belts for gear drives
ii) Vee belts i) Velocity ratio
16.2.5T2 Coefficient of friction ii) Radius
between belt and pulley iii) Pressure angle
16.2.5T3 Torque in clutches iv) Accelerating torque
i) Plate clutches v) Friction torque
ii) Cone clutches vi) Input and output
iii) Centrifugal clutches members for an
16.2.5T4 Coefficient of friction in epicyclic gear train
clutches vii) Speed and sense of
rotation
Suggested Learning Resources viii) Power transmitted
i) Relevant text books 16.2.6T3 Application of the
ii) Hand outs equations to solve gear
iii) Real belts and clutches drive problems
iv) Demonstration Practice
v) Discussion
vi) Experiment 16.2.6P0 Specific Objectives
vii) Rotating motor and its
pulley
By the end of the topic, 16.2.7 DYNAMICS OF A
the trainee should be able RIGID BODY IN
to: TRANSLATION
a) perform experiment to
determine the torque in Theory
geared systems
b) perform experiment to 16.2.7T0 Specific Objectives
determine mechanical By the end of the sub-
advantage in geared module unit, the trainee
systems should be able to:
c) perform experiment to a) define dynamics of a
determine the rigid body
efficiency in geared b) state the scalar
systems equation for translation
c) determine moment of
Content external forces about
16.2.6T1 Torque in geared systems mass centre of a body
i) Spur gears d) apply the equation to
ii) Epicyclic gears solve problems
16.2.6T2 Mechanical advantage
i) Spur gears Content
ii) Epicyclic gears 16.2.7T1 Definition of dynamics of
16.2.6T3 Efficiency in geared a rigid body
systems 16.2.7T2 Statement of the scalar
i) Spur gears equation for translation
ii) Epicyclic gears 16.2.7T3 Moment of external
forces about mass centre
16.2.6C Competence of a body
The trainee should have 16.2.7T4 Application of the
the ability to perform equation to solve
experiment to determine: problems
i) torque in geared
systems
ii) mechanical advantage
in geared systems
iii) efficiency in geared
systems 16.2.8 DYNAMICS OF
RIGID BODY IN
ROTATION
i) Relevant text books Theory
ii) Hand outs
iii) Realia 16.2.8T0 Specific Objectives
iv) Spur gears By the end of the sub
v) Epicyclic gears module unit, the trainee
should be able to:
a) identify rotation of a 16.2.9T3 Application of equation
body about a non- of plane motion
centrodial axis i) Linear dynamic
b) state equations of condition
motion for rotation ii) Angular dynamic
about a non- condition
centrodial axis
c) balance masses
Content
16.2.8T1 Identification of rotation
of a body about a non-
centrodial axis
16.2.8T2 Statement of equation of
motion for rotation about
a non-centroidal axis
16.2.8T3 Balancing of masses
i) Static balancing
ii) Dynamics balancing
16.2.9 DYNAMICS OF RIGID

BODY IN PLANE
Theory

should be able to:
a) state the equations of
plane motion
b) explain the equations
of plane motion
c) apply the equations to
solve problems
Content
16.2.9T1 Statement of plane
motion
i) Vector
ii) Scalar
16.2.9T2 Explanation of equations
of plane motion
i) Vector
ii) Scalar
17.2.0 INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATION AND MANAGEMENT
17.2.1 Introduction
This module unit is designed to equip the trainee with the
knowledge skills and attitudes for organizational management for
technical operators and subsequently managers of the industrial
plant production and manufacturing services. The purpose of the
module unit is to equip the trainee with skills of the human and
material resources management to enhance productivity in the
mechanical production and services industry.
Trainees undertaking this module will require knowledge of

communication skills and Mathematics (statistics).

a) understand the theories of management
b) apply management skills in his/her field
c) manage the human resources appropriately to maximize
production
d) plan and control the production processes
e) acquire the knowledge of procurement, storing and costing
of a product
f) demonstrate innovation in design and development of
industrial production

Industrial Organization and Management
Code Sub-Module Contents Time
Unit Hrs
17.2.1 Management  Theories of management 10
Theory  Modern influences on the
work of pioneers of
management
 Contributions of
management theories in
modern day organisation
management
17.2.2 Organisation  Theories of organisation 8
Structures  Types of organisation
structures and charts
 Need for delegation in
organisation
 Problems associated with
Unit Hrs
delegation
 Authority and
responsibility
 Decision process in
organisation
 Concept of management
by objectives (MBO)
17.2.3 Plant  Functions of maintenance 8
Maintenance department
 Types of maintenance
 Factors affecting plant
reliability
 Procedure of setting up
maintenance schedule /
plan
 Centralized and
decentralized maintenance
17.2.4 Material  Meaning of procurement 8
Procurement  Methods of procurement
and Stores  Role of Public
Control Procurement and Disposal
Act in an organisation
 Stores procedure
 Methods of stock control
 Types of stores
 Stores documents
 Stock control levels
17.2.5 Production  Functions / objectives of 8
Planning production planning
Control  Factors affecting
production
 Need for product design
 Stages of product design
and development
 Objectives of production
control
 Activities of production
control
17.2.6 Work Study  Objectives of work study 6
 Limitations of work study
 Phases of work study
 Method study
Unit Hrs
 Work measurement
 Techniques of work
measurement
 Motion study

17.2.7 Human  Functions of human 8
Resource resource manager
Management  Need for staff recruitment
in organisation
 Sources of staff
recruitment
 Process of staff
recruitment
 Objectives of staff
training
 Staff training methods
 Staff appraisal
 Methods of staff appraisal
17.2.8 Economics  Economics and 8
engineering
 Factors of production
 Scarce resources and
decision making
 Opportunity cost
 Production possibility
curve (frontier)
17.2.9 Office  Functions of an office 6
Administration  Types of office layout
 How an office can be
organized
 Types of filing
 Methods of filing
 Office equipment
17.2.10 Estimating and  Elements of cost 6
Costing  Cost structure
 Unit cost
 Marginal costing
Total 66
Content
17.2.1T1 Theories of management 17.2.2C Competence
i) Classical theory The trainee should have
ii) Scientific theory the ability to draw
iii) Bureaucratic theory organisation structure
iv) Administrative and apply correct
theory decisions making
v) Human relations Process in managing an
theory organisation
vi) Behavioural
theory Content
operational 17.2.2T1 Theories of organisation
research i) Cybernetics
17.2.1T2 Pioneers of management ii) Formal
17.2.1T3 Contribution of iii) Informal
management theories in 17.2.2T2 Types o organisation
modern day structures
management i) Vertical
ii) Horizontal
17.2.2 ORGANIZATION iii) Circular
STRUCTURES iv) Functional
v) Matrix
Theory 17.2.2T3 Authority and
responsibility
17.2.2T0 Specific Objectives i) Accountability
By the end of the sub- ii) Span of control
module unit, the trainee iii) Responsibility
should be able to: 17.2.2T4 Delegation problems
a) explain various i) Accountability
theories of ii) Span of control
organisation iii) Staff
b) identify various types 17.2.2T5 Decision making
of organisation (factors)
structures i) Environment
c) differentiate between ii) Government
authority and regulations
responsibility iii) Society
d) explain the problems iv) Internal environment
associated with v) Company policies
delegation 17.2.2T6 Management by
e) describe the decision objectives
making process i) Organizational tasks
f) explain the concepts ii) Group objectives
of management by iii) Evaluation
objectives (MBO) iv) modification
iv) Running
17.2.3 PLANT v) Shut down
MAINTENANCE vi) Unplanned
vii) Emergency
Theory breakdown
viii) Centralized
17.2.3T0 Specific Objectives maintenance
By the end of the sub- ix) Decentralized
module unit, the trainee maintenance
should be able to: x) Advantages and
a) describe the limitations of
functions of plant centralized and
maintenance decentralized
b) describe the types of maintenance
plant maintenance xi) Condition based
c) describe the xii) Predictive
procedures of setting maintenance
up maintenance plan 17.2.3T3 Procedures of setting up
d) explain the factors maintenance plan
affecting the i) Inventory
reliability of the plant ii) Maintenance
e) describe centralized iii) Programme
and decentralized iv) Production schedules
maintenance v) Material resources
vi) Job cards
17.2.3C Competence vii) Work order
The trainee should have viii) Work request
the ability to prepare ix) Work study
maintenance schedule x) Planning charts
for the plant xi) Safety
17.2.3T4 Factors affecting plant
Content reliability
17.2.3T1 Functions of plant i) Plant design
maintenance ii) Maintenance
department iii) Optimum use of
i) Installation resources
ii) Modification 17.2.3T5 Centralized and
iii) Efficient decentralized
management maintenance
iv) Equipment appraisal
17.2.3T2 Types of plant 17.2.4 MATERIALS
maintenance PROCUREMENT
i) Planned maintenance AND STORES
ii) Preventive CONTROL
iii) Corrective
Theory 17.2.4T4 Documents used in
store keeping
17.2.4T0 Specific Objectives i) Stock record card
By the end of the sub- ii) Bin cards
module unit, the trainee iii) Stores ledger
should be able to: iv) Computer based
a) explain term systems
procurement 17.2.4T5 Calculate stock levels
b) explain procurement i) Maximum stock level
procedure ii) Minimum stock
c) describe the stores level
procedure iii) Re-order level
d) describe documents iv) Economic order
used in store keeping quantity (EOQ)
e) determine the stock 17.2.4T6 Types of stores
levels i) Centralized store
f) describe various ii) Decentralized
types of stores stores
17.2.4C Competence Suggested Learning Resources

The trainee should have i) Store documents
the ability to maintain ii) Bin cards
optimum stock levels for iii) Stores ledger
production process iv) stock card
v) Public Procurement
Content and Disposal Act
17.2.4T1 Meaning of documents
procurement
17.2.4T2 Procurement procedure 17.2.5 PRODUCTION
i) Quotation PLANNING
ii) Tendering CONTROL
iii) Spot purchase
iv) Contract Theory
v) Role of Public
Procurement and 17.2.5T0 Specific Objectives
Disposal Act in an By the end of the sub-
organisation module unit, the trainee
17.2.4T3 Store procedure should be able to:
i) Receiving a) explain the function
ii) Storing of production
iii) Requisition planning
iv) Issuing b) explain factors
v) LIFO affecting
vi) FIFO production
vii) FILO planning
c) describe methods of i) Environmental
production ii) Political
d) describe the need iii) Legal
for product design iv) Socio-economic
e) describe stages of v) Technological
product design and 17.2.5T3 Methods of production
development i) Jobbing
f) explain the ii) Batch
objectives of iii) Flow
production control iv) Mass
g) describe the v) Process
activities of 17.2.5T4 Need for product design
production control i) Optimization of
material
17.2.5C Competence resources
The trainee should have ii) Optimization of
the ability to plan a manufacturing
properly coordinated process
production process iii) Reduction of cost
iv) Standardization
Content v) Specialization
17.2.5T1 Functions of production vi) Simplification
planning vii) Marketing
i) Selection of requirements
process 17.2.5T5 Stages of product
ii) A breakdown of design and
parts development
iii) Decision to i) Idea generation
produce or ii) Preliminary
purchase design and
iv) Planning the sketches
machines, iii) Analysis of
equipment and design
tools iv) Evaluation
v) Development of v) Functional
machine design
operations vi) Final design
vi) Development of vii) Prototyping
time standard viii) Production
vii) Routing design
viii) Making 17.2.5T6 Objectives of
production production control
schedules i) Prime purpose
17.2.5T2 Factors affecting
planning
ii)Minimizing e) describe the
idleness of techniques used in
machines and man work measurements
iii) Meeting promises
to customer 17.2.6C Competence
iv) Inventory turnover The trainee should have
v) Quality of the the ability to calculate
product standard times and
17.2.5T7 Activities of production determine the duration
control of a given task at
i) Routing minimum cost
ii) Scheduling
iii) Follow-up Content
iv) Processing 17.2.6T1 Objectives of work
v) Dispatching study
vi) Programming i) Productivity
ii) Cost reduction
Suggested Learning Resources iii) Methods of
i) Charts production
ii) Model iv) Time
iii) Prototypes 17.2.6T2 Limitations of work
study
i) Physical facilities
ii) Workers
resistance/resentment
17.2.6T3 Phases of work study
17.2.6 WORK STUDY i) Method study
ii) works measurement
Theory 17.2.6T4 Objectives of method
study
17.2.6T0 Specific Objectives i) efficiency
By the end of the sub- ii) optimum utilization
module unit trainees of resources
should be able to: iii) personnel and
a) explain the basic equipment
concept of work iv) cost effectiveness
study 17.2.6T5 Techniques of work
b) describe the measurement
conditions limiting i) time
the utilization of ii) activity
work study iii) sampling
c) explain the phases of iv) synthesis
work-study v) analytical estimating
d) explain the objectives
of method study
vi) PMTS appropriate task s to the
(predetermined personnel
motion time systems)
Content
Suggested Learning Resources 17.2.7T1 Functions of HR
i) Flow chart manager Training
diagrams Recruitment
ii) Reference i) Wages
work/text books ii) Salary
iii) Welfare
17.2.7 HUMAN RESOURCE iv) Health
MANAGEMENT v) Safety
vi) Industrial dispute
Theory vii) Public relations
viii) Industrial relations
17.2.7T0 Specific Objectives and conflict resolution
By the end of the sub- 17.2.7T2 Need for staff
module unit trainee recruitment
should be able to: i) Labour turn-over
a) describe the ii) New technology
functions of a HR iii) Expansion
manager iv) Production
b) describe the need for v) Demand
staff recruitment vi) Retirement
c) identify sources of vii) Replacement
labour in staff 17.2.7T3 Sources of labour
recruitment i) Internal
d) describe staff ii) External
recruitment process 17.2.7T4 Staff recruitment
e) describe the process
objectives of staff i) Personnel
training specification
f) describe the methods ii) Job specification
of staff training iii) Advertising
g) describe the iv) Short listing
objectives of staff v) Interviewing
appraisal vi) Engagement
h) describe the methods 17.2.7T5 Objectives of training
of staff appraisal staff
i) New technology
17.2.7C Competence ii) Retention
The trainee should have iii) Personnel
the ability to supervise development
work and assign iv) Organizational
development
v) Motivation scarce resources and
17.2.7T6 Training methods decision making
i) Vestibule
ii) Induction 17.2.8C Competence
iii) Seminars The trainee should have
iv) External courses the ability to utilize
v) Internal courses factors of production to
vi) On-the-job training realize profitability.
vii) Apprenticeship
viii) Workshops Content
ix) Group training 17.2.8T1 Importance of
x) Role playing economics in
17.2.7T7 Objectives of staff engineering
appraisal i) Wealth creation
i) Promotion ii) Engineers are
ii) Training involvement in
iii) Change of staff reduction of human
17.2.7T8 Methods of staff effort
appraisal 17.2.8T2 Factors of production
i) Grading i) Labour
ii) Personnel ii) Land
specification iii) Capital
iii) Job specification iv) Entrepreneurship
v) Market research
Suggested Learning Resources vi) Geographical
i) Reference books location
ii) Charts vii) Politics
iii) Employment Act viii) Statutory
document requirements
17.2.8T3 Relationship between
17.2.8 ECONOMICS scarce resources and
decision making
Theory i) Gross national
product
17.2.8T0 Specific Objectives ii) Gross domestic
By the end of the sub- product
module the trainee iii) National income
should be able to: iv) Market economy
a) describe the concept v) Demand curves
of economics vi) Supply curves
b) describe the factors vii) Opportunity cost
of production
c) describe the Suggested Learning Resources
relationship between i) Reference books
ii) Charts
iii) Statistics on iii) Conflict resolution
national income iv) Quality control
from v) Keeping
Government organization
Agency records
17.2.9T2 Office layout
i) Open office
ii) Close office
17.2.9T3 Types of filing
iii) Vertical filing
iv) Horizontal filing
17.2.9T4 How an office can be
17.2.9 OFFICE organized
ADMINISTRATION i) Routine tasks
ii) Non-routine
Theory iii) Work schedule
iv) Organization
17.2.9T0 Specific Objectives structure
By the end of the sub- 17.2.9T5 Methods of filing
module the trainee i) Alphabetical
should be able to: ii) Geographical
a) outline functions of iii) Numerical
office iv) Chronological
b) describe types of 17.2.9T6 Identification and use
office layout of office equipment
c) describe types of
filing Suggested Learning Resources
d) explain how an office i) Model office
can be organized ii) Office equipment
e) explain methods of iii) telephone
filing iv) fax
f) identify and use v) computers
office equipment vi) filing cabinets
vii) typewriters
17.2.9C Competence /teleprinter
The trainee should have viii) furniture
the ability to manage an
office and resources 17.2.10 ESTIMATING AND
effectively COSTING
Content 17.2.10T0 Specific Objectives

17.2.9T1 Functions of office By the end of the sub-
i) Coordination module the trainee
ii) Assignment of should be able to:
responsibilities
a) describe elements of
cost
b) determine the cost of a
process or product
c) calculate break-even
point from the given
data
17.2.10C Competence
the ability to determine
break-even point and the
cost of producing a
given component
Content
17.2.10T1 Elements of cost
i) Material cost
ii) Labour cost
iii) Expenses (direct
and indirect)
17.2.10T2 Cost
17.2.10T3 Break-even point
- Plot
18.2.0 ENGINEERING DRAWING AND DESIGN
18.2.1 Introduction
This module unit is designed to equip the trainee with the
necessary skills and attitudes in Engineering drawing and design.
The module unit is intended to provide trainee with fundamentals

of Engineering drawing and design using traditional equipment.
The knowledge gained will be used in designing various products
in structural fabrication and tool room processes.
Trainees undertaking this module unit will require knowledge of

basic engineering drawing.

understand the principles of mechanical engineering components
understand the principles of Mechanical Engineering design
design a product
draw assembly drawings
Engineering Drawing and Design

Hrs
18.2.1 Gears  Uses of gears 2
 Constructional
Features
18.2.2 Screw Threads  Helix 6
 Types of screws
threads
 Parts of screw
18.2.3 Cams  Types of CAM 6
followers
 Types of CAM:
 Motion graphs:
 Cam profiles
18.2.4 Bearings  Bearings and Bushes 2
 Bearing Applications
18.2.5 Limits and Fits  Definition of terms of 4
terms
 Types of Fits
 Dimensioning using
Limits and fits
 Application of limits
and fits
18.2.6 Fasteners and  Temporary fasteners 2
Locking  Permanent Fasteners:
Devices
18.2.7 Assembly  Orthographic Exploded 16
Drawing views
 Pictorial Exploded
views
 Parts list
 Sectional views:
 Hatching methods
18.2.8 Engineering  Principles of design 6
Design  Design consideration
 Functional object
 Risk management
 Material estimation
and costing
 Cost benefit analysis
18.2.9 Design of  Definition of jigs and 12
Jigs and fixtures
Fixtures  Elements of jigs
 Functions of jigs and
fixtures
 Design steps
 Degree of freedom of
location
 Design jigs and fixture
 General design
principles
 Application of jigs and
fixtures
 Machining on lathe
18.2.10 Geometrical  Definition of 6
Tolerance Geometrical
tolerancing
 Principles of
tolerancing
 Application exercises
18.2.11 Product  Feasibility studies 4
Design and  Design
Specification  Factors affecting
product design
Total Time 66
18.2.1 SPUR GEAR Suggested Learning Resources

i) Engine gear models
Theory ii) Textbooks
iii) The internet
By the end of the sub 18.2.2 SCREW THREADS
module the trainee
should be able to: Theory
a) state the uses of spur
gears in engineering 18.2.2T0 Specific Objectives
b) construct a spur gear By the end of the sub
c) calculate the gear module the trainee
data from the given should be able to:
information a) construct helices
with reference to
18.2.1C Competence single and multi-start
The trainee should threads
have the ability to b) sketch and label the
design involute gear parts of a screw
teeth thread
c) identify different
Content types of screw
18.2.1T1 Uses of gears threads
i) Torque
reduction/multiplicati 18.2.2C Competence
on The trainee should have
ii) Motion transmission the ability to draw single
iii) Speed start and multi start
reduction/increase helices
iv) Motion direction
change Content
18.2.1T2 Constructional Features 18.2.2T1 Helix
18.2.1T3 Gear data calculation i) Single-start thread
i) Pitch circle diameter ii) Multi-start thread
ii) Module 18.2.2T2 Types of screws threads
iii) Pressure angle i) V- threads
iv) Clearance ii) Square threads
v) Base circle iii) ACME
vi) Addendum iv) Buttress
vii) Dedendum 18.2.2T3 Parts of screw thread
i) Pitch
ii) Crest
iii) Root iii) Simple harmonic
iv) Diameter motion
iv) Combined profile of
Suggested Learning Resources the above motions
i) Models
ii) Textbooks Suggested Learning Resources
iii) The internet i) Engine camshaft
model
18.2.3 CAMS ii) Cam lobes model
iii) Textbooks
Theory iv) The internet
18.2.3T0 Specific Objectives 18.2.4 BEARINGS

module the trainee Theory
should be able:
a) explain the functions 18.2.4T0 Specific Objectives
of a cam By the end of the sub
b) draw various types of module the trainee
cam followers should be able:
c) construct various a) explain the need for a
cam profiles for bearing
given motions b) identify and sketch
various types of
18.2.3C Competence bearings
The trainee should have c) select a suitable
the ability to design bearing for use in a
cam profiles for given part of a
different types of vehicle
engine
18.2.5C Competence
Content The trainee should have
18.2.3T1 Functions of a cam the ability to select and
i) Types use bearings
ii) Radial disc
iii) Cylindrical Content
18.2.3T2 Cam followers 18.2.4T1 Purpose of bearing
i) Knife edge 18.2.4T2 Bearings and Bushes
ii) Roller i) Ball bearing
iii) Flat follower ii) Roller bearing
18.2.3T3 Cam profiles iii) Taper
i) Uniform velocity iv) Needle
ii) Uniform acceleration v) Plane
and retardation vi) Bush bearing
18.2.4T3 Bearing Applications
i) Gearboxes vi) Hole-basis system
ii) Wheels and tyres vii) Shaft-basis
iii) Engines system
iv) Lathe 18.2.5T2 Types of Fits
v) Miller i) Clearance
ii) Transition
Suggested Learning Resources iii) Interference
i) Engine models iv) Applications
ii) Gearbox models v) Engineering design
iii) Textbooks and manufacture
iv) The internet 18.2.5T3 Dimensioning
i) The BS 4500 A &
18.2.5 LIMITS AND FITS BS 4500B charts
ii) Tolerancing
Theory
18.2.5T0 Specific Objectives i) Text Books
By the end of the sub ii) The BS 4500 A &
module the trainee BS 4500B Charts
should be able to: iii) Internet
a) define limits and fits
b) identify and apply 18.2.6 FASTENERS AND
the various types LOCKING DEVICES
fits
c) use BS 4500, Kenya Theory
Bureau of Standard
and ISO to 18.2.6T0 Specific Objectives
dimension drawings By the end of the sub
module the trainee
The trainee should have a) identify and draw
the ability to apply limits temporary fastening
and fits in mechanical devices
designs b) identify and draw of
permanent fastening
Content devices
18.2.5T1 Definition of terms of c) sketch and draw
terms types of locking
i) Upper and lower devices
limit
ii) Tolerance 18.2.6C Competence
iii) Unilateral The trainee should have
iv) Bilateral the ability to:
v) Nominal size
(Basic size )
i) Differentiate between iii) The internet
permanent and
temporary fasteners 18.2.7 ASSEMBLY
ii) Sketch and draw DRAWING
screws, nuts bolts
and rivets Theory

18.2.6T1 Temporary fasteners By the end of the sub
i) Screws module the trainee
ii) Cap screws should be able to:
iii) Countersunk screws a) draw orthographic
iv) Grub screws projection from
v) Hexagonal head working drawing and
screws assembly drawing
vi) Nuts and bolts b) draw various types of
vii) Hexagonal sectional views
viii) Square c) draw sectional views,
ix) Round plan and elevation of
x) Flat an assembled
xi) Pins component
xii) Tapered cotter d) produce a parts list
xiii) Split pins for an assembled
xiv)Keys and keyways component
xv) Woodruff
xvi)Straight 18.2.7C Competence
xvii) Tapered The trainee should have
xviii) Round the ability to:
xix)Feather i) Read and interpret
xx) Parallel rectangle exploded views
18.2.6T2 Permanent Fasteners: ii) Produce working
i) Rivets drawings
ii) Snap head iii) Produce sectional
iii) Pan head views of details that
iv) Round countersunk cannot be seen from
v) Counter sunk orthographic
vi) Hexagon slotted grub iv) Prepare parts list
screw
18.2.6T3 Locking devices Content
18.2.7T1 Orthographic
Suggested Learning Resources i) Plan
i) Fastening devices ii) End elevation
models iii) Front elevation
ii) Text books and 18.2.7T2 Sectional views:
charts
i) Off -set sectional c) design functional
views objects in
ii) Sectional front Engineering
elevation d) manage potential
iii) End sectional design risks
elevation e) estimate and cost
iv) Sectional plan materials for a design
v) Half – sectional f) carry out a cost
views benefit analysis for
vi) Aligned sectional the design
view
vii) Revolved sectional 18.2.8C Competence
views The trainee should have
viii) Broken out the ability to:
sectional views i) Practice Design
18.2.7T3 Hatching methods principles that meets
i) Hatching line user requirements
ii) Shading ii) Carry out design
18.2.7T4 Parts list strategies that meet
i) Part number both the deadline and
ii) Part name estimated budget
iii) Part material
iv) Number off Content
v) Description 18.2.8T1 Principles of design
i) Design brief
Suggested Learning Resources ii) Analysis
i) Textbooks iii) Synthesis
ii) Drawing charts iv) Evaluation
iii) The internet v) Implementation
18.2.8T2 Design consideration
18.2.8 ENGINEERING i) Ergonomics
DESIGN ii) Materials
iii) Manufacturing
Theory methods
iv) Casting
18.2.8T0 Specific Objectives v) Machining
By the end of the sub vi) Sintering
module the trainee vii) Fabrication
should be able to: viii) Hot and cold
a) explain principles of working
design 18.2.8T3 Functional object
b) describe i) User requirements
considerations to be 18.2.8T4 Risk Management
observed in design i) Risk identification
work ii) Risk evaluation
iii) Risk reduction and 18.2.9C Competence
minimization The trainee should have
18.2.8T5 Estimation and costing the ability to:
i) Material Estimation i) Fabricate a jig for a
ii) Tasks given fabrication
iii) Resources design
iv) Manufacturing ii) Design a jig for a
costing given task
v) Materials
vi) Labor Content
vii) Overheads 18.2.9T1 Definition of jigs and
18.2.8T6 Cost benefit analysis fixtures
18.2.9T2 Elements of jigs
Suggested Learning Resources i) Body
i) Text books ii) Locating elements
ii) The internet iii) Tool guide
iii) The industry iv) Clamping elements
18.2.9T3 Functions of jigs and
fixtures
18.2.9T0 DESIGN OF JIGS i) Reduction of costs of
AND FIXTURES operation
ii) Increase in
Theory production
18.2.9T4 Design steps
18.2.9T0 Specific Objectives i) Sequence of the
By the end of the sub operation
module unit, the trainee ii) Location systems
should be able to: iii) Clamping system
a) define a jig and a 18.2.9T5 Degree of freedom of
fixture location
b) explain the elements i) Two linear and rotary
of Jigs and fixtures movement on axis
c) list functions of jigs OX
and fixtures ii) Two linear and rotary
d) list the design steps movement on axis
of jigs and fixtures OY
e) state the degree of iii) Two linear and rotary
freedom as applied to movement on axis
jigs and fixtures OZ
f) design jigs and 18.2.9T6 Design jigs and fixture
fixtures for various i) Milling
applications ii) Drilling
iii) Machining on lathe
iv) General design
principles
v) Location methods 18.2.10C Competence
vi) Clamping methods The trainee should have
vii) Loading and the ability to apply
unloading process geometric tolerancing to
viii) Work produce a given design
supports task
ix) Stability and rigidity
x) Clearance for chips Content
xi) Coolant to the cutting 18.2.10T1 Definition of
edge geometrical tolerancing
xii) Application of jigs 18.2.10T2 Principles of
and fixtures tolerancing
xiii) Milling i) Straightness
xiv)Drilling ii) Parallelism
xv) Machining on lathe iii) Flatness
iv) Squareness
Suggested Learning Resources v) Roundness
i) Charts vi) Datum
ii) Assorted jigs and vii) Cylindricity
fixtures 18.2.10T3 Application exercises
iii) Work pieces
18.2.10 GEOMETRICAL Resources
TOLERANCING i) BS 308 geometrical
tolerancing charts
Theory ii) Assorted drawing
instruments
18.2.10T0 Specific Objectives iii) Trainers manuals
module unit, the trainee 18.2.11 PRODUCT DESIGN
should be able to: AND
a) define geometrical ECIFICATIONS
tolerancing
b) state the general Theory
principles of
geometrical 18.2.11T0 Specific Objectives
tolerancing By the end of the
c) identify, draw and sub module unit,
apply recommended the trainee should
symbols of be able to:
tolerancing a) perform feasibility
studies on simple
designs
b) describe the design
specifications of a
product
c) describe factors
affecting product
design
Content
18.2.11T1 Feasibility studies
i) Aim of feasibility
studies
ii) Functions of the
design manufacture
iii) Methods of design
manufacture
18.2.11T2 Design
i) Customer
requirements
ii) Company
requirements
18.2.11T3 Factors affecting
product design
i) Material appearance
(aesthetic value)
ii) Method of
production
18.2.11C Competence
the ability to design and
specify the product using
standard symbols
Resources
i) Various designed
products
ii) wheel barrow
iii) screw jack
iv) textbooks
19.2.0 ENGINE TECHNOLOGY
The course module is designed to equip the trainees with
knowledge, skills and attitudes that will enable them carry out
general maintenance and reconditioning vehicle engines.
The graduate of this module will be able to work in the formal

and vehicle industry as a competent technician in vehicle service
and maintenance.

By the end of this module the trainee will be able to:
a) understand the working principles of a petrol engine.
b) understand the working principles of fuel and engine
cooling systems.
c) observe safety precautions while handling vehicle engines.
d) understand the working principles of a diesel engine.
e) perform the engine tune up and test for efficiency.
ENGINE TECHNOLOGY
Module Sub-Module Content Time Hrs
Unit
T P Total
19.2.1 Engines  Types of Engines 6 18 24

 Construction
 Combustion chamber
designs
 Engine balancing
19.2.2 Lubrication  Terminologies 4 12 16
 Lubricants
 Methods of
lubrication
 Lubrication
components
19.2.3 Cooling  Types of cooling 4 10 14
systems
 Air cooled
 Liquid cooled
 Cooling system
components
19.2.4 S.I. fuel  Layout 12 20 32
systems  Simple carburettor
 Methods of mixture
correction
 Constant choke
carburettor
 Variable choke
carburettor
 Manifold designs
 Air cleaners
 Silencers
 Petrol injection
systems
 Fuel pumps
 Liquefied petroleum
gas
 (2PG)
 Cold starting devices
 Emission control
19.2.5 C.I. fuel  Layout 12 18 30
system  Injector pump
 Inline pump
 DPA pump
 Governors
 Pressure time
injection
 system
 Electronic diesel
injection
 system
 Cold start devices
 Supercharging
19.2.6 Special  Rotary engine 10 16 26
Engines  Striving engine
 Gas turbine engine
 Hybrid engine
 Solar engine
19.2.1 ENGINES i) Direct injection
ii) Indirect injection
19.2.1T0 Specific Objectives 19.2.1T5 Engine balancing
By the end of this sub i) Need for engine
module unit, the trainee balancing
should be able to: ii) Methods of engine
a) explain the operating balancing
principles of various
types of vehicle Practice
engines
b) describe the 19.2.1P0 Specific Objectives
construction of engine By the end of this sub
components. module unit, the trainee
c) describe various should be able to:
engine valve a) overhaul a S.I. engine
arrangements and b) overhaul a C.I. engine
their limitations c) rebore engine cylinder
d) describe the block
construction of types
of combustion Content
chambers 19.2.1P1 S.I Engine overhaul
e) discuss engine i) Cylinder head
balancing ii) Removal
iii)Dismantling
19.2.1 Competence iv) Inspection
The trainee should have v) Decarbonising
the ability to: vi) Cutting and re facing
i) overhaul a S.I and valve seats
C.I. engines vii) Replacement of valve
ii) rebore engine seats
cylinder block 19.2.1P2 C.I Engine Overhaul
19.2.1P3 Cylinder block
Content i) Pistons
19.2.1T1 Operating principles of ii) removal
various vehicle engines iii)inspection
iii)Four stroke (S.I. & iv) measurements
C.I.) engines v) replacement of rings
iv) Two stroke (S.I. & vi) Crankshaft and
C.I.) engines bearings
19.2.1T2 Engine construction and vii) removal
components layout viii) inspection
19.2.1T3 Engine Valve ix) measurements
arrangements x) Cylinders
 Limitations xi) inspection
19.2.1T4 Combustion chambers xii) measurements
xiii) Seals and gaskets iii) Wet sump
xiv)Inspection iv) Dry sump
xv) Replacement
Practice
19.2.2 LUBRICATION
19.2. P0 Specific Objectives
19.2.2T0 Specific Objectives By the end of this sub
By the end of this sub module unit, the trainee
should be able to: a) overhaul an oil pump
a) define the various b) service the
lubrication lubrication system
terminologies
b) explain the need for
engine lubrication 19.2.2C Competence
c) sketch the basic The trainee should have
engine lubrication the ability to Service the
layout engine lubrication
d) describe the methods system
of lubrication
Content
Content 19.2. P1 Oil pumps
19.2.2T1 Lubrication i) Gear pump
terminologies ii) Vane pump
i) Flow iii) Rotor pump
ii) Viscosity 19.2. P2 Servicing the lubrication
iii) Multigrade oil system
iv) SAE number i) Drain plug
v) Oiliness ii) Oil filter
19.2.2T2 Need for engine iii) Lubricating oil
lubrication
i) Friction Suggested Learning Resources
ii) Cooling i) Charts
iii) Cleaning ii) Repair manuals
19.2.2T3 Lubrication system iii) Text books
layout iv) Vehicle engine
i) Sump pan
ii) Oil pressure relief 19.2. 3 COOLING SYSTEM
valve
iii) Gallery 19.2. 3T0 Specific Objectives
iv) Oil pump By the end of the sub
v) Oil filter module unit, the trainee
19.2.2T4 Methods of lubrication should be able to:
i) Pressure feed a) describe the types of
ii) Splash cooling systems
b) explain the operation By the end of the
of cooling systems module unit, the trainee
c) describe construction should be able to:
of cooling system a) identify components
components of cooling systems
b) diagnose system faults
19.2.3C Competence c) service the cooling
The trainee should have the systems
ability to d) observe safety in
i) Locate cooling system cooling systems
components
ii) Identify faults Content
iii) Maintain cooling 19.2.3P1 Components
system identification
iv) Observe safety 19.2.3P2 System fault diagnosis
i) Pressure tests
Content ii) Thermost tests
19.2.3T1 Types of cooling iii) Leakages
systems iv) Pump faults
i) Air cooled 19.2.3P3 Service of cooling
ii) Liquid cooled systems
iii) Comparison of i) Coolant level
cooling systems ii) Antifreeze mixing
19.2.3T2 Operation of cooling iii) Leakage repairs
systems 19.2.3P4 Safety observation
i) Air cooled i) Hot coolant
ii) Liquid cooled ii) Antifreeze
iii) sealed system
iv) pressurized system Suggested Learning Resources
19.2.3T3 Cooling system i) Tools
Components ii) Equipment
i) Pumps iii) Cooling systems
ii) Thermostats iv) L.C.D.
iii) Radiators v) Manuals
iv) Pressure caps
v) Cooling fans 19.2.4 S.I. FUEL SYSTEMS
vi) electric
vii) viscous Theory
viii) Coolant
ix) Anti-freeze mixtures 19.2.4T0 Specific Objectives
By the end of this sub
Practice module unit, the trainee
should be able to:
a) sketch the layout of operation of the
spark ignition fuel liquefied petroleum
systems gas (LPG) systems
b) describe the l) describe the
construction and construction and
operation of a simple operation of various
carburettor cold start devices
c) describe the different m) describe the various
methods of mixture methods of emission
correction in a control
constant choke
carburettor 19.2.4C Competence
d) explain the The trainee should have
construction and the ability to:
operation of the i) Overhaul carburettors
constant choke ii) Service inlet and
carburettor exhaust manifolds
e) explain the iii) Service fuel injection
construction and iv) Carryout engine
operation of the testing
variable choke
carburettor Content
f) explain the 19.2.4T1 Layout
construction of inlet i) Gravity feed
and exhaust manifolds ii) Pressure feed
in relation to 19.2.4T2 Construction and
performance of the operation of a simple
engine carburettor
g) describe the 19.2.4T3 Methods of mixture
construction and correction
operation of various i) Air bleed
types of air cleaners compensation
h) describe the ii) Compensating set
construction and iii) Accelerator pump
operation of exhaust iv) Economy devices
silencers v) Idling system
i) describe the types and vi) Enrichment devices
layout of petrol 19.2.4T4 Constant choke
injection systems carburettor
j) describe the i) Single barrel
construction and ii) Twin choke
operation of the fuel carburettor
pumps 19.2.4T5 Variable choke
k) describe the carburettor
construction and 19.2.4T6 Manifold designs
i) Inlet manifolds h) carry out engine
ii) Exhaust manifolds testing
19.2.4T7 Air cleaners
i) Wet type Content
ii) Dry type 19.2.4P1 Fuel system components
19.2.4T8 Exhaust silencers 19.2.4P2 Fuel lift pumps
19.2.4T9 Fuel pumps 19.2.4P3 Carburettor maintenance
i) Mechanical pumps i) Overhaul
ii) Electrical pump ii) Tune-up
19.2.4T10 Petrol injection systems 19.2.4P4 Servicing fuel injection
i) Layout system
ii) Types i) K-type injection
iii) Petrol injection system
system components ii) D-type injection
19.2.4T11 Liquefied petroleum gas system
system iii) L-type injection
i) Construction system
ii) Operation 19.2.4P5 Service inlet manifolds
19.2.4T12 Cold starting devices i) Air leaks
i) S.I. engine devices ii) Leaks
ii) C.I. engine 19.2.4P6 Repair exhaust
devices manifolds and mufflers
19.2.4T13 Emission control i) Leaks
19.2.4P7 Identification of
Practice liquefied petroleum gas
system
19.2.4P0 Specific Objectives 19.2.4P8 Engine testing
By the end of this sub i) Morse test
module unit, the trainee ii) Dynamometer test
should be able to: iii) Engine emission test
a) replace and repair fuel iv) Road test
system components v) Tune-up
b) overhaul carburettors
c) tune up a twin Suggested Learning Resources
carburettor engine i) Textbook/workshop
d) service inlet manuals
manifolds ii) Models
e) service exhaust iii) Engines
manifolds and iv) Dynamometers
mufflers
f) service a fuel 19.2.5T C.I. FUEL SYSTEM
injections system
g) identify liquefied Theory
petroleum gas system
components 19.2.5T0 Specific Objectives
By the end of the ii) Fitters
module unit, the trainee 19.2.5T2 Injectors
should be able to: i) Multi-hole
a) describe the layout of ii) Single-hole
diesel fuel system iii) Pintaux
b) explain the operation iv) Pintle
of injectors 19.2.5T3 Inline pump
c) describe the i) Construction
construction operation ii) Operation
of inline pump 19.2.5T4 D.P.A pump
d) describe the i) Construction
construction and ii) Operation
operation of DPA 19.2.5T5 Types of governors
pump i) Mechanical
e) explain types of ii) Pneumatic
governors iii) Hydraulic
f) describe the 19.2.5T6 Pressure time injection
construction and system
operation of pressure i) Layout
time injection ii) Operation
system 19.2.5T7 Electronic diesel
g) describe the injection system
construction of i) Layout
electronic diesel ii) Operation
injection system iii) filling phase
h) explain types of cold iv) spill phase
start devices v) injection phase
i) describe the types of vi) pressure drop phase
supercharging systems 19.2.5T8 Cold start devices
i) Glow plugs
19.2.5C Competence ii) Manifold heat
The trainee should have operated thermostat
the ability to: iii) KI gas
i) Trace faults in C.I 19.2.5T9 Supercharging
fuel systems i) Fundamentals of
ii) Overhaul C.I fuel supercharging
systems components ii) Boost pressure
iii) Carry out tests and iii) Superchargers
adjustments in C.I fuel iv) screw
systems v) roots
vi) Turbochargers
Content vii) inter cooling
19.2.5T1 Layout of C.I. fuel viii) waste gates
system
i) Lift pump Practice
x) Timing
19.2.5P0 Specific Objectives xi) Bleeding
By the end of the 19.2.5P5 Servicing of
module unit, the trainee Superchargers
should be able to: i) Overhaul
a) identify components ii) Pressure test
of diesel fuel system iii) Fault diagnosis
b) diagnose faults in iv) Service
diesel fuel system
c) service injectors in Suggested Learning Resources
C.I. fuel system i) Workshop manuals
d) service fuel injection ii) Pumps
pumps iii) Test rigs
e) service superchargers
23.3.6 SPECIAL ENGINES
Content
19.2.5P1 Components of a diesel 23.3.6T0 Specific Objectives
fuel system By the end of this sub
i) Pump module unit, the trainee
ii) Filter should be able to:
iii) Injectors a) explain the
iv) Pressure lines construction and
v) Governor operation of the
19.2.5P2 Fault diagnoses in C.I. various rotary engine
fuel systems b) describe the
i) Fault tracing construction and
ii) leakages operation of the
iii) loss of power sterling engine
iv) clogged filters/injector c) explain the
19.2.5P3 Servicing of fuel construction and
Injectors operation of the gas
i) Engine test turbine engine
ii) Test rig d) describe the
iii) Nozzle cleaning construction and
19.2.5P4 Servicing of fuel operation of a hybrid
injection Pumps engines
i) Inline pump e) explain the
ii) Overhaul construction and
iii) Calibration operation of a solar
iv) Phasing engine
v) Timing f) explain the emerging
vi) Bleeding trends in engine
vii) DPA pump technology
viii) Overhaul
ix) Pressure tests 19.3.6C Competence
The trainee should have c) identify the various
the ability to: parts of a gas turbine
i) Differentiate correctly engine
between Wankel and
Cottage loaf rotary Content
engines 19.3.6P1 Rotary engines
ii) Repair on service a i) Cottage loaf
rotary engine ii) Wankel
iii) Diagnose faults in gas 19.3.6P2 Servicing and repairing
turbine engines of a rotary engine
Content 19.3.6P3 Gas turbine engine
19.3.6T1 Operation of Rotary overhaul
engines i) Simple shaft gas
i) Cottage loaf turbine
ii) Wankel ii) Two-shaft gas turbine
iii) construction
iv) operation Suggested Learning Resources
19.3.6.T2 Construction and i) Models
operation of sterling ii) Internet
engines iii) Textbooks
19.3.6T3 Gas turbine engines iv) Charts
working principles
i) Construction
ii) Operation
19.3.6T4 Working principles of
hybrid engines
i) Construction
ii) Operation
19.3.6T5 Solar powered engine
19.2.6T6 Emerging trends in
engine technology
Practice

By the end of this sub
should be able to:
a) identify the various
rotary engines
b) service and replace
worn out parts on a
rotary engine
20.2.0 VEHICLES BODYWORK
This module unit is designed to give special attention to panel
beating and body work to enable the trainee cover the complete
collision or accident repair and new work body building
procedures and processes.
20.2.02 G ENERAL OBJECTIVES

By the end of the module unit the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the construction of vehicle body layouts
b) assess and repair accident vehicles
c) design and fabricate vehicle bodies
d) observe safety while working in work place
VEHICLES BODYWORK
unit T P Total
20.2.1 Panel Beating  Tools, Equipment and 12 46 58
materials
 Body designs
 Body structure
 Chassis alignment
 Panel beating
procedures
 Fillers
 Hardeners
 Body solder
20.2.2 Spray  Automotive paints 10 34 44
Painting  Spot putty
 Colour code
 Colour mixing
 Painting procedures
 Polishing
 Waxing
 Valeting
20.2.3 Vehicle  Upholstery tools 10 32 42
Upholstery  Adhesives
 Materials
 Quality control
20.2.1T PANEL BEATING xi) car lifts
xii) portable crane
20.2.1T0 Specific Objectives xiii) hydraulic press
By the end of the sub xiv)power jack
module unit, the trainee xv) body frame
should be able to: strengtheners
a) explain the tools and xvi)Portable tools and
equipment used in equipment
panel beating xvii) floor anchor/pot type
b) explain types of xviii) stationery/
vehicle body designs floor rack
c) describe vehicle body xix)bench/universal
parts 20.2.1T2 Vehicle body designs
d) explain types vehicle i) Small cars
body damage to be ii) saloon
assessed iii) hatchback
e) explain the methods iv) estates
used in chassis v) coupe
alignment vi) limousine
f) describe the materials vii) Light trucks and vans
used in panel beating viii) box vans
g) explain the panel ix) pantenichons
beating procedures. x) Luton’s
xi) open vans Trucks
20.2.1C Competence xii) types o f trucks
The trainee should have xiii) normal control
the ability to xiv)forward control
carry out valuation xv) sleeper cabs
weld panels and produce xvi)half cabins
quality profiles xvii) articulated vehicles
xviii) tankers
Content xix)Coaches & buses
20.2.1T1 Tools and equipment xx) town buses
used in panel beating xxi)coaches
i) Bumping hammers xxii) double Decker
ii) Dolly blocks xxiii) intercity
iii) Bumping spoons buses
iv) Body spoons 20.2.1T3 Vehicle body parts
v) Pry/pick tools i) Bonnet
vi) Caulking tools ii) Boot
vii) Screw equipped slide iii) Firewall/bulkhead
hammers iv) Sill
viii) Cutting tools v) Pillars
ix) Body file vi) Cant rails
x) Hydraulic body tools vii) Panels
viii) Door skins xiii) hardeners & fillers
ix) Scuttle xiv) Filing
x) Drip moulding xv) Washing
xi) Valance xvi) Panel adjustments
20.2.1T4 Vehicle damages methods
assessed xvii) Shims
i) Types of damage xviii) Slotted holes
ii) minor damage xix) Floating anchor
iii) major damage plates
iv) Technical report xx) Adjustable stops
20.2.1T5 Chassis alignment xxi) Stickers
methods & checks xxii) Suggested
i) Wheel base check Learning
ii) Chord alignment Resources
check xxiii) reference material
iii) Plumb line xxiv) manuals
check/pendant and xxv) LCD
vertical rod
iv) Laser beam Practice
v) Centre gauge
20.2.1T16 Materials used on panel 20.2.1P0 Specific Objectives
beating By the end of the sub
i) Sheet metal module unit, the trainee
ii) plain should be able to:
iii) ribbed a) select tools for
iv) Cloth appropriate tasks
v) Abrasives b) carry out chassis
vi) Water checks and alignments
vii) Soaps c) repair a damaged
viii) Fillers and hardeners panel
20.2.1T7 Panel beating process d) observe safety in the
i) Window and trim panel shop.
stripping
ii) Paint removal Content
iii) chemical means 20.2.1P1 Selection of tools and
iv) mechanical means equipment for
v) Metal i) pulling/stretching
straightening panels
vi) stretching ii) absorbing blows
vii) shrinking iii) cutting
viii) Welding & cutting 20.2.1P2 Chassis alignment
ix) Sanding checks and alignments
x) machine i) Alignment checks
xi) hand ii) Type of damage
xii) Dent filling iii) Use of alignment jigs
iv) Report writing The trainee should have
20.2.1P3 Repair of a damaged the ability to:
panel i) Select tools,
i) assessment of equipment and
damages materials for a given
ii) stripping of trim, task
panels and windows ii) Carryout a spray
iii) Paint removal painting task on a
iv) Panel stretching, damaged panel
shrinking, crowning iii) Observe safety
and joining/cutting
v) Dent filling Content
vi) Filing 20.2.2T1 Tools & equipment
vii) Washing i) Spray guns
viii) Panel adjustments ii) Gravity feed
ix) Fitting of windows & iii) Pressure feed
weather-strips iv) Suction
20.2.1P4 Safety observation v) Compressors
i) Tool and equipment vi) Strainers
safety vii) Computerized paint
ii) Personal care mixer
viii) Spectrophotometer
Suggested learning/teaching ix) Spreaders
Resources 20.2.2T2 Materials
i) panel beating tools i) Cloth/paper towels
and equipment ii) Tack rags
ii) vehicle body iii) Paint paddle
iii) alignment manuals iv) Spot and glaze putty
v) Sanding blocks, paper
20.2.2 SPRAY PAINTING and tapes
vi) Rubbing compounds
20.2.2T0 Specific Objectives vii) Polishes and wax
By the end of the sub viii) Paints
module unit, the trainee ix) Undercoats
should be able to: x) Thinners
a) describe tools, xi) Guide coat
equipment used in 20.2.2T3 Spray painting process
spray painting i) Surface preparation
b) explain the materials ii) Colour coding
used in spray painting iii) Colour mixing
c) explain the spray iv) Painting sequence
painting process. v) Safety in handling
paints and lacquer
20.2.2C Competence
Practice 20.2.3 VEHICLES
UPHOLSTERY
By the end of the sub 20.2.3T0 Specific Objectives
module unit, the trainee By the end of the sub
a) select tools, should be able to;
equipment and a) describe tools and
materials used in equipment used in
spray painting upholstery
b) spray paint a vehicle b) explain types of
c) observe safety in the vehicle seats and seat
spray painting shop. belts
c) describe types of
Content joining agents used in
20.2.2P1 Selection of tools, car upholstery
equipment and materials d) describe materials
for spray painting tasks suitable for use in car
i) Cleaning upholstery
ii) Rubbing e) explain quality control
iii) Painting measures in fitting car
iv) Polishing upholstery
20.2.2P2 Spray painting process
i) Selection of colours 20.2.2C Competence
from colour charts The trainee should have
ii) Mixing of colours to a the ability to:
standard i) select tool and
iii) Adjustments of spray materials
guns, paint mixers ii) fit finished upholstery
iv) Surface preparation onto vehicle panel
v) Painting sequence iii) assess quality of
vi) Polishing finished product
vii) Tinting of windows iv) use materials
20.2.2P3 Safety in the paint shop economically
i) Personal safety
ii) Equipment Content
iii) Paints & lacquers 20.2.3T1 Tools and equipment for
upholstery work
Suggested learning resources i) Sewing machines
i) Industrial visits ii) Web stretchers
ii) Manuals iii) Ripping chassis
iii) Colour code charts iv) Cutting tools
iv) Vehicle bodies v) Joining tools
20.2.3T2 Types of Seats
i) Bench
ii) Bucket a) select appropriate
iii) Seat belts tools, equipments and
iv) Continuous lap materials to suit given
v) Lap task.
vi) Shoulders b) fit upholstery a
20.2.3T3 Joining agents in car vehicles
upholstery work c) observe safety in
i) Epoxy resin upholstery shop
ii) Polyvinyl chloride d) maintain quality in
(PVC) adhesives fitting car upholstery
iii) Adhesive caulking
materials Content
(urethane/polysulfide 20.2.3P1 Selection of tools,
tapes) equipment and materials
iv) Screws & rivets for selected task
v) Pins i) vehicle roofs
vi) Threads ii) seats
20.2.3T4 Materials suitable for iii)floors
use in car upholstery iv) door trim
i) Poly Vinyl Chloride v) dashboard
(PVCS) vi) application of
ii) Leather adhesives, staples,
iii) Fabric hems
iv) Wood 20.2.3P2 Fitting of upholstery in
v) Foam a vehicle
vi) Wool 20.2.3P3 Safety
vii) Meta i) Personal
20.2.3T5 Quality control ii) Material storage
i) Types of quality 20.2.3P4 Quality control
control i) Check, finished
ii) Need for quality product
control ii) raw materials
iii) workmanship
Suggested learning resources iv) Rectification of faults
i) Text books &
bulletins Suggested learning resources
ii) Various material i) Manuals
(leather, PVCs, pins) ii) Selection charts
iii)Upholstery materials
Practice tools & equipment

should be able to:
ENGINEERING
MODULE III
MODULE III
INTRODUCTION
This module is designed for trainees who meet the minimum entry requirement for
Diploma in Automotive Engineering.
The module unit is designed with the necessary knowledge, skills and attitudes
that will meet the needs of the vehicle industry in the area of auto electrical and
electronics and vehicle and vehicle components designs.
General Objectives
By the end of the module, the trainee should be able to:
a) use AutoCAD to design vehicle components
b) apply mechanical technology in understanding vehicle dynamics
c) design and execute a project related to the vehicle trade
d) appreciate safety in vehicle workshops and other work places
e) dispose materials in a safe manner
Key Competence
By the end of the module, the trainee should demonstrate the ability to:
Diagnose and repair electrical and electronics faults in vehicles
Design functional vehicle electric circuits
Units in this Module

21.3.0 Computer Aided Design (AutoCAD)
22.3.0 Thermodynamics
23.3.0 Fluid Mechanics
24.3.0 Control Systems and Instrumentation
25.3.0 Mathematics III
26.3. Auto Electric and Electronic
27.3.0 Trade Project
21.3.0 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN (AUTOCAD)
Computer Aided design (CAD) involves the use of relevant
computer software to design and draw engineering components.
The instructional approach will lay emphasis on practical and
project work. The assessment will be basically theory and
practical.

a) understand the principle and use of computers to design and
draw engineering components
b) apply the relevant design software to produce a drawing
c) operate various computer design systems used in Auto CAD
Computer Aided Design (AutoCAD)

Unit Hrs
21.3.1 Introduction to  Communication 2 6 8
AutoCAD  Advantages
 Interpretation
 Technology
21.3.2 Starting  Starting AutoCAD 1 7 8
AutoCAD  Creating an
AutoCAD drawing
 Saving an
AutoCAD drawing
 Opening an
AutoCAD drawing
21.3.3 AutoCAD  Drawing tools 1 9 10
Interface  Object snap tools
Customization  Polar tracking
 Dimension styles
 Zoom tool
21.3.4 Drawing and  Drawing tools 1 3 4
Modifying  Modifying tools
Tools
21.3.5 Layers and  Layers 1 3 4
Object  Object properties
Properties
21.3.6 Drawing &  AutoCAD scale 2 6 8
Editing 2D  Draw tools and
Geometric menu
Objects  Modify tools and
Menu
 Command line
 Zoom and Pan

21.3.7 Dimensioning  Types of 1 7 8
and Texting dimensioning tools
 Dimension style
manager
 Texting
21.3.8 Hatching and  Hatch methods 1 3 4
Shading  Hatch edit
21.3.9 Isometric  Drawing an 1 7 8
Drawing isometric circle
 Drawing an
isometric object
21.3.10 Assembly  Assembly 2 4 6
Drawing and  Sectioning
Sectioning
21.3.11 3D Modelling  3D Modelling 1 5 6
planes
 Modelling methods
 Editing methods
21.3.12 Creating  Elevation 1 5 6
Elevations extraction
 Use of viewpoints
21.3.13 Shading &  Shading 1 3 4
Rendering  Rendering
 Raster images
21.3.14 Laying Out  Plot layout 1 3 4
and Plotting  Plotter setting
 Plotting
Total Time 17 71 88
21.3.1 INTRODUCTION TO
AUTOCAD 21.3.2 STARTING
AUTOCAD
Theory
Practice
should be able to: module unit, the
a) communicate ideas trainee should be able
through the use of to:
AutoCAD s a) start AutoCAD
software as a program
drawing media b) create, save and
b) outline advantages open a drawing
of AutoCAD as a
drafting software 21.3.2C Competence
c) read and interpret The trainee should have
AutoCAD working the ability to create, save
drawings and open an AutoCAD
d) accommodate new file.
technological
changes in drawing Content
21.3.2P1 Starting AutoCAD
Content 21.3.2P2 Creating an AutoCAD
21.3.1T1 Communication drawing
i) Design 21.3.2P3 Saving an AutoCAD
ii) Drafting drawing
iii) documentation 21.3.2P4 Opening an AutoCAD
drawing
21.3.1T2 Advantages
i) Accuracy Suggested Learning Resources
ii) Consistency i) Computer installed
iii)Easy storage and with AutoCAD
retrieval ii) textbook
iv) Networking iii) Autodesk
v) Easy amendment website:www.auto
21.3.1T3 Interpretation desk.com
21.3.1T4 Technology
i) New technology
21.3.3 AUTOCAD By the end of the sub-
INTERFACE module unit, the trainee
CUSTOMIZATION should be able to:
a) identify and use the
Practice drawing tools
b) identify and use the
21.3.3P0 Specific Objectives modifying tools
module unit, the trainee 21.3.4C Competence
should be able to: The trainee should have
a) activate the tool the ability to: use the
bars, object snap drawing and modifying
and polar tracking tools
b) set the required
dimension styles Content
21.3.4P1 Drawing tools
21.3.3C Competence i) Line
The trainee should ii) Rectangle
have the ability to set iii) Circle
up a drawing iv) Arc
environment necessary v) Text
for your work vi) Spline
vii) Construction line
Content viii) Polyline
21.3.3P1 Drawing tools ix) Make block
21.3.3P2 Object snap tools x) Insert block
21.3.3P3 Polar tracking xi) Point
21.3.3P4 Dimension styles xii) Hatch
xiii) Region
Suggested Learning Resources 21.3.4P2 Modifying tools
i) Computer installed i) Offset
with AutoCAD ii) Copy
ii) textbook iii) Mirror
iii) Autodesk iv) Erase
website:www.autodes v) Array
k.com vi) Break
vii) Fillet
21.3.4 DRAWING AND viii) Chamfer
MODIFYING TOOLS ix) Explode
x) Scale
Practice xi) Trim
xii) Extend
21.3.4 Specific Objectives xiii) stretch
xiv)Move
Computer installed
with AutoCAD

i) Computer installed 21.3.6 DRAWING &
with AutoCAD EDITING 2D
ii) textbooks GEOMETRIC
iii) Autodesk OBJECTS
website:www.autodes
k.com Practice
21.3.5 LAYERS AND 21.3.6P0 Specific Objectives

OBJECT By the end of the sub-
PROPERTIES module unit, the trainee
should be able to:
Practice a) draw 2D objects to
a scale of 1:1
21.3.5P0 Specific Objectives b) edit the drawing
By the end of the sub- properties 2D
module unit, the trainee objects
should be able to:
a) create layers relevant 21.3.6C Competence
to a given drawing The trainee should
b) apply and edit layers. have the ability to
produce and edit
21.3.5C Competence mechanical drawings
The trainee should have in 2D
the ability to create and
apply layers relevant to Content
a given drawing 21.3.6P1 Drawing in 2D
i) AutoCAD scale
Content ii) Draw tools and
21.3.5P1 Layers menu
i) Name iii) Modify tools and
ii) On Menu
iii) Freeze iv) Command line
iv) Lock v) Zoom and Pan
v) Color
vi) Plot style Suggested Learning Resources
21.3.5P2 Object properties i) Textbooks
i) Line type ii) Computer lab
ii) Line weight iii) Internet
iii) Line color
iv) Autodesk vi) Tolerances
website:www.auto vii) Texting
desk.com - single line text
- multiple line text
- text editing
- style
21.3.7 DIMENSIONING - height
AND TEXTING - color
Practice 21.3.7C Competence

21.3.7P0 Specific Objectives the ability to produce a
By the end of the sub- fully labelled and
module unit, the trainee dimensioned drawing
should be able to:
a) apply and edit Suggested Learning Resources
various i) Textbooks
dimensioning tools ii) Computer lab
b) use dimensioning iii) Internet
tools to edit a iv) Autodesk
drawing website:www.autodesk.c
c) use dimensioning om
style manager
21.3.8 HATCHING AND
Content SHADING
21.3.7P1 Dimensioning
21.3.7P2 Dimensioning tools Practice
i) Linear
ii) Aligned 21.3.8P0 Specific Objectives
iii) Ordinate By the end of the sub
iv) Radius module unit, the trainee
v) Diameter should be able to:
vi) Angular a) apply drawing
vii) Leader hatches
viii) Tolerance b) edit applied hatches
ix) Center mark
21.3.7P3 Dimension style 21.3.8C Competence
manager The trainee should have
i) Text the ability to hatch a
ii) Lines and arrows drawing using various
iii) Primary units hatch patterns
iv) Offset from origin
v) Extend beyond dim Content
line 21.3.8P1 Hatch methods
i) Pick point iv) Drawing an isometric
ii) Select objects object
21.3.8P2 Hatch edit
i) Scale Suggested Learning Resources
ii) Spacing i) Textbooks
iii) Angle ii) Computer lab
iv) pattern iii) Internet
iv) Autodesk
website:www.autodes
Suggested Learning Resources k.com
i) Textbooks
ii) Computer lab 21.3.10 ASSEMBLY
iii) Internet DRAWING AND
iv) Autodesk SECTIONING
website:www.autodes
k.com Practice
21.3.9 ISOMETRIC 21.3.10P0 Specific Objectives

DRAWING By the end of the sub-
a) assemble exploded
21.3.9P0 Specific Objectives parts of a component
By the end of the sub- b) section and hatch an
module unit, the trainee assembled drawing
should be able to:
a) use the snap and grid 21.3.10C Competence
tab to set the The trainee should
isometric plane have the ability to
b) draw an isometric assemble and section
circle using an ellipse an exploded
c) draw pictorial views component
in isometric
21.3.12C Competence
21.3.9C Competence The trainee should
The trainee should have have the ability to
the ability to produce draw in either 1st angle
pictorial views or 3rd triangle
projections.
Content
21.3.9P1 Drawing an isometric Content
circle 21.3.10P1 Assembly
i) Snap and grid tab i) Union
ii) Ellipse ii) Extrusion
iii) Iso-circle 21.3.10P2 Sectioning
i) Section v) 3D chamfer
ii) Slice
Suggested Learning Resources i) Textbooks
i) Textbooks ii) Computer lab
ii) Computer lab iii) Internet
iii) Internet iv) Autodesk
iv) Autodesk website:www.aut
website:www.auto odesk.com
desk.com
21.3.12 CREATING
21.3.11 3D MODELING ELEVATIONS
Practice Practice
21.3.11P0 Specific Objectives 21.3.12P0 Specific Objectives

By the end of the sub- By the end of the sub-
module unit, the trainee module unit, the
should be able to: trainee should be
a) understand the 3D able to:
modelling planes a) extract elevations
b) model objects in 3D from a 3D model
c) edit a 3D object b) use viewpoints to
illustrate plan, end
21.3.11C Competence and front
The trainee should have elevations.
the ability to model
components in 3D to Content
specified dimensions 21.3.12P1 Extracting elevations
i) Plan
Content ii) Front
21.3.11P1 3D modelling planes iii) End
i) SE 21.3.12P2 Use of viewpoints
ii) NE i) Named
iii) NW viewpoints
iv) SW
21.3.11P2 Modelling methods Suggested Learning Resources
i) Solids i) Textbooks
ii) Extrusion ii) Computer lab
iii) Revolve iii) Internet
21.3.11P3 Editing methods iv) Autodesk
i) 3D Rotation website:www.aut
ii) 3D Mirroring odesk.com
iii) 3D array
iv) 3D fillet
vi) Gouraud shaded,
edges on
21.3.13P2 Library textures
i) Modify
ii) Attach
21.3.13P3 Rendering
21.3.13 SHADING & environment
RENDERING i) Light
ii) Mapping
Practice iii) Background
iv) Landscape
21.3.13P0 Specific Objectives 21.3.13P4 Rendering types
By the end of the sub- i) Photo real render
module unit, the trainee ii) Photo retrace
should be able to:
a) shade a 3D model Suggested Learning Resources
using various shading i)Textbooks
modes ii) Computer lab
b) apply various library iii) Internet
textures for iv) Autodesk
rendering website:www.auto
c) enhance and regulate desk.com
the rendering
environment 21.3.14 LAYING OUT AND
d) render a 3D model in PLOTTING
photo-real type
Practice
21.3.13C Competence
The trainee should
module unit, the
i) Produce a
shaded a model
to:
ii) Produce a
a) create a layout for
realistic image of a
plotting
model
b) set a plotter for
plotting
Content
c) plot a drawing
21.3.13P1 Shading modes
i)3D wireframe
21.3.14C Competence
ii) Hidden
The trainee should
iii) Flat shaded
have the ability to prepare a
iv) Gouraud shaded
drawing for plotting
v) Flat shaded edges
on
Content
21.3.14P1 Plot layout
i) Plot device
ii) Paper orientation
iii) Layout Settings
21.3.14P2 Plotter setting
i) Paper type
ii) Paper feed
iii) Plotting

i)Textbooks
ii) Computer lab
iii) Internet
iv) Autodesk
website:www.auto
desk.com
22.3.0 THERMODYNAMICS
22.3.1 Introduction
Thermodynamics deals with the relationships of work, heat and
energy. Finally, fluid mechanics deals with fluids in motion and
hydraulic machines e.g. pumps. This section is covered and tested
as a paper in the final stage.
The instructional approach will emphasize on experiments,

industrial visits and analysis of various engineering concepts.

By the end of these module units, the trainee should be able to:
b) design engineering structures.
c) size power requirements of motors used in engineering design
d) produce models of designed prototypes.
e) apply the knowledge acquired to improve the performance of
various equipments.
Thermodynamics
Unit Hrs
22.3.1 Introduction  Definitions of terms: 4
to  Thermodynamic systems
Fundamentals  Types of working fluids
of Thermo-  Types of thermodynamic
Dynamics processes
 Thermodynamic cycles
 Definition of work
 Statement of the first law of
thermodynamics
22.3.2 Steady Flow  Derivation of steady flow 4
Processes energy equation (S. F. E. E)
 Application of the S. F. E. E.
 Calculation of work, heat
transfer, changes in internal
energy, and enthalpy
22.3.3 Non-Flow  Non-flow energy equation 4
Processes (N.F. E. E.)

 Apply the N. F. E. E. for a
gas and vapour processes
22.3.4 Perfect Gases  Boyle’s law 6
 Charles’ law
 Derive the characteristic gas
equation
 Solution of problems using
characteristic gas equation
the equation
 Definition of specific heats,
universal gas constant, and
specific gas constant
 Boyle’s law experiment
 Charles’ law experiment
 Joule’s law experiment
22.3.5 Steam  Steam generation 6
 PV diagram
 TS diagram
 Identification of different
regions on the PV diagram
 Definition of different
conditions of steam
 Area under the - P-V
diagram
 Determination of dryness
fraction
 Experiments on pressure and
boiling point
 Experiment on energy
balance
22.3.6 Thermodyna  Criteria for reversibility 8
mic  Internal reversibility
Reversibility  Explanation of the principle
and Entropy of the heat engine.
 Second law of
thermodynamics
 Thermal efficiency
 Carnot cycle
 Net work
 Net heat
 Area under the T-S diagram
22.3.7 Ideal Gas  Explanations of the different 8
Cycle gas cycles
 Air standard efficiency
 Work done
 Heat received or rejected
 Compression ratio
 Mean effective pressure
 Maximum cycle temperatures
22.3.8 Fuels and  Classifications of fuels 8
Combustion  Properties of fuels
 Definition of combustions
terminologies
to solve combustion and
exhaust gas problems
 Determination of calorific
value of fuel.
 Analysis of products of
combustion
22.3.9 Heat Transfer  Application of the 8
conduction equations
 Derivation of the heat
transfer equations
 Application of the heat
transfer equations to solve
related problems
22.3.10 Heat  Classification 4
Exchangers  Description of various types
of recuperative heat
exchangers
 Derivation of heat exchanger
equations
 Heat exchanger experiments
22.3.11 Air  Classification 8
Compressors  Types of compressors
 Derivations of equations of
reciprocating compressors
 Applications of the equations
of reciprocating compressors
 Air compressor experiments
22.3.12 Gas Turbines  Theoretical cycle 10
 Open gas turbine unit
 Closed gas turbine unit
 Plant diagram
 T-S diagram
 Thermal efficiency
 Derivation of gas turbine
equations
 Modifications of the basic
cycle
 Applications of the gas
turbine equations
22.3.13 Impulse  Principle of operation. 10
Steam  Compounding
Turbines  Multi stage impulse turbine
 Derivation of related
equations
 Optimum operating
conditions
 Steam turbine experiments
 Mechanical efficiency
 Specific fuel consumption
 Specific steam consumption
Total Time 88
22.3.1 INTRODUCTION TO i) Thermodynamics
FUNDAMENTALS ii) System
OF THERMO- iii) Thermodynamic cycle
DYNAMICS iv) Properties
v) Surrounding
Theory vi) Boundary
22.3.1T2 Thermodynamic systems
22.3.1T0 Specific Objectives i) Open system
By the end of the sub ii) Closed system
module unit, the trainee 22.3.1T3 Types of working fluids
should be able to: i) Air
a) define terminologies ii) Water
applied to - Steam
thermodynamics 22.3.1T4 Thermodynamic
b) state various types of processes
systems i) Definition
c) state various types of ii) Reversible processes
working substances iii) Irreversible processes
d) describe a 22.3.1T5 Types of
thermodynamic thermodynamics
process processes
e) state various types of i) Isothermal
thermodynamic cycle ii) Isochoric
f) define thermodynamic iii) Isobaric
work iv) Polytropic
g) state the first law of v) Adiabatic
thermodynamics vi) Hyperbolic
22.3.1T6 Thermodynamic cycles
22.3.1C Competence i) Otto cycle
The trainee should have ii) Diesel cycle
the ability to: iii) Joules cycle
i) Define various terms iv) Carnot cycle
used in v) Dual combustion
thermodynamic cycle
ii) Describe various 22.3.1T7 Thermodynamic work
Thermodynamic 22.3.1T8 Statement of the first
processes and cycles law of thermodynamics
iii) State the first law of
thermodynamics Suggested Learning Resources
iv) Apply the first law of i) Textbooks
thermodynamics ii) Handouts
Content 22.3.2 STEADY FLOW

22.3.1T1 Definitions of terms PROCESSES
Theory Theory
22.3.2T0 Specific Objectives 22.3.3T0 Specific Objectives

By the end of the sub By the end of the topic,
module unit, the trainee the trainee should be
should be able to: able to:
a) derive the steady flow a) derive the non-flow
energy equation (S. F. energy equations (N.
E. E). F. E. E)
b) apply the steady flow b) apply the non flow
energy equation to equation to solve
solve problems. problems
Content Content
22.3.2T1 Derivation of 22.3.3T1 Derivation N.F. E. E:
S. F. E. equation Q  U W
22.3.3T2 Apply the N. F. E. E. to
solve problems for a gas
and vapour processes
22.3.4 PERFECT GASES

Theory
S. F.E. Equation
i) boilers
ii) condensers
iii) compressors
iv) turbines
should be able to:
v) nozzles
a) state Boyle’s law
vi) throttling processes
b) state Charles’ law
22.3.2T3 Calculation of:
c) derive the
i) work
characteristic gas
ii) heat transfer
equation
iii) changes in internal
d) solve problems using
energy
the characteristic gas
iv) changes in enthalpy
equation
e) define specific heats
22.3.4C Competence
22.3.3 NON-FLOW
PROCESSES
the ability to:
i) Set up and perform 22.3.5T0 Specific Objectives
the experiment By the end of the sub
ii) Analyze the results module unit, the trainee
iii) Apply the should be able to:
characteristic gas a) describe the
equation generation of steam
b) explain the critical
Content point.
22.3.4T1 Boyle’s law c) define various forms
22.3.4T1 Charles’ law of steam
22.3.4T1 Derive the characteristic d) identify on p-v and t-s
gas equation diagram the various
22.3.4T1 Solution of problems regions of steam
using the equation generation
22.3.4T1 Definition of: e) Solve steam problems
i) Specific heats Cp, Cv
ii) universal gas constant Content
iii) specific gas constant 22.3.5T1 Steam generation
22.3.5T2 Critical point
Practice 22.3.5T3 Forms of steam
22.3.5T4 Diagrams
22.3.3P0 Specific Objectives i) P-V diagram
By the end of the sub ii) T-S diagram
module unit, the trainee - liquid region
should be able to: - wet region
a) verify Boyle’s law - superheated region
b) verify Charles’ law
- area under the - T-
c) verify Joule’s law
S diagram
Content 22.3.5T5 Problems on steam
22.3.4P1 Boyle’s law experiment
22.3.4P1 Charles’ law experiment Practice
22.3.4P1 Joule’s law experiment
Suggested Learning Resources By the end of the sub
i) Text books module unit, the trainee
ii) Hand outs should be able to:
iii) Procedure sheets a) determine dryness
fraction
b) carry out an
experiment to show
22.3.5 STEAM the relationship
between pressure and
Theory boiling points.
c) carry out boiler 22.3.6T0 Specific Objectives
experiment for energy By the end of the sub
balance. module unit, the trainee
d) plot the temperature- should be able to:
pressure diagram a) explain
thermodynamic
Content reversibility
22.3.5P1 Determination of b) explain the principle
dryness fraction of the heat engine.
22.3.5P2 Experiments on pressure c) explain entropy in
and boiling point various
22.3.5P3 Experiment on energy thermodynamic
balance cycles.
22.3.5P4 Temperature pressure
diagram Content
22.3.6T1 Thermodynamics
22.3.5C Competence reversibility
The trainee should have 22.3.6T2 Principle of heat engine
the ability to: 22.3.6T3 Second law of
i) Set up and perform thermodynamics
the experiment 22.3.6T4 Entropy
ii) Analyze the results
iii) Plot the temperature Suggested Learning Resources
pressure diagram i) Text books
ii) Handouts
i) Text books 22.3.7 IDEAL GAS CYCLE
ii) Handouts
iii) Steam tables Theory
iv) Procedure sheets
v) Boiler 22.3.7T0 Specific Objectives
vi) Throttling calorimeter By the end of the sub
vii) Separating and module unit, the trainee
throttling calorimeter should be able to:
a) explain the processes
that make up the ideal
gas cycles.
b) differentiate between
air standard efficiency
22.3.6 THERMODYNAMIC and actual efficiency.
REVERSIBILITY c) solve problems in
AND ENTROPY various idea gas
cycles
Theory
Content
22.3.7T1 The ideal gas cycle ii) liquid fuels
i) Joule’s cycle iii) gaseous fuels
ii) Otto cycle 22.3.8T2 Properties:
iii) Diesel cycle i) calorific values
iv) Dual combustion ii) flash point
cycle iii) ultimate analysis
22.3.7T2 Air standard efficiency 22.3.8T3 Combustions
22.3.7T3 Calculations terminologies:
i) Work done i) stoicho-metric air
ii) Heat received or ii) air fuel ratio
rejected iii) mixture strength
iii) Mean effective iv) actual air
pressure 22.3.8T4 Application of the
iv) Maximum cycle equations to solve
temperatures combustion and
exhaust gas
22.3.8 FUELS AND problems
COMBUSTION Practice
Theory 22.3.8P0 Specific Objectives

module unit, the trainee a) determine the
should be able to: calorific value of
a) classify fuels fuels
b) describe properties of b) analyse products
fuels of combustion
c) derive combustion
equations Content
d) apply the equations to 22.3.8P1 Determination of
solve combustion and calorific value of fuel
exhaust gas problems 22.3.8P2 Analysis of products of
combustion
22.3.8C Competence
the ability to: i) Text books
i) Set up and Perform ii) Hand outs
the experiment iii) Procedure sheet
ii) Analyze the results iv) Bomb calorimeter
iii) Classify fuels v) Orsat apparatus
vi) Fuels
Content
22.3.8T1 Classifications of fuels:
i) solid fuels
22.3.9 HEAT TRANSFER Theory

module unit, the trainee a) classify heat
should be able to: exchangers
a) derive the conduction b) describe various types
equations from of recuperative heat
Fourier’s law exchangers
b) apply the conduction c) derive recuperative
equations from heat exchanger
Fourier’s law to solve equations
heat transfer problem. d) apply the equations to
c) derive the heat solve recuperative
transfer equations heat exchanger
from Newton’s law of problems
cooling and Fourier’s
law. 22.3.10C Competence
d) apply the heat transfer The trainee should have
equations from the ability to:
Newton’s law to solve i) Set up and perform
problems. experiments on heat
exchanger
Content ii) Identify types of heat
22.3.9T1 Derivation of the heat exchangers
transfer equations for:
i) single flat wall Content
ii) composite flat wall 22.3.10T1 Classification
iii) single cylindrical i) recuperative
wall ii) regenerator
iv) composite iii) evaporative
cylindrical wall 22.3.10T2 Description of various
22.3.9T2 Application of the heat types of recuperative
transfer equations to heat exchangers
solve related i) parallel flow
problems ii) counter flow
iii) cross flow
Suggested Learning Resources 22.3.10T3 Derivation of
i) Text books recuperative heat
ii) Handouts exchange
22.3.10T4 application of the
22.3.10 HEAT EXCHANGERS equations
Practice ii) Identify different
types of compressors
module unit, the 22.3.10T1 Classification
trainee should be able i) reciprocating
to carry out compressors
experiments on heat ii) rotary compressors
exchangers 22.3.10T2 Types of compressors
i) reciprocating
Content ii) blowers
22.3.10P1 Heat exchanger iii) sliding valve
experiments 22.3.10T3 Derivations of
recuperative heat
Suggested Learning Resources exchanger equations
i) Textbooks i) work done
ii) Handouts ii) free air delivery
iii) Procedure sheet iii) volumetric efficiency
iv) Heat exchangers iv) multi stage
compressors
22.3.11 AIR COMPRESSORS v) inter cooling
22.3.10T4 Applications of the
Theory equations of
reciprocating
22.3.10T0 Specific Objectives compressors
module unit, the trainee Practice
should be able to:
a) classify air 22.3.10P0 Specific Objectives
compressors By the end of the sub
b) describe various types module unit, the trainee
of compressors should be able to carry
c) derive equations for out experiments on heat
reciprocating exchangers
compressors
d) apply the equations
for the reciprocation
compressors
Content
22.3.11C Competence 22.3.10P1 Air compressor
The trainee should have experiment to measure
the ability to: i) Volumetric efficiency
i) Set up and perform ii) Isentropic efficiency
experiments on
compressors Suggested Learning Resources
i) text books i) Text books
ii) handouts ii) Handouts
iii) Procedure sheet
iv) Air compressors 22.3.13 IMPULSE STEAM
TURBINES
22.3.11 GAS TURBINES
Theory
Theory
By the end of the sub module unit, the
module unit, the trainee trainee should be able
should be able to: to:
a) explain the theoretical a) describe the
cycle for a gas principle of
turbine. operation of the
b) describe the open impulse steam
cycle gas turbine. turbine.
c) describe the closed b) derive impulse
cycle gas turbine. steam turbine
d) derive gas turbine equations.
equations. c) apply the equations
e) explain the to solve impulse
modifications of the steam turbine
basic cycle. problems.
f) apply the equations to
solve gas turbine 22.3.13C Competence
problems The trainee should have
the ability to set up and
Content perform an experiment
22.3.12T1 Theoretical cycle on steam turbines
i) Joule cycle
22.3.12T2 Open gas turbine unit Content
22.3.12T3 Closed gas turbine unit 22.3.13T1 Principle of operation
22.3.12T4 Plant diagram i) Compounding
22.3.12T5 T-S diagram ii) Multi stage impulse
22.3.12T6 Thermal efficiency turbine
22.3.12T7 Derivation of gas turbine 22.3.13T2 Derivation of related
equations equations
22.3.12T8 Modifications on the i) power
basic cycle ii) diagram efficiency
22.3.12T9 Applications of the gas iii) Optimum operating
turbine equations conditions
22.3.13T3 Applications of impulse
Suggested Learning Resources steam equations
Practice

should be able to carry
out experiments on
steam turbines.
Content
22.3.13P1 Steam turbine
experiments
22.3.13P2 Mechanical efficiency
22.3.13P3 Specific fuel
consumption
22.3.13P4 Specific steam
consumption

i) Text books
ii) Handouts
iii) Steam tables
iv) h-s chart
23.3.0 FLUID MECHANICS
Fluid Mechanics falls under a broader area of study known as
Applied Mechanics and it deals with statics and dynamics of
liquids and gases
The study of Fluid Mechanics is divided into Fluid Statics and

Fluid Dynamics.
Fluid Statics deals with fluids at rest under pressure while Fluid
Dynamics deals with fluids in motion. Fluid Mechanics mainly
deals with liquids whose properties include surface tension,
density and viscosity.
The purpose of the module unit is to equip the trainee with the
necessary knowledge that will help them when dealing with
various materials and equipment on a production line, workshops
and other work places.
Trainees taking this module unit require prior training in relevant

mathematics and mechanical science that are found in module I
and module II of this course.

a) understand the flow of fluids
b) solve problems on model testing
c) determine performance of various types of pumps
FLUID MECHANICS
Code Sub- Content Time
Module Hrs
Unit T P Total
23.3.1 Flow of  Losses due to friction and 6 2 8
Fluids changes in pipe section
 Derive equation for head
losses due to friction and
changes in pipe section
equations for flow losses to
solve problems.
 Experiments on flow rate
and pipe losses
23.3.2 Viscous  Definitions of viscous flow 8 2 10
Flow  Definition of Coefficients
of viscosity
 Explanation of viscous
flow
 Derive equation for viscous
flow
 Apply the equations to
solve problems
 Measurement of viscous
resistance
23.3.3 Dimensio  Explanation of dimensional 10 4 14
nal analysis
Analysis  Fundamental; dimensions
 Derived units
 Fundamental units
 Physical quantities
 Application of dimensional
analysis to establish
dimensionless groups
 Applications of
dimensional analysis to
solve problems
 Explanation of model
testing
 Test on models
 Geometrical similarity
 Dynamical similarity
23.3.4 Pumps  Principles of operation of 8 4 12
pumps
a reciprocating pump
a centrifugal pump
 Performance tests on
pumps
Total Time 32 12 44
23.3.1 FLOW OF
FLUIDS 23.3.1P0 Specific Objectives
should be able to:
23.3.1T0 Specific Objectives a) measure flow rate in
By the end of the pipes
sub module unit, b) determine losses in
the trainee should pipes
be able to:
a) explain the losses Content
in pipes 23.3.1P1 Experiments on Flow
b) derive equations rate in pipes
for pipe flow 23.3.1P2 Determination of Pipe
losses losses
c) apply the
equations for Suggested Learning Resources
pipe flow losses i) Text books
to solve ii) Handouts
problems iii)Manometer
iv) Pilot tube
23.3.1C Competence v) Venturimeter
The trainee should have vi) Orifice
the ability to set up and vii) Procedure sheet
perform an experiment viii) Differential
on flow losses. manometer
Content 23.3.2 VISCOUS FLOW

23.3.1T1 Losses due to:
i) Friction Theory
ii) Sudden enlargement or
reduction in cross- 23.3.2T0 Specific Objectives
sectional area By the of the sub module
23.3.1T2 Derive equation for head unit, the trainee should
losses due to be able to:
i) Friction a) explain viscous flow
ii) Sudden reduction in between parallel
area surfaces
iii)Sudden enlargement in b) derive equations for
area viscous flow between
23.3.1T3 Application of the parallel surfaces.
equations for flow losses c) apply equations for
to solve problems. parallel flow to solve
problems
Practice
d) derive equations for 23.3.2P0 Specific Objectives
viscous flow in By the end of the sub
circular pipes module unit, the trainee
e) apply equations for should be able to
viscous flow in Determine viscous
circular pipes to solve resistance in fluid.
problems
Content
23.3.2C Competence 23.3.2P1 Measurement of viscous
The trainee should have resistance
the ability to set up and i) Dashpot
perform an experiment ii) Journal bearing
on viscous flow.
Content i) Text books
23.3.2T1 Explanation of viscous ii) Hand outs
flow iii)Dashpot
23.3.2T2 Derivation of viscous iv) Journal bearing
flow between parallel v) Procedure sheet
surfaces
i) Coefficient of dynamic 23.3.3 DIMENSIONAL
viscosity ANALYSIS
ii) Coefficient of
kinematics viscosity Theory
23.3.2T3 Application of viscous
flow equation in 23.3.3T1 Specific Objectives
problem solving By the end of the sub
i) Between parallel plates module unit, the trainee
ii) Between parallel should be able to:
moving plates a) explain of
iii)Circular pipe dimensional analysis
23.3.2T4 Derivation of equation b) explain the principle
for viscous flow of dimensional
i) Between parallel homogeneity
surfaces c) state fundamental
ii) Between parallel dimensions
moving plates d) define units
iii)Circular pipes e) state derived units
23.3.2T5 Application of viscous f) state physical
flow in circular pipes quantities
equations to solve g) apply dimensional
problems analysis to establish
dimensionless groups
Practice
h) apply dimensional 23.3.3T10 Solution of problems in
analysis to solve model testing
problems
i) explain model testing Practice
j) solve problems on
model testing 23.3.3P0 Specific Objectives
23.3.3C Competence module unit, the trainee
The trainee should have should be able to carry
the ability to set up out
perform experiments on tests on models
model testing.
Content
Content 23.3.3P1 Test on models
23.3.3T1 Explanation of i) Geometrical similarity
dimensional analysis ii) Dynamical similarity
23.3.3T2 Explanation of the
principle of fundamental Suggested Learning Resources
homogeneity i) Textbooks
23.3.3T3 Fundamental dimensions ii) Handouts
23.3.3T4 Definition of units iii)Models
23.3.3T5 Derived units iv) Procedure sheet
23.3.3T6 Physical quantities
i) Mass 23.3.4 PUMPS
ii) Force
iii)Density 23.3.4T0 Specific Objectives
iv) Velocity By the end of the sub
v) Acceleration module unit, the trainee
23.3.3T7 Application of should be able to:
dimensional analysis to a) describe the principle
establish dimensionless of operation of a
groups pump
i) Reynolds number b) derive equations for
ii) Mach number reciprocating pump
iii)Froude number c) derive equations for a
23.3.3T8 Applications of centrifugal pump
dimensional analysis to d) Apply the equations to
solve problems solve pump problems
i) Rayleigh method
(indicial method)
ii) Buckingham  theorem
23.3.3T9 Explanation of model 23.3.4C Competence
testing The trainee should have
i) Geometrical similarity the ability to perform
ii) Dynamical similarity
experiments on various Content
performance tests. 23.3.4P1 Performance tests on
pumps
Content
23.3.4T1 Principles of operation Suggested Learning Resources
of: i) Textbooks
i) Reciprocating pumps ii) Handouts
ii) Centrifugal pumps iii)Pumps
23.3.4T2 Derivation of equations iv) Procedure sheet
for a reciprocating pump
i) Coefficient of
discharge
ii) percentage slip
iii)Work done
iv) Acceleration head
v) Friction head
vi) Pressure head in the
cylinder
23.3.4T3 Derivation of equations
for a centrifugal pump
i) Effective head
ii) Manometric head
iii)Manometric efficiency
iv) Mechanical efficiency
v) Discharge
vi) Torque
vii) Work done unit
weight
viii) Specific speed
23.3.4T4 Application of
centrifugal pumps
equations to solve
problems
Practice

should be able to
determine the
performance of various
types of pumps
24.3.0 CONTROL SYSTEMS AND INSTRUMENTATION
24.3.01 Introduction:
Engineering control systems are used for the control of physical
quantities such as temperature, flow rates, liquid levels, chemical
composition, speed of prime movers, position of ships and
aircrafts, radar guidance, and machine tool operations.
Control system elements include various physical quantities
measuring devices, springs levers, gears, valves, gyroscopes,
compressors, accumulators, bellows, motors, resistors, relays,
transistors among others. Transducers which convert such
quantities into electrical signals are commonly used and the
microprocessor is involved in the sophisticated control of medical
equipment, engine ignition systems and domestic appliances.
The instructional approach will lay emphasis on demonstration,
industrial visits, practical and project work.

By the end of the module the trainee should be able to:
a) understand the working principles of various control devices
and measuring instruments
b) measure physical quantities using modern measuring
instruments
c) apply modern control system techniques in industry
d) maintain and repair physical control systems
e) design and construct physical control systems
24.3.03 Module Unit Summary And Time Allocation
Control Systems And Instrumentation

Unit Hrs
T P Total
24.3.1 Temperature  Temperature Sensors and 3 1 4
Sensors Transducers
and  Operation of Temperature
Transducers Sensors and Transducers
 Test on temperature
sensors and transducers
 Assembly of temperature
24.3.2 Level Sensors  Level Sensors And 3 1 4
and Transducers
Transducers  Operation of level sensors
and transducers
 Test on level sensors and
transducers
 Assembly and dismantling
of level sensors and
transducers
24.3.3 Displacement  Displacement And 3 1 4
and Proximity Proximity Sensors and
Sensors and Transducers
Transducers  Operation of displacement
and proximity sensors
and transducers
 Test of displacement and
proximity sensors and
transducers
of displacement and
proximity sensors and
transducers
24.3.4 Viscosity  viscosity sensors and 2 2 4
Sensors and transducers
Transducers  Assembly and dismantling
viscosity sensors and
transducers
24.3.5 Moisture and  Moisture And Humidity 3 1 4
Humidity Sensors And transducers
Sensors and  Operation of moisture and
Transducers humidity sensors and
transducers
 Test of moisture and
humidity sensors and
transducers
moisture and humidity
24.3.6 Flow Sensors  flow sensors and 2 2 4
and transducers
Transducers  Operation of various types
of flow sensors and
transducers
 Test of flow sensors and
transducers
 Assembly of flow sensors
and transducers
24.3.7 Pressure  pressure sensors and 2 2 4
Transducers  Application of pressure
 Test of pressure sensors
and transducers
 Assembly of pressure
24.3.8 Radiation  Radiation Sensors And 2 2 4
Transducers  Pyroelectric
 Application of radiation
sensors and
 Test of radiation sensors
and transducers
 Assembly of radiation
sensors and transducer
24.3.9 Stress and  Stress and strain sensors 2 2 4
Strain and transducers
Sensors and  Application of stress and
Transducers strain sensors and
transducers
 Test of stress and strain
 Assembly of stress and
strain sensors and
transducers
24.3.10 Force Sensors  Force sensors and 2 2 4
and transducers
Transducers  Application of force
 Test of stress and strain
 Assembly of stress and
strain sensors and
transducers
24.3.11 Measuring  Types of Measuring 6 2 8
Instruments Instruments
 Factors Affecting
Instruments Selection
 Sources of Error in
Measuring Instruments
 Basic Components of An
Instrument
 Calibration
24.3.12 Measurement  Measurements of Physical 4 4 8
of Physical Variables
Variables
24.3.13 Fundamentals  Control system 3 1 4
of Control terminology
System  Open and Closed loop
24.3.14 Block  Transfer function of 2 2
Diagrams systems with feedback
 Block diagram
 Superposition theorem
24.3.15 Signal Flow  Conversion of block 2 2
Graphs diagrams to signal flow
 Simplification of complex
loops
 Masons rule
24.3.16 System  Need for modelling 3 1 4
Modelling  Laplace transforms and
differential equations of
transfer functions
 Transfer functions of
simple networks
 Practical systems
24.3.17 Controllers  Definitions 2 2 4
and Control  Modes of control
Modes
24.3.18 Actuators  Function of an actuator 1 1 2
 Types of actuators
24.3.19 Process  Block diagram of a 1 1 2
Control process loop
 Structural model of a
manufacturing process
 Process control strategies
 Distributed versus central
control
24.3.20 Sequence  Differences between 2 2 4
Control computer and PLC
 Special Features of PLC
 Architecture of PLCs
 Operation of PLCs
 Applications of PLCs
 Computer Integrated
Manufacturing
24.3.21 Digital  Definition of D D.C. 2 2 4
Control  D D.C. block diagram
Systems  Application of D D.C.
 Components of a D D.C.
system
 Supervisory computer
control
24.3.22 Servo  Control of servo system 2 2 4
Systems  Servo amplifiers
 Stepper motor
 Characteristics curves of
AC and D.C. servo
motors
Total Time 54 34 88
24.3.1 TEMPERATURE
SENSORS AND Practice
TRANSDUCERS
Theory By the end of the sub-
24.3.1T0 Specific Objectives should be able to:
By the end the sub- e) test temperature
module unit the trainee sensors and
should be able to: transducers
a) explain the operation f) assemble and
of various types of dismantle temperature
temperature sensors and
b) sensors and transducers
transducers
c) describe application of Content
various types of 24.3.1P1 Test on temperature
temperature sensors sensors and transducers
d) and transducers 24.3.1P2 Assembly of temperature
24.3.1C Competence
the ability to: i) Reference books
i) Test temperature ii) Manufacturers charts
sensors and iii)Assorted temperature
transducers sensors
ii) Fit a temperature iv) Audio visual aids
sensor and v) Test instruments
transducers
24.3.2 LEVEL SENSORS AND
Content TRANSDUCERS
24.3.1T1 Temperature Sensors
and Transducers Theory
i) Resistance
ii) Temperatures detectors 24.3.2T0 Specific Objectives
iii)Platinum Resistance By the end the sub-
iv) Thermistors module unit the trainee
v) Transistors and should be able to:
Integrated Circuits a) explain the operation
(IC) of various level
24.3.1T2 Operation of sensors and transducer
Temperature Sensors
and Transducers
b) describe application of i) test level sensors and
various types of level transducers
sensors and ii) fit a level sensor and
transducers transducers
Content Suggested Learning Resources

24.3.2T1 Level Sensors And i) Reference books
Transducers ii) Manufacturers charts
i) Diaphragm iii)Manufacturers manual
ii) Differential pressure iv) Assorted level sensors and
iii)Ultrasonic transducers
iv) Radiation v) Test instruments
v) Capacitance probes
vi) Level gauges 24.3.3 DISPLACEMENT
vii) Optical level switches AND PROXIMITY
viii) Resistance tapes SENSORS AND
24.3.2T2 Operation of level TRANSDUCERS
Theory
Practice
24.3.2P0 Specific Objectives By the end the sub-
By the end the sub- module unit the trainee
module unit the trainee should be able to:
should be able to: a) explain the operation
a) test level sensors and of various types of
transducer displacement and
b) assemble and proximity sensors and
dismantle level transducers
sensors and b) describe the
transducers application of various
types of displacement
Content and proximity sensors
24.3.2P1 Test of level sensors and and transducers
transducers
24.3.2P2 Assembly and 24.3.3C Competence
dismantling of level The trainee should have
sensors and transducers the ability to:
i) Test a displacement
and proximity sensors
and transducers
ii) Fit a displacement
24.3.2C Competence and a proximity
The trainee should sensor and
have the ability: transducers
ii) Manufactures charts
Content iii)Assorted displacement
24.3.3T1 Displacement and and proximity sensors
Proximity Sensors and and transducers
Transducers iv) Test instruments
i) Resistive v) Assorted tools
ii) Inductive
iii) Capacitive 24.3.4 VISCOSITY
iv) Position SENSORS AND
v) Velocity TRANSDUCERS
vi) Acceleration
24.3.3T2 Operation of Theory
displacement and
proximity sensors and 24.3.4T0 Specific Objectives
transducers By the end the sub-
a) explain the operation
24.3.3P0 Specific Objectives of various types of
By the end the sub- viscosity sensors and
module unit, the trainee transducers
should be able to: b) describe the
a) test displacement and applications of various
proximity sensors and types of viscosity
transducers sensors and
b) assemble and transducers
dismantle
displacement and Content
proximity sensors and 24.3.4T1 Viscosity sensors and
i) Pressure drops
Content ii) Oscillation
24.3.3P1 Displacement and iii)Torque and weight
Proximity Sensors and techniques
Transducers 24.3.4T2 Applications of
i) Tests Viscosity Sensors and
24.3.3P2 Displacement and transducers
Proximity Sensors and
Transducers
i) Dismantling
ii) Assembly Practice
Suggested Learning Resources 24.3.4P0 Specific Objectives

i) Reference books
By the end the sub-
module unit the trainee Theory
should be able to:
a) test viscosity sensors 24.3.5T0 Specific Objectives
and transducers By the end the sub-
b) assemble and module unit the trainee
dismantle viscosity should be able to:
sensors and a) explain the operation
transducers of various types of
moisture and humidity
Content b) sensors and
24.3.4P1 Test on viscosity sensors transducers
and transducers c) describe the
24.3.4P2 Assembly and application of various
dismantling of viscosity types of moisture and
sensors and transducers humidity sensors and
transducers
Competence
The trainee should have 24.35C Competence
the ability to: The trainee should
i) Test a viscosity sensor have the ability to:
and transducers i) Test moisture and
ii) Fit Viscosity Sensors
humidity sensor and
and Transducers
transducers
ii) Fit moisture and
Suggested Learning Resources humidity sensors
i) Reference books
ii) Manufactures charts
and transducers
iii)Assorted viscosity
sensors and Content
transducers 24.3.5T1 Moisture and Humidity
iv) Test instruments Sensors And
i) Hygrometric
ii) Dew Point Sensing
Techniques
24.3.5T2 Operation of moisture
and humidity sensors
and transducers
Practice
24.3.5 MOISTURE AND
HUMIDITY 24.3.5P0 Specific Objectives
SENSORS AND
TRANSDUCERS
By the end the sub-
module unit the trainee Content
should be able to: 24.3.6T1 Flow Sensors And
a) test moisture and transducers
humidity sensors and i) Orifice plate
transducers ii) Venturi tubes and
b) assemble and flow nozzle
dismantle moisture iii) Turbine
and humidity sensors 24.3.6T2 Operation of various
and transducers types of flow sensors
and transducers
Content
24.3.5P1 Test of moisture and Practice
transducers 24.3.6P0 Specific Objectives
24.3.5P2 Assembly and By the end the sub-
dismantling moisture module unit the trainee
and humidity sensors should be able to:
and transducers a) test flow sensors and
transducers
Suggested Learning Resources b) assemble and
i) Reference books dismantle flow
ii) Manufactures charts sensors and
iii)Assorted moisture and transducers
transducers Content
iv) Test instruments 24.3.6P1 Test of flow sensors and
transducers
24.3.6 FLOW SENSORS AND 24.3.6P2 Assembly of flow
TRANSDUCERS sensors and transducers
Theory 24.3.6C Competence

24.3.6T0 Specific Objectives the ability to:
By the end the sub- i) Test flow sensors and
module unit the trainee transducers
should be able to: ii) Fit a flow sensors and
a) explain the operation transducers
of various types of
flow sensors and Suggested Learning Resources
transducers i) Reference books
b) explain the operation ii) Manufactures charts
of various types of iii) Assorted flow sensors
flow sensors and and transducers
transducers iv) Test instruments
24.3.7P1 Test of pressure sensors
24.3.7 PRESSURE SENSORS and transducers
AND TRANSDUCERS 24.3.7P2 Assembly of pressure
Theory
24.3.7C Competence
24.3.7T0 Specific Objectives The trainee should
By the end the sub- have the ability to:
module unit the trainee i) Test pressure sensors
should be able to: and transducers
a) explain the operation ii) Fit pressure sensors
of the various types of and transducers
pressure sensors and
transducers Suggested Learning Resources
b) explain the application i) Selected pressure
of various types of sensors and
pressure sensors and ii) Reference books
transducers iii) Field visits
iv) Assorted pressure
Content sensors and
24.3.7T1 Pressure sensors and transducers
transducers v) Test instruments
i) Inductive
ii) piezoelectric 24.3.8 RADIATION
iii) Capacitive SENSORS AND
iv) Strain gauge TRANSDUCERS
v) Potentiometric
24.3.7T2 Application of pressure Theory
Practice By the end the sub-
By the end the sub- a) explain the operation
module unit the trainee of the various types of
should be able to: radiation sensors and
a) test pressure sensors transducers
and transducers b) explain the application
b) assemble and of various types of
dismantle pressure radiation sensors and
transducers
Content
Content 24.3.8T1 Radiation Sensors
i) Thermal photo v) Test instruments
detectors
ii) Thermocouple 24.3.9 STRESS AND
iii)Pyroelectric STRAIN SENSORS
iv) Photon detectors AND TRANSDUCERS
v) Photo-emission
vi) Photoconductive Theory
vii) photovoltaic
24.3.8T2 Application of radiation 24.3.9T0 Specific Objectives
sensors and By the end the sub-
a) explain the operation
24.3.8P0 Specific Objectives of the various types of
By the end the sub- stress and strain
module unit the trainee sensors and
should be able to: transducers
a) test radiation sensors b) explain the application
and transducers of various types of
b) assemble and stress and strain
dismantle radiation sensors and
transducers
24.3.9C Competence
Content The trainee should have
24.3.8P1 Test of radiation sensors the ability to:
and transducers i) Test stress and strain
24.3.8P2 Assembly of radiation sensors and
sensors and transducers transducers
ii) Fit stress and strain
24.3.8C Competence sensors and
The trainee should have transducers
the ability to:
i) Test radiation sensors Content
and transducers 24.3.9T1 Stress and strain sensors
ii) Fit radiation sensors and transducers
and transducers i) Metallic strain gauge
ii) Semiconductor strain
Suggested Learning Resources gauge
i) Selected radiation iii)Piezoelectric stress
sensors and sensors
transducers 24.3.9T2 Application of stress and
ii) Reference books strain sensors and
iii) Field visits transducers
iv) Test instruments
force sensors and
Practice transducers
24.3.9P0 Specific Objectives 24.3.10C Competence

By the end the sub- The trainee should have
module unit the trainee the ability to:
should be able to: i) Test stress and strain
a) test stress and strain sensors and
transducers ii) Fit stress and strain
b) assemble and sensors and
dismantle stress and transducers
strain sensors and
transducers Content
24.3.10T1 Force sensors and
Content transducers
24.3.9T1 Test of stress and strain i) Piezoelectric
sensors and transducers ii) Capacitive
24.3.9T2 Assembly of stress and iii) re
strain sensors and 24.3.10T2 Application of force
transducers sensors and transducers
Suggested Learning Resources Practice

i) Selected stress and
strain sensors and 24.3.10P0 Specific Objectives
ii) Reference books By the end the sub-
iii) Field visits module unit the trainee
iv) Test instruments should be able to:
a) test stress and strain
24.3.10 FORCE SENSORS sensors and
AND TRANSDUCERS transducers
b) assemble and
Theory dismantle stress and
strain sensors and
24.3.10T0 Specific Objectives transducers
By the end the sub-
module unit the trainee Content
should be able to: 24.3.10P1 Test of stress and strain
a) explain the operation sensors and transducers
of the various types of 24.3.10P2 Assembly of stress and
force sensors and strain sensors and
b) explain the application
of various types of Suggested Learning Resources
i) Selected force iv) Reliability
sensors and v) Cost
transducers vi) Static and dynamic
ii) Reference books response
iii) Field visits 24.3.11T3 Sources Of Error In
Measuring Instruments
24.3.11 MEASURING i) Manufacturing error
INSTRUMENTS ii) Design error
iii)Operational error
Theory iv) Environmental error
v) Application error
24.3.11T4 Basic Components Of
An Instrument
By the end the sub-
i) Sensing Element
ii) Amplifying Elements
should be able to:
iii)Signal Modifiers or
a) classify instruments
Converters
b) explain the factors
affecting instruments
selection Practice
c) explain the sources of
error in measuring 24.3.11P0 Specific Objectives
instruments By the end the sub-
d) explain the important module unit the trainee
basic components of should be able to
an instrument system calibrate a measuring
instrument
Content
24.3.10C Competence 24.3.11P1 Calibration
the ability to calibrate a Suggested Learning Resources
measuring instrument. i) Selected measuring
instruments
Content ii) Reference books
24.3.11T1 Types of Measuring iii)Field visits
Instruments
i) Indicating 24.3.12 MEASUREMENT OF
ii) Recording PHYSICAL
iii)Controlling VARIABLES
24.3.11T2 Factors Affecting
Instruments Selection Theory
i) Accuracy
ii) Precision 24.3.12T0 Specific Objectives
iii)Resolution capacity
By the end the sub- 24.3.12P5Measurements of
module unit the trainee Stress
should be able to 24.3.12P6Measurements of
describe various ways of Angular velocity
measuring physical 24.3.12P7Measurements of
variables Temperature
24.3.12P8Measurements of
Content Liquid level
24.3.12T1 Measurements of
24.3.12P9Measurements of Flow
Physical Variables
i) Displacement
24.3.12C Competence
ii) Force
iii)Torque
the ability to measure
iv) Strain
Physical Variables
v) Stress
i) Displacement
vi) Angular velocity
ii) Measure force
vii) Temperature
iii) Measure torque
viii) Liquid level
iv) Measure strain
ix) Flow
v) Measure stress
vi) Measure angular
Practice velocity
vii) Measure temperature
24.3.12P0 Specific Objectives viii) Measure liquid level
By the end the sub- ix) Measure flow
should be able to Suggested Learning Resources
i) measure i) Selected measuring
ii) displacement instruments
iii) force ii) Reference books
iv) torque iii) Field visits
v) strain
vi) stress
24.3.13 FUNDAMENTALS OF
vii) angular velocity
CONTROL SYSTEM
viii) temperature
ix) liquid level
Theory
x) flow
Content By the end the sub-
24.3.12P1 Measurements of module unit the trainee
Displacement should be able to:
24.3.12P2 Measurements of Force a) define control system
24.3.12P3 Measurements of Torque terms
24.3.12P4 Measurements of Strain
b) distinguish between 24.3.13P1 Open and Closed loop
open and closed loop i) Features of open loop
systems systems
ii) Features of closed
24.3.13C Competence loop system
the ability to identify Suggested Learning Resources
open loop and closed i) Reference books
loop control systems. ii) Audio visual aids
Content 24.3.14 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

24.3.13T1 Control system
terminology Theory
i) Control
ii) System 24.3.14T0 Specific Objectives
iii) Control system - By the end the sub-
Natural system module unit the trainee
iv) Man made system should be able to:
v) Hybrid system a) derive overall transfer
vi) Controlled and function of simple
reference variables systems with feedback
24.3.13T2 Open and Closed loop b) reduce block diagrams
i) Feedback to canonical
ii) Features of open loop representation
systems c) use superposition
iii) Features of closed theorem to reduce
loop system multi-input systems
iv) Advantages and
disadvantages Content
24.3.14T1 Transfer function of
systems with feedback
i) Feedback
ii) open loop
24.3.14T2 Block diagram
Practice i) Block diagrams of
single input signal
24.3.13P0 Specific Objectives system
By the end the sub- ii) Block diagrams of
module unit the trainee multi-input signal
should be able to system
identify open and closed 24.3.14T3 Superposition theorem
loop systems
Content i) Reference books
ii) Audio visual aids
b) use Laplace
24.3.15 SIGNAL FLOW transforms and
GRAPHS differential equations
to represent system
Theory transfer functions
c) define a transfer
24.3.15T0Specific Objectives function and explain
By the end the sub- its dependency on
module unit the trainee frequency
should be able to:
a) convert block Content
diagrams to signal 24.3.16T1 Need for modelling
flow graphs 24.3.16T2 Laplace transforms and
b) simplify complex differential equations of
loops transfer functions
c) apply mason’s rule 24.3.16T3 Transfer functions of
simple networks
Content i) Practical systems
24.3.15T1 Conversion of block
diagrams to signal flow Practice
24.3.15T2 Simplification of
complex loops 24.3.16P0 Specific Objectives
24.3.15T3 Masons rule By the end the sub-
should be able to
represent practical
i) Reference books
systems with transfer
functions and reduce
them to canonical form
24.3.16 SYSTEM
MODELLING Content
24.3.16P1 Practical systems
Theory
24.3.16T0 Specific Objectives i) Reference books
By the end the sub- ii) Audio visual aids
module unit the trainee iii)Practical systems
should be able to:
a) explain the need for 24.3.17 CONTROLLERS AND
modelling CONTROL MODES
Theory
24.3.17T0 Specific Objectives By the end the sub-
module unit the trainee should be able to
should be able to: identify the control
a) define terms relating mode utilized in a given
to controllers practical control
b) explain controller system
modes and contrast
the various modes Content
24.3.17P1 Modes of control
24.3.17C Competence i) Two position and
The trainee should floating
have the ability to ii) Proportional mode
iii)Integral mode
represent practical
iv) Composite control
systems with transfer modes
functions and reduce
them to canonical Suggested Learning Resources
form. i) Reference books
ii) Audio visual
24.3.17C Competence aids
The trainee should have iii) Physical control
the ability to identify the systems
control mode utilized by
a given control system. 24.3.18 ACTUATORS
Content Theory
24.3.17T1 Definitions
i) Process load
ii) Process lag
24.3.18T0Specific Objectives
By the end the sub-
iii) Self regulation
iv) Control lag
should be able to:
v) Dead time
a) explain the function of
24.3.17T2 Modes of control
an actuator
i) Two position and
b) outline common
floating
types of actuators
ii) Proportional
mode
iii) Integral mode 24.3.18C Competence
iv) Composite control The trainee should
modes have the ability to:
Practice
i) Test Solenoids, 24.3.19 PROCESS CONTROL
Pneumatic and
Hydraulic actuators Theory
ii) Fit Solenoids,
Pneumatic and 24.3.19T0Specific Objectives
Hydraulic actuators By the end the sub-
Content should be able to:
24.3.18T1 Function of an actuator a) draw a block diagram
24.3.18T2 Types of actuators of a process control
i) Solenoids loop and describe
ii) Digital stepper motor each element
drives b) describe the structural
iii)A.C. and D.C. motors model of a
iv) Pneumatic manufacturing process
v) Hydraulic c) explain process
control strategies
Practice d) describe the
differences between
24.3.18P0Specific Objectives centralized control,
By the end the sub- optionally distributed
module unit the trainee control and fully
should be able to: distributed control
a) test solenoids,
pneumatic and Content
hydraulic actuators 24.3.19T1 Block diagram of a
b) fit solenoids, process loop
pneumatic and i) Process
hydraulic actuators ii) Measurement
iii) Comparator
Content iv) Controller
24.3.18P1 Tests of actuators v) Control
i) Solenoids element
ii) Pneumatic 24.3.19T2 Structural model of a
iii)Hydraulic manufacturing process
24.3.18P2 Fitting actuators i) Input variables
i) Solenoids ii) Output variables
ii) Pneumatic 24.3.19T3 Process control
iii)Hydraulic strategies
i) Feedback control
Suggested Learning Resources ii) Regulatory
i) Reference books control
ii) Audio visual aids iii) Feed forward
control
iv) Pre-planned ii) Environmental
control consideration
v) Steady state iii) Programming
optimal control languages and
vi) Adaptive techniques
control iv) Maintenance and
24.3.19T4 Distributed versus trouble shooting
central control 24.3.20T2 Special Features of PLC
i) Centralized control, i) Cost
ii) Optionally ii) Versatility
distributed control iii)Flexibility
iii) Fully distributed iv) Expandability
control v) Maintenance
vi) Accuracy
Suggested Learning Resources 24.3.20T3 Architecture of PLCs
i) Reference books i) Central processing unit
ii) Audio visual aids ii) Input devices
iii) Field visits (Modules)
iii)Output devices
24.3.20 SEQUENCE (Modules)
CONTROL iv) Power supply
v) Input components
Theory vi) Output components
vii) Memory
viii) Programming unit
24.3.20T0 Specific Objectives (console)
By the end the sub-
24.3.20T4 Operation of PLCs
24.3.20T5 Applications of PLCs
should be able to:
i) CNC machine tools
a) explain the difference
ii) Computer Integrated
between a computer
Manufacturing
and a Programmable
Logic Controllers
(PLCs)
b) describe the special Suggested Learning Resources
features of PLC i) Reference books
c) describe architecture ii) Audio visual aids
of a PLC iii)Field visits
d) describe the operation
of a PLC
e) explain the application 24.3.21 DIGITAL CONTROL
of a PLC SYSTEMS
Content
24.3.20T1 Differences between Theory
computer and PLC
i) Real-time operation
24.3.21T0 Specific Objectives By the end the sub-
module unit the trainee should be able to:
should be able to: a) describe control of
a) define Direct Digital position, speed
Control (DDC ) (acceleration and
b) draw a DDC block torque) of servo
diagram mechanisms
c) explain the application b) explain the operation
of DDC of servo system
d) explain the amplifiers
components of a DDC c) explain the operation
system and control of a
e) describe supervisory stepper motor
computer control and d) plot the characteristic
its application curves of a typical ac
and DC servo-motors
Content e) describe the effects of
24.3.21T1 Definition of DDC amplifier gain on
24.3.21T2 DDC block diagram servo-system
24.3.21T3 Applications of DDC performance
24.3.21T4 Components of a DDC
system and sensors Content
i) Actuators and sensors 24.3.21T1 Control of servo system
ii) Analogue controller i) AC servo
iii)Recording and display ii) DC servo
devices iii)Difference between DC
iv) Set-point dial and and AC servos
comparator iv) Practical systems
24.3.21T5 Supervisory computer 24.3.21T2 Servo amplifiers
control i) DC
i) Block Diagram ii) AC
ii) Application iii) Phase sensitive
rectifiers
iv) Applications
24.3.21T3 Stepper motor
i) Construction
i) Reference books ii) Operation
ii) Audio visual aids iii) Control Circuits
iii) Field visits iv) Calculations
v) Interfacing
24.3.21 SERVO SYSTEMS vi) Applications
Theory 24.3.21T4 Characteristics curves of
AC and DC servo
24.3.21T0Specific Objectives motors
24.3.21T5 Amplifier and servo
systems performance

i) Reference books
iii) Field visits
25.3.0 MATHEMATICS III
This module unit is designed with knowledge, skills, techniques
and attitudes necessary to enhance the trainee’s understanding of
other analytical areas of study in this course. The module unit
will also be very useful to trainees who aspire to further their
training in this course.
This module is a build up of Mathematics I and II of this course.

Trainees undertaking this module unit require to have
successfully completed Mathematics I and II of this course or its
equivalent.
Timed tests, assignment, end of Module examinations are the

recommended mode of evaluation for this Module unit, and any
other suitable method.

By the end of this module unit, the trainee should be able to:
a) apply mathematics concepts in fabrication design and data
analysis
b) organize, draw simple deductions and conclusions from the
given data
c) apply probability and mensurations in vehicle and vehicle parts
fabrication works
Mathematics III
Unit
25.3.1 Vector Field  Definition of dot and cross products 12
Theory of vectors
 Solution of problems involving dot
and cross products of vectors
 Definition of operators
 Definition of vector field
 Definition of curl F
 Solutions of problems involving curl
F
 Solutions of problems involving F
25.3.2 Matrices  Matrix operation 10
 Determinant of 3x3 matrix
 Inverse of 3x3 matrix
 Solution of linear simultaneous
equations in 3 unknowns
 Application of matrices
25.3.3 Numerical  Definition of interpolation and 8
Methods extrapolation
 Application of interpolation and
 Application of interactive methods
to solve equations
 Application of interactive methods
to areas and volumes
25.3.4 Double And  Definition of double and triple 8
Triple integrals
Integrals  Use of multiple integrals to find
areas and volume
 Consideration of double integrals in
polar and cylindrical coordinates
 Use of triple integrals in solving
problems
25.3.5 Differential  Types of first order differential 10
Equations equations
 Formation of first order differential
equations
 Solutions of first order differential
equations
 Application of first order
8differential equations Formation of
the second order differential
equations for various systems
 Solution of second order differential
equations ‘
 Application of second order
differential equations
25.3.6 Laplace  Definition of Laplace transforms 8
Transforms Deriving Laplace transforms from
first principles
 State properties of Laplace
transform
 Determination of inverse LT of
simple transforms and partial
fractions
 Solution of differential equations by
LT
 Solution of simultaneous differential
equations by given initial conditions
25.3.7 Fourier series  Determination of the fourier series 6
as a periodic function of period 2
and extended to
 Determination of fourier series of
non-perodic functions over a given
range
 Determination of fourier series for
even and odd functions and the half-
range series for a given function
25.3.8 Loci  Definition of a point 4
 Locus of a point in relation to a
circle
 Loci of points for given mechanism
Total Time 66
25.3.1 VECTOR FIELD a) carry out matrix
THEORY operations
b) determine the
25.3.1T0 Specific Objectives determinant of a 3x3
By the end of the sub matrix
module unit, the trainee c) determine the inverse
should be able to: of a 3x3 matrix
a) define dot and gross d) solve linear
products of vectors simultaneous
b) solve problems equations in 3
involving dot and unknowns
cross products of e) apply knowledge of
vectors matrices in solving
c) define operators problems in real life
d) define vector field f
e) define curl f Content
f) define div f 25.3.2T1 Matrix operation
g) solve problems 25.3.2T2 Determinant of 3x3
involving curl f matrix
h) solve problems 25.3.2T3 Inverse of 3x3 matrix
involving div f 25.3.2T4 Solution of linear
simultaneous equations
Content in 3 unknowns
25.3.1T1 Definition of dot and 25.3.2T5 Application of matrices
cross products of vectors
25.3.1T2 Solution of problems Suggested Learning Resources
involving dot and cross i) Charts
products of vectors ii) Square boards
25.3.1T3 Definition of operators
25.3.1T4 Definition of vector field 25.3.3 NUMERICAL METHODS
(F)
25.3.1T5 Definition of curl (F) 25.3.3T0 Specific Objectives
25.3.1T6 Definition of div (F) By the end of the sub
25.3.1T7 Solutions of problems module unit, the trainee
involving curl (F) should be able to:
25.3.1T8 Solutions of problems a) define interpolation
involving (F) and extrapolation
b) apply interpolation
25.3.2 MATRICES extrapolation
c) apply interactive
25.3.2T0 Specific Objectives methods to solve
By the end of the sub problems
module unit, the trainee d) apply interactive
should be able to: methods to areas and
volumes
Content
25.3.3T1 Definition of double and
25.3.3C Competence triple integrals
The trainee should have 25.3.3T2 Use of multiple integrals
the ability to apply to find areas and volume
knowledge of integrals 25.3.3T3 Consideration of double
to engineering integrals in polar and
cylindrical coordinates
Content 25.3.3T4 Use of triple integrals in
25.3.3T1 Definition of solving problems
interpolation and
extrapolation Suggested Learning Resources
25.3.3T2 Application of - Calculators
interpolation and
extrapolation 25.3.4 DIFFERENTIAL
25.3.3T3 Application of EQUATIONS
interactive methods to
solve equations 25.3.4T0 Specific Objectives
25.3.3T4 Application of By the end of the sub
interactive methods to module unit, the trainee
areas and volumes should be able to:
a) distinguish different
Suggested Learning Resources types of first order
i) Graphs differential equations
ii) Calculators b) form first order
differential equation
25.3.3 DOUBLE AND TRIPLE c) solve first order
INTEGRALS differential equations
d) apply first order
25.3.3T0 Specific Objectives differential equations
By the end of the sub e) form the second order
module unit, the trainee differential equations
should be able to: f) solve second order
a) define double and differential equations
triple integrals g) apply second order
b) use multiple integrals differential equations
to find areas and in different systems
volume
c) consider double 25.3.4C Competence
integrals in polar and The trainee should have
cylindrical the ability to apply
coordinates knowledge of
d) use triple integrals in differential equations to
solving problems engineering
by LT given initial
Content conditions
25.3.4T1 Types of first order
differential equations 25.3.5C Competence
25.3.4T2 Formation of first order The trainee should have
differential equations the ability to apply
25.3.4T3 Solutions of first order Laplace transforms to
differential equations engineering.
25.3.4T4 Application of first order
differential equations Content
25.3.4T5 Formation of the second 25.3.5T1 Definition of Laplace
order differential transforms
equations for various 25.3.5T2 Deriving Laplace
systems transforms from first
25.3.4T6 Solution of second order principles
differential equations ‘ 25.3.5T3 State properties of
25.3.4T7 Application of second Laplace transform
order differential 25.3.5T4 Determination of inverse
equations LT of simple transforms
and partial fractions
Suggested Learning Resources 25.3.5T5 Solution of differential
i) Calculators equations by LT
25.3.5T6 Solution of simultaneous
differential equations by
25.3.5 LAPLACE given initial conditions
TRANSFORMS
25.3.5T0 Specific Objectives Laplace tables
module unit, the trainee 25.3.6 FOURIER SERIES 
should be able to:
a) define the Laplace 25.3.6T0 Specific Objectives
transforms By the end of the sub
b) derive the transforms module unit, the trainee
of simple functions should be able to:
c) state the properties of a) determine the Fourier
Laplace transforms series of a periodic
d) determine the inverse function of period 2
of LT of simple  and extended to 
forms and partial b) determine the Fourier
fractions series for a non-
e) solve differential periodic function of
equation by LT the range of 2  to 
f) solve simultaneous c) determine Fourier
differential equations series for even and
odd functions and 25.3.7 LOCI
half-range series for a
given function 25.3.7T0 Specific Objectives
25.3.6T1 Determination of the should be able to:
Fourier series as a a) define the locus of a
periodic functions of point
period 2  and extended b) determine the locus of
to  a point in relation to a
25.3.6T2 Determination of Fourier circle
series of non-periodic c) calculate loci of parts
functions over a given for given mechanisms
range
25.3.6T3 Determination of Fourier 25.3.7C Competence
series for even and odd The trainee should have
functions and the half- the ability to apply loci
range series for a given to engineering.
function
Content
Competence 25.3.7T1 Definition of a point
The trainee should have 25.3.7T2 Locus of a point in
the ability to apply relation to a circle
Fourier series to 25.3.7T3 Loci of points for given
engineering. mechanism
Suggested Learning Suggested Learning Resources

Resources i) Charts
Graphs ii) Scientific calculators
26.3.0 AUTO ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC
The automotive industry is currently one of the most dynamic in
terms of technology, and in recent years vehicle operations have
greatly moved from manual to electric and/or automatic. To
address these needs, this module unit is designed with knowledge
skills and attitudes to enable trainees diagnose, repair and service
electric and electronic systems as employees of the formal or
informal industry upon completion of their training.

a) understand various types of vehicle ignition systems
b) apply the knowledge of control engineering in vehicle
control,
c) measurement and gauge systems
d) install service, diagnose and repair faults in vehicle
electrical and
e) electronic systems
f) appreciate emerging technology in the auto electrical and
electronic systems
g) observe health, environment and safety while working in a
h) vehicle electrical and electronic workshop and other work
places
Auto Electric and Electronic

Unit Hrs
T P Total
26.3.1 Vehicle  Types of ignition 8 14 22
ignition systems
systems  Operation
principles of
ignition systems
26.3.2 Charging  Charging circuit 4 4 8
System principles
 Parts of charging
system
26.3.3 Light Duty  Layout of starting 2 6 8
Starter system:
Motors  Types of Stator
motors
 Construction
 Starter motor
operation
26.3.4 Heavy Duty  Construction 4 12 16
Starter  Principle of
Motors operation
26.3.5 Lighting  Lamp 4 12 16
System construction
 Lighting system
layout
26.3.6 Vehicle  Fuel Gauge 8 14 22
Gauges  Oil Pressure
Gauge
 Coolant Levels
Gauges
 Engine
Tachometer
 Temperature
Gauge
26.3.7 Heating and  Constructional 6 6 12
Ventilation features
 Principle of
operation
26.3.8 Air  Construction 6 6 12
Conditioning  Operation of
system
 Operation of
electric control
system
26.3.9 Windscreen  Types of 2 4 8
Wipers windscreen
wipers
 Principle of
operation of
windscreen
wipers
26.3.10 Window  Heated door 2 6 8
Systems and mirrors
Door  Heated windows
Mirrors  Electrically
operated door
mirrors
 Electrically
operated window
26.3.11 Horns  Types of horns 2 2 4
 Electrical horns
26.3.12 Direction  flasher units 2 2 4
Indicators  Operation of
direction
indicators
26.3.13 Vehicle  Entertainment 2 8 10
Entertainme units
nt System  Functions of
vehicle
entertainment unit
26.3.14 Vehicle Air  Vehicle internal 2 2 4
Bags auxiliaries
 Types of air bags
 Air bag control
unit
26.3.15 Central Door  Types of central 2 4 6
Locking door locking
System systems
 Central locking
circuit
26.3.16 Security  Operation 2 4 6
Alarm  Types of alarm
Systems systems
26.3.17 Engine  Functions of 2 4 6
Immobilizer Engine
s immobilizers
 Operation of
engine
immobilizers
26.3.18 Petrol  Petrol injection 8 10 12
Injection systems
 Pressure Sensed
Petrol Injection
System
 Bosch L-Jetronic
 Functions of
electronic control
unit (ECU)of an
engine
 Extra control
circuits of an
ECU
26.3.19 Compression  E D.C. sensors 2 4 6
Ignition Fuel and actuators
System  E D.C. system
Electronic components
Diesel  Secondary control
Control (E
D.C.)
26.3.20 Engine  Engine 2 6 8
Management management
Systems system
 System analysis
 Control systems
 System modelling
 System
performance
26.3.21 Engine  Engine mapping 2 4 4
Mapping  Engine maps
26.3.22 Vehicle  Open loop 4 4 8
Control systems
systems  Closed loop
systems
26.3.23 Sensors And  Types of sensors 8 4 12
Actuators  Principle of
Used In operation of
Transmissio sensor and
n System actuators
26.3.24 Clutch  Principle of 2 4 6
Electronic operation
Control  Layout of the
clutch electronic
control
26.3.25 Manual Gear  Layout of manual 2 4 4
Box gear box
Electronic electronic
Control  Operation of
manual gear box
electronic control
26.3.26 Fuel Pump  Operation 2 4 4
 Construction
26.3.1 VEHICLE IGNITION - Primary and
SYSTEMS secondary coils
- Contact breaker
Theory points
- Condenser
26.3.1T0 Specific Objectives - Spark plugs
By the end this sub - Distributor
module unit, the trainee - Battery
should be able to: - High tension leads
a) name the various - Switch
types of ignition - Operation
systems ii) Magneto ignition
b) explain the operating - Electro
principle of various magnets
vehicle ignition - Spark plug
systems - Coils
c) describe the - Flywheel
construction of - Cam
various components - Operation
of coil iii)Transistor assisted
d) ignition system. ignition
- Contact breaker
26.3.1C Competence points
The trainee should have - Transistor
the ability to: - Coil
i) Diagnose and repair - Resistor
faults for various - Operation
vehicle ignition iv) Electronic ignition
systems - Pulse generators
ii) Test various vehicle - inductive
ignition systems - hall effect
- optical
Content - Operation
26.3.1T1 Types of ignition v) Capacitor discharge
systems ignition
i) Coil ignition - Ignition system
ii) Magneto ignition operation
iii)Transistor assisted - Pulse generator
ignition - Pulse transformer
iv) Electronic ignition - Operation
v) Capacitor discharge
ignition Practice
26.3.1T2 Operating principle of
ignition systems 26.3.1P0 Specific Objectives
i) Coil ignition By the end of the sub
should be able to
diagnose and repair Suggested Learning Resources
faults in various vehicle i) Multimeter
ignition systems ii) Vehicles fitted with
various types of
Content ignition systems
26.3.1P1 Fault diagnosis, repair iii)Vehicle manuals
and service iv) Text books
i) Coil ignition vi) Charts
- Primary and vii) Hand outs
secondary coils viii) Coil ignition system
- Contact breaker components
points
- Condenser 26.3.2 CHARGING SYSTEM
- Spark plugs
- Distributor Theory
- Battery
- High tension leads 26.3.2T0 Specific Objectives
- Switch By the end of the sub-
- Testing module unit the trainee
ii) Magneto ignition should be able:
- Electro magnets a) identify the various
- Spark plug parts of the charging
- Coils circuit.
- Flywheel b) describe the
- Cam construction and
- Operation operation of a vehicle
iii) Transistor assisted charging system
ignition
- Contact breaker 26.3.2 Competence
points The trainee should have
- Transistor the ability to:
- Coil i) explain the operation of
- Resistor a charging system .
- Testing ii) diagnose and repair
iv) Electronic ignition faults in a charging
- Testing system
- Repair
v) Capacitor discharge Content
ignition 26.3.2T1 Charging circuit
- Pulse generator principles
- Pulse transformer i) Dynamo
- Testing ii) Alternator
26.3.2T2 Parts of charging system
i) Generator/dynamo/
alternators
ii) Rectifier vii) Battery
iii)Regulator viii) alternator
iv) Battery ix) Dynamos
v) Switch x) Cables
xi) Multimeter
Practice
26.3.3 LIGHT DUTY
26.3.2P0 Specific Objectives STARTER MOTORS
module unit, the trainee Theory
should be able to:
a) identify the various 26.3.3T0 Specific Objectives
parts of a vehicle By the end of the sub-
charging system module unit the trainee
b) dismantle the various should be able to:
parts of a vehicle a) describe the layout of
charging system a starting system
c) diagnose and b) name various types of
assemble and repair starter motors
faults in the charging c) explain the principle
system of operation of
different types of
Content stator motors
26.3.2P1 Parts of a charging d) describe the
system construction of
i) Stator various starter motor
ii) rotor
iii)Rectifier, regulator Content
iv) Inspection of charging 26.3.3T1 Layout of starting
system system:
v) Faults diagnosis and 26.3.3T2 Types of Stator motors
repair i) Pre-engaged
26.3.2P2 Dismantling and ii) Inertia
assembly 26.3.3T3 Starter motor operation
26.3.2P3 Diagnoses and repair of 26.3.3T4 Construction
faults i) Armature
ii) Solenoid switch
Suggested Learning Resources iii)Pinion gear
i) Projectors iv) Ring gear
ii) Charts
iii)Starting motors Practice
iv) Tools and equipment
workshop manuals 26.3.3P0 Specific Objectives
v) Data charts By the end of the sub
vi) Various parts of module unit, the trainee
charging system should be able to
diagnose, service and b) describe the
maintain different types construction of
of starter motors different types of
heavy duty starter
Content motors
26.3.3P1 Diagnoses and
maintenance of starter 26.3.4C Competence
motors The trainee should have
i) Service the ability to explain the:
ii) overhaul i) operation of heavy
iii)Tests duty diagnose, service
and maintain starter
Competence motors
The trainee should have ii) diagnose, service and
the ability to: maintain starter
i) explain operation of motors
light duty starter
motors Content
ii) diagnose service and 26.3.4T1 Principle of operation
maintain starter i) Coaxial (sliding gear)
motors ii) Axial (sliding
armature)
Suggested Learning Resources iii)26.3.8T2 Construction
i) Text books iv) Coaxial
ii) hand outs v) Axial
iii)Starter motors
iv) multimeter Practice
v) battery
vi) spring balance 26.3.4P0 Specific Objectives
vii) workshop tools By the end of the sub
26.3.4 HEAVY DUTY should be able to
STATER MOTORS diagnose, service and
maintain different types
Theory of starter motors

By the end of the sub 26.3.4P1 Service and maintenance
module unit, the trainee i) Service
should be able to: ii) overhaul
a) explain the principle iii)Tests
of operation of
different types of Suggested Learning Resources
heavy duty i) Text books
starter motors ii) Hand outs
iii)Charts
iv) Starter motors
v) multimeter 26.3.5P0 Specific Objectives
vi) battery By the end of the sub
vii) spring balance module unit, the trainee
viii) workshop tools should be able to:
a) identify the various
26.3.5 LIGHTING SYSTEM vehicle lighting
system circuits
Theory b) diagnose and repair
faults of the vehicle
26.3.5T0 Specific Objectives lighting systems
should be able to: 26.3.5P1 Vehicle lighting circuits
a) identify the various i) Types of lamps
types of lighting ii) Beam setting
system layouts iii)Manual
b) describe the iv) Optical
construction and v) Switches
operation of different 26.3.5P2 Diagnosis and fault
types of vehicle repair
lamps.
26.3.5C Competence i) circuit diagrams
The trainee should have ii) flow charts
the ability to: iii)audio visual system
i) to explain operation of iv) circuit boards
different lighting v) different types of lamps
system layout vi) Vehicle lighting system
ii) describe the testing kits
construction of vii) Workshop manuals
different types of viii) Battery
lamps ix) Workshop tools
iii)diagnosis service and
repair vehicle lighting 26.3.6 VEHICLE GAUGES
system
Theory
Content
26.3.5T1 Lighting system layout 26.3.6T0 Specific Objectives
26.3.5T2 Lamp construction By the end of the sub
should be able to:
a) describe the
construction and
operation of different
Practice types of fuel gauges
b) describe the Practice
construction and
operation of different 26.3.6P0 Specific Objectives
types of oil gauges By the end of the sub
c) describe the module unit, the trainee
construction and should be able to:
operation of different a) diagnose, service and
types of coolant level repair faults in fuel
gauges gauges
d) describe the b) diagnose, service and
construction and repair faults in
operation of engine coolant level gauges
tachometer c) diagnose and repair
e) describe the faults related to
construction and engine tachometer
operation of different d) diagnose and repair
temperature of fuel
faults related to a
gauges
temperature gauge
26.3.6C Competence
Content
26.3.6P1 Fuel gauges
the ability to diagnose,
i) Diagnose
service and repair faults
ii) Service
in various vehicle
iii) Repair faults
gauges
26.3.6P2 Coolant level gauges
i) Diagnose
Content
ii) Service
26.3.6T1 fuel gauges
iii) Repair faults
i) Electric
26.3.6P3 Engine tachometer
ii) Electronic
i) Trouble shooting
iii)Thermal
ii) Remove/service
26.3.6T2 oil gauges
iii)Cleaning
i) electric (thermal type)
iv) Inspecting
ii) electronic (piezo
v) Replacing faulty
resistor)
tachometer
iii)Thermal type
vi) Removing (old)
iv) Piezo resistor
vii) Installing (a new one)
26.3.6T3 Coolant level gauges
viii) Testing for
i) electrical
workability
ii) electronic
26.3.6P4 Temperature gauges
26.3.6T4 Engine tachometer
i) Diagnose
i) induction
ii) Service
ii) optical
iii) Repair faults
iii)electrical
iv) testing
iv) electronic
Suggested Learning Resources i) identify components
i) Text books of a heating and
ii) Charts ventilating system.
iii)Fuel gauges ii) diagnose and repair
iv) Multi tester faults in a heating and
v) Workshop tools ventilating system
vi) Fuel gauges
vii) Oil gauges Content
viii) Coolant gauge 26.3.7T1 Constructional features
ix) a vehicle fitted with a i) Resistor block
tachometer ii) Fan
x) Temperature gauges iii)Switches
f) describe the iv) Circuitry
construction of 26.3.7T2 Operation
various types of
oil/pressure gauges Practice
Content 26.3.7P0 Specific Objectives

a) ven oil pressure gauge By the end of the sub
Suggested Learning Resources should be able to:
i) Textbooks a) identify the
ii) Lectures components of a
heating and
26.3.7 HEATING AND ventilating system.
VENTILATION b) diagnose faults in a
heating and
Theory ventilating system

By the end of the sub 26.3.7P1 Identification of:
module unit, the trainee i) motor
should be able to: ii) resistor block
a) describe the iii)fan
construction of a iv) switches
heating and v) blower
ventilating system vi) doors
b) explain the operation 26.3.7P2 Fault diagnosis
of a heating and
ventilating system in a Suggested Learning Resources
vehicle i) Voltmeter
ii) Manual
26.3.7C Competence iii)Vehicle fitted with
The trainee should have heating and
the ability to: ventilating system
26.3.8 AIR CONDITIONING 26.3.8P0 Specific Objectives
By the end of sub-
should be able to:
26.3.8T0 Specific Objectives a) identify components
By the end of the sub of an air conditioning
module unit, the trainee system
should be able to: b) diagnose faults in an
a) define air conditioning air-conditioning
system of a vehicle. system
b) describe the
construction of an air Content
conditioning system 26.3.8P1 Identification of air
of a vehicle. conditioning
c) explain the operation components
of an air conditioning 26.3.8P2 Fault diagnoses in air
system of a vehicle of conditioning systems
the electric control
system. Suggested Learning Resources
i) Charts
26.3.8C Competence ii) Manuals
The trainee should have iii)Air condition system
the ability to diagnose
and service air 26.3.9 WINDSCREEN
conditioning system WIPERS
Content Theory
26.3.8T1 Construction
i) evaporator 26.3.9T0 Specific Objectives
ii) heater blower motor By the end of this sub
iii)condenser module unit, the trainee
iv) pump should be able to:
v) drier a) explain the principle
vi) piping of operation of
vii) operation of system windscreen wipers
26.3.8T2 Operation of system b) list different types of
26.3.8T3 Operation of electric windscreen wipers
control system
26.3.9C Competence
Suggested Learning Resources The trainee should have
i) Text books the ability to:
ii) Charts i) service the
iii)Internet windscreen system
ii) diagnose and repair
Practice faults in the
windscreen system
a) explain the principle
Content of operation of
26.3.9T1 Principle of operation of window winding.
windscreen wipers b) state different types of
26.3.9T2 Types of windscreen windows
wipers c) explain the principle
i) Permanent magnet of operation of door
ii) Mechanical mirrors.
d) state different types of
Practice door mirrors
26.3.9P0 Specific Objectives 26.3. 10C Competence

By the end of the sub The trainee should have
module unit, the trainee the ability to diagnose
should be able to: and repair faults in
a) identify different window and door
types of wiper systems.
systems
b) replace wiper blades Content
c) detect motor faults 26.3. 10T1 Electrically operated
d) test the wiper system window
26.3. 10T2 Heated windows
Content 26.3. 10T3 Electrically operated
26.3.9P1 Wiper blades door mirrors
26.3.9P2 Wiper arms 26.3. 10T4 Heated door mirrors
26.3.9P3 Wiper faults
26.3.9P4 Motor faults Practice
Suggested Learning Resources 26.3. 10P0 Specific Objectives

i) Wiper system By the end of the sub
ii) Multimeter module unit, the trainee
iii)Manuals should be able to:
iv) Charts a) detect motor faults
v) Hand outs b) diagnose faults in the
vi) Text books window winding
system
26.3.10 WINDOW SYSTEMS c) diagnose faults in
AND DOOR door mirror systems
MIRRORS d) embrace emerging
technology in vehicle
Theory electrical and
electronic control
26.3. 10T0 Specific Objectives systems
should be able to:
26.3.10P1 Electrically operated ii) air horn
window iii) windrone
26.3. 10P2 Heated windows
26.3. 10P3 Electrically operated Practice
door mirrors
26.3. 10P4 Heated door mirrors 26.3.11P0 Specific Objectives
Suggested Learning Resources module unit, the trainee
i) Manuals should be able to:
ii) Window systems a) identify different
iii)Door systems types of horns
iv) Multimeter b) diagnose faults and
v) Hand outs service different types
vi) Charts of horns
vii) Text books
viii) Internet Content
26.3.11P1 Electrical horns
26.3.11 HORNS 26.3.11P2 Types of horns
i) high frequency
Theory ii) air horn
iii)windrone
By the end of the sub Suggested Learning Resources
module unit, the trainee i) different types of horns
should be able to: ii) multimeter
a) explain the principle iii)repair kit
of operation of horns iv) Hand outs
b) describe the v) Text books
construction of vi) Horns
different types of vii) Battery
horns. viii) Electrical connectors
and wires
26.3.12T0 DIRECTION
26.3.11C Competence INDICATORS
the ability to: Theory
i) install different types
of horns 26.3.12T0 Specific Objectives
ii) diagnose faults and By the end of the sub
service different module unit, the trainee
types of horns should be able to:
a) explain the principle
Content of operation of
26.3.11T1 Horn system direction indicator
26.3.11T2 Types b) list different types of
i) high frequency flasher units
26.3.12C Competence 26.3.13 VEHICLE
The trainee should have ENTERTAINMENT
the ability to service SYSTEM
direction indicators.
Theory
Content
26.3.12T1 Operation of direction 26.3.13T0 Specific Objectives
indicators By the end of the sub-
26.3.12T2 flasher units module, the trainee
i) thermal should be able to:
ii) capacitor a) list different types of
iii)electronic entertainment units of
a vehicle
Practice b) describe the functions
of different types of
26.3.12P0 Specific Objectives vehicle entertainment
By the end of the sub units
should be able to: 26.3.13C Competence
a) select and use The trainee should have
different types of the ability to:
flasher units i) operate vehicle
b) diagnose faults and entertainment units.
service direction ii) fit vehicle
indicators entertainment units
iii)diagnose and repair
faults in vehicle
Content entertainment units
26.3.12P1 Flasher unit types:
i) thermal
ii) capacitor Content
iii)electronic 26.3.13T1 Entertainment units
26.3.12P2 direction indicator i) Radio
ii) CD players
Suggested Learning Resources iii)DVD players
i) direction indicators iv) In car telephones
ii) flasher unit v) Television
iii)battery 26.3.13T2 Functions of vehicle
iv) electrical connectors entertainment unit
and wires
v) Multi meter Practice
vi) Horn repair kit
vii) Text books 26.3.13P0 Specific Objectives
viii) Charts
ix) Hand outs
By the end of the sub c) explain the operation
module unit, the trainee of the air bag control
should be able to: unit
a) select and use
different types of 26.3.14C Competence
vehicle entertainment The trainee should have
units. the ability to diagnose
b) fit different types of faults in air bags.
vehicle entertainment
units. Content
c) operate different types 26.3.14T1 Vehicle internal
of vehicle auxiliaries
entertainment units. - functions of an air bag
d) diagnose faults in 26.3.14T2 Types of air bags
vehicle entertainment 26.3.14T3 Air bag control unit
units
Practice
Content
26.3.13P1 Entertainment units 26.3.14P0 Specific Objectives
i) radio By the end of the sub
ii) CD players module unit, the trainee
iii)DVD players should be able:
iv) In car telephones a) locate position of the
v) television air bag
26.3.13P2 Fault diagnosis and b) diagnose and repair
repair faults in vehicle air
bags
i) Charts Hand outs Content
ii) Text books 26.3.14P1 Air bags
iii)Internet 26.3.14P2 Types of air bags
iv) Multimeter - electronic
v) Repair kits - all – mechanical
vi) Manuals 26.3.14P3 Air bag control
26.3.14P4 Diagnosis and repair
26.3.14 VEHICLE AIR BAGS
Theory i) Video
ii) Text books
26.3.14T0 Specific Objectives iii)Internet
By the end of the sub iv) Vehicle fitted with air
module unit, the trainee bag
should be able: v) Diagnostic kit
a) describe the function
of an air bag 26.3.15 CENTRAL DOOR
b) list types of air bags LOCKING SYSTEM
Theory Content
26.3.15P1 Types of central door
26.3.15T0 Specific Objectives locking systems
By the end of the sub i) Electromagnet type
module unit, the trainee ii) Pneumatic type
should be able to:
a) explain the principle Suggested Learning Resources
of operation of a i) Central door locking
central door locking systems
system ii) Multimeter
b) list different types of iii)Manual
door locking systems iv) Charts Hand outs
v) Text books
26.3.15C Competence vi) Internet
the ability to diagnose 26.3.166 SECURITY ALARM
faults and service central SYSTEMS
door-locking
systems Theory

26.3.15T1 Types of central door By the end of the sub
locking systems module unit, the trainee
i) Electromagnet should be able to:
ii) Pneumatic a) list different types
26.3.15T2 Central locking circuit alarm systems
b) explain operation of
different types of
alarm systems
26.3.16C Competence
Practice The trainee should have
the ability to:
26.3.15P0 Specific Objectives i) Fit security alarm
By the end of the sub system
module unit, the trainee ii) Service security alarm
should be able to: system
a) identify different
types of central door Content
locking systems 26.3.16T1 Types of alarm systems
b) diagnose faults in i) Voltage drop or
door – locking current drain
systems ii) Direct earth contact
c) service door -locking iii) Infra red
systems iv) Infra red
v) Ultrasonic b) explain the operation
vi) Shock sensor of an engine
vii) Level reference immobilizer
viii) Monitor
26.3.16T2 Operation 26.3. 17C Competence
Practice the ability to:
i) select and use
26.3.16P0 Specific Objectives components of
By the end of the sub immobilizer system
module unit, the trainee ii) fit an immobilizer
a) identify different iii)diagnose and repair
types of security faults in an
systems immobilizer system
b) fit different types of
security alarm systems Content
c) service different types 26.3. 17T1 Engine immobilization
of vehicle alarm i) Isolating system
system ii) System activation
26.3. 17T2 Operation
Content
26.3.16P1 Types of alarm systems Practice
26.3.16P2 fitting of security
systems 26.3. 17P0 Specific Objectives
26.3.16P3 Service and maintenance By the end of the sub-
module, the trainee
Suggested Learning Resources should be able to:
i) Internet a) identify the
ii) Multimeter component s of an
iii)Alarm systems engine immobilizer
iv) Manual unit
v) Text books b) activate an
immobilizer system
26.3.17 ENGINE c) fit an immobilizer
IMMOBILIZERS system
d) diagnose and repair
Theory faults in an
immobilizer system
module unit, the trainee 26.3. 17P1 Components of an
should be able to: engine immobilizer unit
a) describe the function 26.3. 17P2 Activation of an
of an engine immobilizer system
immobilizer
26.3. 17P3 Fitting of an immobilizer types of petrol
system injection systems
26.3. 17P4 Fault diagnosis and iii) operation of a
repair pressure sensed petrol
injection systems
Suggested Learning Resources iv) carry out general
i) Text books maintenance of fuel
ii) Internet injection system
iii) Hand outs v) carry out a diagnostic
iv) Immobilizer system test on a fuel injection
v) Manual system
26.3.18 PETROL INJECTION Content

26.3. 18T1 Petrol injection systems
Theory i) Electronic systems –
Lucas type
26.3.18T0 Specific Objectives ii) Ke-jetronic,
By the end of the sub iii)L-jetronic
module unit, the trainee 26.3. 18T2 Pressure sensed petrol
should be able: injection systems
a) explain the operation i) Manifold Absolute
of different petrol Pressure (MAP)
injection systems 26.3. 18T3 Bosch L-Jetronic
b) explain the operation i) vane or flap
of a pressure sensed ii) hot wire
petrol injection 26.3. 18T4 Electronic Control Unit
systems of a vehicle (ECU)
c) explain the operation i) digital control
of a Bosch L-Jetronic ii) Operation
d) explain the functions 26.3. 18T5 Extra Control Circuits
of electronic control i) cranking enrichment
unit (ECU)of an ii) after start enrichment
engine iii)hot start enrichment
e) describe the extra and deceleration
control circuits of an weakening
ECU iv) full load enrichment
v) over-run fuel cut off
26.3. 18C Competence vi) idle speed control
the ability to: Practice
i) identify different
types of petrol 26.3. 18P0 Specific objectives
injection systems By the end of the sub
ii) diagnose and repair module unit, the trainee
faults in different should be able to:
a) identify different SYSTEM,
types of petrol ELECTRONIC
injection systems DIESEL CONTROL
b) diagnose and repair (E D.C.)
faults in various types
of petrol injection 26.3.19T0 Specific Objectives
systems By the end of the sub
a) perform general module unit, the trainee
maintenance of an should be able to:
electronic fuel a) name various
injection system electronic sensors and
c) perform a full actuators of a E D.C.
diagnostic test an system
electronic petrol b) explain the operation
injection system of the components of
E D.C. system
Content c) describe the function
26.3. 18P1 Identification of of secondary control
different types of petrol sensors in an E D.C.
injection systems system.
26.3. 18P2 Diagnoses and repair of
various types of petrol Content
injection systems 26.3. 19T1 E D.C. sensors and
26.3. 18P3 General maintenance actuators
i) electrical connection i) fuel quantity
ii) fuel lines ii) start of injection
26.3. 18P4 Diagnostic test iii)quantity of exhaust gas
i) Test equipment recirculate
ii) Break out box iv) turbocharger boast
iii)Multimeter tests 26.3. 19T2 E D.C. system
Suggested Learning Resources components
i) Internet i) fuel injection
ii) Manuals ii) quantity servo
iii) Charts potentiometer
iv) Text book iii)needle lift sensor
v) Vehicle/engine fitted iv) mass air flow sensor
with pressure sensed v) coolant temperature
petrol injection system sensor
i) Vehicle fitted with vi) intake air temperature
electronic petrol 26.3. 19T3 Secondary control
injection system sensors
ii) Multimeter i) manifold absolute
vi) Test equipment pressure sensor
ii) Coolant temperature
26.3.19 COMPRESSION sensor
IGNITION FUEL
iii) Intake air temperature 26.3. 20T4 Control systems
sensor - open – loop control
iv) Vehicle speed sensor - closed – loop control
Suggested Learning Resources Suggested Learning Resources

i) Charts i) Internet
ii) Hand outs ii) Charts
iii) Text books iii)Internet
iv) Manuals iv) Journals
v) Vehicle/engine fitted v) Manual
with electronic diesel vi) Handouts
control system
26.3.21 ENGINE MAPPING
26.3.20 ENGINE
MANAGEMENT 26.3.21T0 Specific Objectives
SYSTEMS By the end of the sub
26.3.20T0 Specific Objectives should be able:
By the end of the sub a) define engine
module unit, the trainee mapping
should be able: b) describe various types
a) explain the function of of engine maps
an engine
management system. Content
b) carry out an analysis 26.3. 21T1 Engine mapping
and study of system - Characteristic map
function and 26.3. 21T2 Engine maps
performance i) Speed
respectively. ii) Load (throttle
c) describe system opening)
modelling iii)Ignition timing
d) list down different iv) Air/fuel ratio
types of control v) Engine and ambient
systems temperatures
26.3. 20C Competence Competence

The trainee should have The trainee should have
the ability to: the ability to:
i) analyze system i) define engine mapping
ii) study system ii) describe various types
of engine maps
Content
26.3. 20T1 Engine management Suggested Learning Resources
system i) Text books
26.3. 20T2 System analysis ii) Charts
26.3. 20T3 System modelling iii)Hand outs
iv) Internet 26.3.23 SENSORS AND
ACTUATORS USED
26.3.22 VEHICLE CONTROL IN TRANSMISSION
SYSTEMS SYSTEM
26.3.22T0 Specific Objectives Theory

module unit, the trainee 26.3.23T0 Specific Objectives
should be able to: By the end of the sub-
a) describe the vehicle module, the trainee
open loop control should be able:
systems a) list different types of
b) describe the vehicle sensors used in
closed loop control transmission system.
systems b) describe principles of
operation of sensors
26.3. 22TC Competence and actuators used
The trainee should transmission
have the ability to
apply open and 26.3.23C Competence
closed loop control The trainee should have
systems in vehicle the ability to:
electrical and i) Diagnose faults and
electronic control service different
systems. types of sensors and
actuators
ii) Test different types of
Content sensors and actuator
26.3. 22T1 Open loop control
systems Content
i) Ignition timing control 26.3. 23T1 Types of sensors
ii) Fuel mixture control i) speed sensors
26.3. 22T2 Closed loop control ii) temperature sensors
systems iii)position sensors
i) ignition control vi) pressure sensors
ii) closed loop dwell angle vii) Drive Train Torque
control Sensor
viii) Actuators
Suggested Learning Resources ix) Electro hydraulic
i) Internet actuators
ii) Text book 26.3. 23T2 Principle of operation of
iii)Hand outs sensor and actuators
iv) Charts
v) Manuals Suggested Learning Resources
i) Handouts
ii) Charts
iii)books 26.3.24T0 Specific Objectives
iv) Internet By the end of the sub
a) explain the layout of
26.3. 23P0 Specific Objectives clutch electronic
By the end of the sub control
module unit, the trainee b) state the principle of
should be able: operation of a clutch
a) identify different electronic control
types of sensor and
actuators 26.3.24C Competence
b) diagnose faults and The trainee should have
service different types the ability to diagnose
of sensor and actuator faults and service clutch
c) test different types of electronic control
actuator and sensor in system.
transmission system
Content
Content 26.3. 24T1 Layout of the clutch
26.3. 23P1 Type of sensors electronic control
i) temperature speed 26.3. 24T2 Principle of operation
ii) indirect sensors signals
iii)Electro hydraulic Suggested Learning
actuators Resources
iv) electro actuators i) Hand out
26.3. 23P2 Diagnosing faults in ii) Charts
sensor and actuators iii)Books
- Servicing sensor
actuators Practice
26.3. 23P3 Testing different types
of sensor and actuators 26.3. 24P0 Specific Objectives
Suggested Learning Resources module unit, the trainee
i) Engine workshop should be able to:
manual a) identify parts of a
ii) Engine analysis multi- clutch electronic
motor control
iii)Tool kit b) service clutch
electronic control unit
26.3.24 CLUTCH
ELECTRONIC Content
CONTROL 26.3. 24P1 Parts of clutch
electronic control
Theory system
26.3. 24P2 Service of clutch iii)Books
electronic control iv) Internet
system v) Audio visuals
Suggested Learning Resources Practice

i) Manuals
ii) Tool kit 26.3. 25P0 Specific Objectives
iii)Diagnostic machine By the end of the sub
iv) Clutch electronic module unit, the trainee
control unit should be able:
a) identify the manual
26.3.25 MANUAL GEAR BOX gear box electronic
ELECTRONIC control system
CONTROL b) service manual gear
box electronic control
Theory system

By the end of the sub 26.3. 25P1 Parts of manual gear
module unit, the trainee box electronic control
a) explain the layout of 26.3. 25P2 Servicing manual gear
manual electronic electronic control
control system system
b) outline the principles
of operation of
manual gear box Suggested Learning Resources
control system i) Diagnostic kit
ii) Transmission system
26.3. 25C Competence iii)Tool kit
the ability to service and 26.3.26 FUEL PUMP
test manual gear box
electronic control Theory
system.
Content By the end of the sub
26.3. 25T1 Layout of manual gear module unit, the trainee
box electronic should be able to:
26.3. 25T2 Operation of manual a) explain the operating
gear box electronic principles of an
control electric fuel pump.
b) describe the
Suggested Learning Resources construction of an
i) Hand out electric fuel pump.
ii) Charts
26.3. 26C Competence
the ability to explain the
operating principles of
an electric fuel pump.
Content
26.3. 26T1 Operation
i) Electromagnetic
26.3. 26T2 Construction
i) Armature
ii) Inlet/outlet ports

iii)charts
iv) notes
Practice
26.3. 26P0 Specific Objective

module unit, the
to diagnose faults and
service an electric fuel
pump
Content
26.3. 26P1 Fault diagnosis and
service
27.3.0 TRADE PROJECT
This module unit is intended to equip the trainee with the
knowledge, skills and attitudes to enable him/her carry out
practical project in Motor Vehicle engineering.

a) understand the importance of trade project
b) understand the methodology of carrying out a practical
project
c) produce a project working drawing
d) understand the assembly drawing of the project
e) understand the operation procedures of producing projects
parts
f) assemble the parts of the project
g) understand the testing procedures
h) present the completed project
27.3.03 Subject Summary and Time Allocation
Trade Project
Code Module Unit Content Time
Hours
Introduction to  Meaning of trade project 4
27.3.1 Trade Project  Types of project
 Importance of trade project
27.3.2 Methodology  Identification of the problem 6
 Data collection
 Analysis
 Interpretation of data
 Evaluation
 Optimum solution
27.3.3 Production of  Assembly drawing 10
Working  Details of drawings
Drawing  Parts lists
 Sectional drawing
 Bill of materials
27.3.4 Production of  Machining 8
Project Parts  Fabrication
 Finishing
Assembly of  Sub-assembly 12
27.3.5 Parts  Complete assembly
 Alignment
 Functionability
 Dimensions
27.3.6 Testing  Workmanship 6
Procedures  Finishing
 Functionability
Presentation of  Labelling the project 4
27.3.7 Completed  Name tag
Project  Index number
 Date of presentation
Total Time 50
27.3.1 INTRODUCTION TO Content
TRADE PROJECT 27.3.2 T1 Methodology of carrying
out the project
27.3.1T0 Specific Objectives i) Needs assessment
By the end of the sub ii) Data collection
module unit, the trainee iii)Analysis of the data
should be able to: iv) Interpretation of data
a) explain the meaning v) Synthesis of the data
of trade project vi) Optimum solution
b) identify types of
project 27.3.3 PRODUCTION OF
c) give importance of WORKING
trade project DRAWING
27.3.1C Competence 27.3.3 T0 Specific Objectives

The trainee should have By the end of the sub
the ability to identify module unit, the trainee
various types of projects should be able to prepare
project working detail
Content drawings
27.3.1 T1 Meaning of trade project
27.3.1 T2 Types of project 27.3.3 C Competence
27.3.1 T3 Importance of trade The trainee should have
project the ability to prepare
i) Solution to a problem project working
ii) Problem solving skill drawings.
iii)Display of technical
skills Content
27.3.3 T1 Detail (working)
27.3.2 METHODOLOGY drawing
i) blue prints
27.3.2 T0 Specific Objectives ii) standard drawing
By the end of the sub conventions and
module unit, the trainee welding symbols
should be able to explain
the methodology of 27.3.4 PRODUCTION OF
carrying out practical PROJECT PARTS
project
27.3.4T0 Specific Objective
27.3.2C Competence By the end of the sub
The trainee should have module unit, the trainee
the ability to apply the should be able to
right methodology for produce individual parts
carrying out a project of the project.
27.3.4C Competence 27.3.6C Competence
The trainee should have The trainee should have
the ability to produce the ability to test a
projects parts. finished product
Content Content
27.3.4T1 Production of individual 27.3.6 T1 Sub-assembly and
parts assembly
i) machining i) order of fitting parts
ii) fabrication ii) sequence of fitting
iii)finishing parts
iii)order of assembly
27.3.5 ASSEMBLY OF 27.3.6 T2 Alignment dimensions
PARTS and functionability
27.3.5T0 Specific Objectives 27.3.7 PRESENTATION OF

By the end of the sub COMPLETED
module unit, the trainee PROJECT
should be able to
produce an assembly 27.3.7T0 Specific Objectives
drawing of the project By the end of the sub
Content should be able to put
27.3.5T1 Assembly drawing identification marks on
i) part list the project consisting of
ii) bill of materials index number,
candidate’s name, and
27.3.5C Competence date of presentation
the ability to make 27.3.7C Competence
working drawing. The trainee should have
the ability to:
27.3.6 TESTING i) Make working drawing
PROCEDURES ii) Produce individual
parts of a project
27.3.6 T0 Specific Objectives iii)Produce sub-assembly
By the end of the sub and complete
module unit, the trainee assembly of a project
should be able to: iv) Test the alignment, and
a) produce the sub- functionability of a
assembly project
b) complete assembly of
the project
c) test the project for
alignment dimensions Content
and functionability 27.3.7T1 Labelling the project
i) Name tag
ii) Index number
iii)Date of presentation

- Well equipped
Automotive
engineering workshop
and adequate supply
of materials.
Appendices
Appendix I, Suggested Teaching and Learning Experiences
The trainer may adopt any of the following teaching/learning methods which are
not exhaustive. The trainer is encouraged to explore other suitable methods.
i) Demonstrations
ii) Lectures
iii) Illustrations
iv) Field visits
v) Case studies
vi) Field work
vii) Question and Answer
viii) Presentations
ix) Browsing Internet
Appendix II, Suggested Evaluation Methods for this course
The trainer may choose one or more of the following suggested methods of
evaluation to assess the learners.
i) Written tests
ii) Practices
iii) Observations
iv) Quizzes
v) Oral presentation
vi) Written Examination
Appendix III, Suggested List of Tools and Equipment
For 15 Trainees
ITEM Quantity
Screw Drivers
1. Screwdriver 100mm standard round blade 5
5. Screwdriver 75mm standard round bladelight 5
6. Screwdriver Phillips size O standard round blade 5
7. Screwdriver 1 standard round blade 5
10. Screwdriver Phillips stubby standard round blade 5
11. Screwdriver Standard stubby standard round blade 5
12. Screwdriver offset 6mm x 75mm 5
13. Screwdriver Offset 6mm x 110mm 5
Hammers
1. Hammers, ball pein 10mm x 150 mm 4
2. Hammers, ball pein 210gm 4
3. Hammers, ball pein 500gm 4
4. Hammers, ball pein 1kg 4
5. Hammers, soft face (plastic) 210gm 4
6. Hammers, soft face (plastic) 500gm 4
7. Hammers, lead face (plastic) 500gm 4
8. Hammers, lead face (plastic) 1kg 4
Spanners
1. Spanners open and double set 6-28mm (5 sets)
2. Spanners adjustable, 200mm 2
3. Spanners adjustable, 210mm 2
4. Spanners, Box end double 10-32 (2 sets)
5. Spanners socket set 3/8”drive 6-22mm (2 sets)
6. Spanners socket set ½ - drive 11-27mm (2 sets)
7. Spanners socket set ¼ drive 4-12 mm (2 sets)
8. Socket extensions for the above – short 2
9. Socket extensions for the above long 2
10. Socket extensions for the above (3/4) Ratchet 4
11. Pliers, long needle nose 5
12. Spanners, pipe 2
13. Spanners allen set 3
14. Spanner allen set metric 3
15. Pliers linemen 200mm with plain handle 5
16. Pliers diagonal cutting 2
17. Pliers vice grip 175mm 2
18. Pliers vice grip 210mm 2
19. Snap ring plier kit 3
20. Pliers water pump 340mm 2
21. Pliers brake spring 2
22. Files flat 2nd cut 200mm 5
23. Files flat bastard 210mm 5
24. Files round 2nd cut 200mm 5
25. Files half-round 2nd cut 210mm 5
26. Files square 2nd cut 200mm 5
27. Centre punch 5
28. Punch solid straight steel lining up (15x75mm)
29. Punch brass 5
30. ‘G’ clamps (Assorted sizes) 5
31. Drills, Hand drill 5
32. Drills sets of drills 3- 12 5
33. Jack hand hydraulic trolley types (1 ½ -5tons) 2
34. Drill press 1
35. Snip straight (340mm) 2
36. Snip compound leverage 210 L.H. 2
37. Snip compound leverage 210mm R.H 2
38. Soldering iron 5
39. i) bit 20
40. ii) electric 20
41. Tap and die set ¼” -3/4” NC 1
42. Tap and die set ¼” - ¾” NF 1
43. Tap and die set 6 – 24 mm 1
44. Die Nuts ¼ - 8NF 1
45. Die Nuts ¼” – ¾ NC 1
46. Die Nuts 6 – 18mm 1
47. Wrench torque, 0 – 50ft/LBS 1
48. Wrench torque 0 – 150ft/LBS 1
49. Wrench torque combination English Metric 1
50. Wrench torque 5m/kg to 30m/kg1/2”drive 1
51. Wrench torque 0m/kg to 45m/kg 8” drive 1
52. Wrench socket set, 9-15mm 3/8” drive deep (1 set)
53. Wrench socket set 16-21 ½ drive deep (1 sets)
54. Stud extractor set screw (2 sets)
55. Stud extractor square tapered (2 sets)
56. Stud remover, ½” drive 1
57. Bench grinder 1
58. Hydrometer 1
59. Reamers 5
60. Puller automotive set 1
61. Puller hub universal 1
62. Puller slide hammer set 1
63. Radiator flushing gun 1
64. Hydraulic press 1
65. Valve spring compressor, universal 2
66. Valve spring compressor small engines 2
67. Grease gun 3
68. Battery charger – fast (buster) 1
69. Battery carrier 1
70. Battery carrier – (strap types) 1
71. Battery service kit 2
72. Creepers garage 2
73. Rivet gun 1
74. i) pop rivet gun 5
75. ii) Grease gun 5
76. Safety stand 4
Measuring Tools, Gauges and Equipment
1. Rule steel 300mm 10

2. Straight edge 2
3. Compression gauge 2
4. Engineers squares (steel) 10
5. Gauge, feeler 4” blade 0.0015 to 0.021” 2
6. Gauge, feeler 75mm 0.05 to 1.0mm 2
7. Wire, feeler, gauge (for spark plugs)
8. Vernier caliper 150mm 5
9. Circuit tester 5
10. Tyre gauge 5
11. Timing light 1
12. Spark plug tester 2
13. Air compressor and Air hive 1
14. Surface plates 2
15. Angle plates 4
16. Vices 15
17. Guillotine 1
18. Bench Electric drilling machine 5
19. Portable Electric drilling machine 5
20. Hand drilling machine 15
21. Parts cleaner 1
22. Injector tester 4
23. Steam cleaner 1
24. Glass – bead cleaner 1
25. Wheel balancer (Electronic) 1
26. Valve grinder machine 1
27. Hot tank parts cleaner 1
28. Hydraulic floor jack 2
29. Portable hydraulic crave 1
30. Injection Pump testing rig
(phasing and calibrations) 1
31. Portable air compressor 1
32. Anvil 2
33. Movable tools rack 2
34. Fire extinguishers (foam, carbon dioxide,
dry chemical, soda acid 4
35. Buckets of sand 4
36. Vehicle stands 12
37. Trolley beds 4
38. Air impact wrench 2
39. Air hammer/chisel 1
40. Two-post vehicle lift 1
41. Brake Efficiency Testing machine 1
42. Inspection lamp 1
43. Spray gun 5
44. Chipping hammer 10
45. Soft mallet 10
46. Tool makers clamps 10
47. Hand vice 10
48. Knurling tools 5
49. Bearing puller 5
50. Bolt cutter 5
51. Pipe wrench (various sizes) 5
52. Sledge hammer 4
53. Oil cans 10
54. Vernier height gauge 3
55. Cut-out model engines (S.I) 4
56. Cut out model engines (C.I) 4
57. Allen keys (set) – various sizes 5
58. Piston ring compressor (various sizes) 5
59. Die stock set 6
60. Vee blocks (large size) 6
61. Vee blocks (small size) 6
62. Cross- pein hammers 10
63. Raw hide mallets 10
64. Brass mallet 10
65. Plastic mallet 10
66. Rubber mallet 10
67. Tinman’s snips 15
68. Try square 15
69. Screw driver (flat) 15
70. Phillips screw driver (star) 15
71. Filter belt 5
72. Piston Ring expander 5
73. Torque wrench micrometer setting 5
74. Torque wrench deflecting beam 5
75. Torque wrench dial indicator 5
76. Drill bits (Taper, plug, bottoming) 10 sets
77. Tongue and groove (channel lock pliers) 10
78. Pair of dividers 4
79. Piston Groove cleaners 4
80. Hole punch 15
81. Brake spring pliers 10
82. Jumper cable set 5
83. Engine repair stand 4
84. Tyre levers 5
85. Funnels 5
86. Electric blower 2
87. Micrometer (outside – various sizes) 15
88. Micrometer (inside – various sizes) 15
89. Dial gauge 5
90. Multi tester 10
91. Battery cell tester 5
92. Magnetic pick up tool 4
93. Hydrometer 15
94. Valve suckers 15
95. Tape measure 10
96. Battery terminal cleaner 5
97. Scribers 10
98. V-block and a pair of clamps 10
99. Counter sink 60 10
100. Counter sink 80 10
101. Growler machine 4
102. Voltameter (15V) 5
103. Bottle jack 4
104. Scissor jack 4
105. Tachometer 3
106. Depth micrometer 5
107. Cylinder bore gauge 4
108. Blow lamps 10
109. Pipe chain 3
110. Alternator tool kit 11
111. Paraffin stove 5
112. Portable electric grinders 5
113. Body spray gun 5
114. Body file frames 15
115. Body files 15
116. Body jack set 2
117. Body fender dolly set 5
118. Plumb line 5
119. Temperature gauge 5
120. Drill bits 10 sets
121. Spring balance 10
122. Exhaust gas analyzer 2
123. Clutch aligning tool 5
124. Screw extractor 5
125. Telescopic cylinder bore gauge 4 sets
126. Angle Grinder 3
127. Hand valve grinders 10
128. Single cylinder Engines 5
129. Wiper motor 12V 4
130. Electric fuel pumps 6
131. Mechanical fuel pump 10
132. Alternators 10
133. Starter motors 10
134. Water pumps 10
135. Electrical button switches 15
136. Electrical relay switches 15
137. Oil pressure switches 15
138. Electrical wires (various colours) 100metres
139. Lister Engine (Diesel) 2
140. Lister Engine (Petrol) 2
141. Engines (petrol) 5
142. Diesel Engines 5
143. Thermostats 10
144. Magnets distributors 20
145. Ignition coils 5
146. Electronic control system box 5
147. Two cylinder Engine 5
148. Brakes master cylinder with booster 4
149. Propeller shafts 10
150. Front wheel drive vehicle 2
151. Four wheel drive vehicle 2
152. Complete chassis with twin axles 2
153. Automatic gear boxes * torque converter 5
154. Rear axles with differential 3
155. Manual gear boxes 10
156. Clutch assemblies 10
157. Multiple clutches (wet) 10
158. Certifungal clutches 10
159. Auxillary brakes/ ratarders components 5
160. Steering wheel alignment equipment 1
161. Engine dynamometer 1
162. Accident Vehicle – panel beating and spray
painting 5
Tools and Equipment for Manual Metal Arc Welding
Specification Number Required

1. A.C welding transformers ( 330 Amps) 8
2. A.C Portable transformer ( 180) Amps) 2
3. Welding cables 10
- Leads 1
- Return lead 1
4. D.C generator 1
5. Petrol driven D.C generator 1
6. Leather gloves 20pairs
7. Leather aprons 17
8. Legging ( sparts) 15 pairs
9. Leather caps 15
10. Leather welders jacket 17
11. Chipping goggles 17
12. Chipping hammers 17
13. Magnetic clamps 4
14. Wire brushes 15
15. Tongs 8
16. Eye lotion ( 210 ml ) 4
17. Mole grip pliers 5
18. Slip joint pliers 5
19. Letter stamps 1 (set)
20. Number stamps 1 ( set)
21. Fire Extinguishers 4
Tools and Equipment for Oxy-Acetylene Welding
1. Acetylene cylinders
(for manifold) 2
2. Oxygen cylinder
3. For manifold 8
4. For cutting 4
5. Double stage Acetylene regulators 4
6. Double stage oxygen regulators 4
7. Single stage Acetylene regulators 2
8. Single stage oxygen regulators 2
9. Hoses - oxygen 15
10. - Acetylene 15
11. Welding torches 15
12. Cutting torches 5
13. Portable oxy acetylene set complete with cylinders 2
14. Oxy- acetylene cutting torch ( NM 210) 4
15. Oxy – acetylene complete manifold system 1
16. cylinder trolley 2
17. cylinder keys 4
18. Spark lighter 5
19. Nozzle cleaner ( set ) 4
20. Adjustable screw spanners 2
21. Welding goggles 15
22. Leather gloves 15pairs
23. Leather Aprons 15pairs
24. Leather caps 15
25. leather caps 15
26. Leather welding jacket 15
27. Clear goggles 15
28. Tongs 5
29. G- clamps various sizes 10
30. Welding nozzles ( set) 2
31. Cutting nozzles ( set) 2
32. Oxy-acetylene gas straight cutting machine 1
33. Oxy acetylene gas profile cutting machine 1
34. Sheet metal cutting Nozzle 4
35. Circular cutting attachment 2
36. Oxy-acetylene straight cutting machine complete with
aluminium rails 1
37. Profile cutting machine 1
38. Abrasive wheel cutting – off machine 1
39. Blow lamps 5
40. Paint spray gun 2
41. Angle grinder 2
42. Portable nibbling machine 1
43. Portable shearing machine 1
44. Hand lever shears 2
45. Fly press/piercing 1
Engine technology equipment

1. Engine simulators soft ware 5
2. Computer complete with accessories and
peripherals 5
3. Electronic fuel injection (EFI) engines 1
4. Variable valve timing with intelligence
(VVT-I) engine 1
5. Diesel engines 1
6. Applied automotive electronic circuits 5
7. Digital measuring instruments 5
A Trainees Tool Kit

1. Spanners
2. Ring spanners – size 6 to 28 S.I(standard)
3. Open end spanners – size 6 to30 ( standard)
4. Box spanners – size 6 to 34 ( standard) and ( plus) attachments for box
spanners
5. Hammers
6. Ball pein 1 kg
7. Ball pein 2 kg
8. Plastic hammer 0.5 to 1 kg
9. Copper hammer 1 to 2 kg
10. Screw drivers
11. Flat end ( a set)
12. Phillips ( star) ( a set)
13. Multi – purpose pliers
14. Side cutter
15. Long nose
16. Vice grip pliers
17. Feeler gauge, 75mm 0.05 to 1.0 mm
18. Feeler gauge, 4’ blade 0.0015 to 0.021”
19. Gap setter
20. Drifts ( a set)
21. Circuit tester
22. Hacksaws
23. Files
24. Code chisels
25. Punches
26. Twist drill
27. Scrapers
28. Snips
29. Stand extracto4s
30. Clamps
31. Rule
32. Spark plug sockets
33. Set of combination metric wrenches 6mm to 22 mm
34. Flash light
35. Short jumper wires
36. 12 volt continuity light
37. Tape measure
38. Spark plug gauge set ( round wire)
39. Adjustable wrench ( small and large)
40. Tire pressure gauge
41. Point file
42. Ratchet
43. Speed handle
44. 4” ( 100mm) extension
45. 8” ( 200mm) extension
46. U-joint
47. Thickness gauge ( go – on type) marked with both inches and mm
48. Digital multimeter

Diploma in Automotive Engineering

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diploma in Automotive Engineering

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diploma in Automotive Engineering

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REPUBLIC OF KENYA

TECHNICAL, INDUSTRIAL, VOCATIONAL

DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS AND REGULATIONS

KENYA INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION

DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS AND REGULATIONS

First published 2009

© Kenya Institute of Education

ISBN ---- -- --- -

Module III ...................................................................................................227

The Technical Industrial Vocational and Entrepreneurship Training

I am grateful to the staff of Kenya Institute of Education, subject and

Director Technical Education

1.1 National Goals for Education

i) Foster nationalism, patriotism and promote national unity

ii) Promote the social economic, technological and industrial needs

iii) Promote individual development and self-fulfilment

iv) Promote sound moral and religious values

v) Promote social equality and responsibility

vi) Promote respect for and development of Kenya’s rich and

vii) Promote international consciousness and foster positive

1.2 National Aims of Technical Training Programmes

1.3 Objectives of the Technician Training Programmes

2.0 Introduction to the Course

The course is in three modules. Each module prepares the trainee to

The course puts emphasis on practical work and competence acquisition,

The trainers are encouraged to continuously carry out research to establish

2.2 General Objectives of the Course

2.3 General Regulations

2.3.1 Approval of the Training Institutions

2.3.2 Duration of the Course

2.3.3 Entry Requirements

a) Passed Kenya Certificate of Secondary

2.3.4 Examinable Units

All the units in each module of the course are examinable

The examinations shall include Theory and Practical phase

16.2.0 Mechanics of - Theory and Practice

22.3.0 Thermodynamics - Theory and Practice

25.3.0 Mathematics III - Theory

2.4.1 Coursework Marks

2.4.2 Coursework Assessment

2.4.3 Compulsory Industrial Attachment/Internship for

2.4.4 Project Work

2.5.2 Internal Examinations

2.5.3 External Examinations

2.5.4 Eligibility for Candidates Entering Into External

2.5.5 Coursework/continuous Assessment

2.5.6 Examination Results

Candidates, who fail any paper (module unit) in a particular

2.5.7 Award of Certificate

2.5.8 General Examination Regulation

2.6 Course Coding and Time Allocation

TOTAL TIME FOR THE COURSE 2970

This module is designed to enable the trainee acquire necessary

The units covered in this module are:

By the end of the unit is a list of teaching/learning activities,

3.1.02 General Objectives

3.103 Module Summary and Time Allocation